Mechanical engineering and materials Books

Book SynopsisHandbook of Museum Textiles Textiles have been known to us throughout human history and played a vital role in the lives and traditions of people. Clothing was made by using different materials and methods from natural fibers. There are different varieties of textiles, out of which certain traditional textiles, archaeological findings, or fragments are of cultural, historical, and sentimental value such as tapestries, embroideries, flags, shawls, etc. These kinds of textiles, due to their historical use and environmental factors, require special attention to guarantee their long-term stability. Textile conservation is a complex, challenging, and multi-faceted discipline and it is one of the most versatile branches of conservation. Volume 1 of the Handbook of Museum Textiles focuses on conservation and cultural research and addresses the proper display, storage, upkeep, handling, and conservation technology of textile artifacts to ensure their presence for comTable of ContentsPreface xix 1 Textile Museums: Its Importance, Objectives and Functions 1 Vandana Gupta and Mangesh S. Manekar 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Museum Definition and Its Existence 2 1.3 Textile Museums and Their History 4 1.4 Importance of Textile Museums 6 1.4.1 Connective Value 6 1.4.2 Collective Value 7 1.4.3 Educative Value 10 1.4.4 Economic Value 11 1.5 Objectives of Textile Museum 14 1.6 Function of Textile Museum 14 1.7 Textile Museum and Their Future Prospects 16 1.8 Conclusion 16 References 16 2 Textile Intangible Cultural Heritage of the World 19 Ritu Pandey, Vandana Gupta, Pintu Pandit, Kumar Rohit and Suruchi Pandey 2.1 Introduction 19 2.1.1 Ancient Textiles of the World 20 2.2 Ancient Textiles of the World: Techniques and Historical Perspective 24 2.2.1 Ancient Heritage Textiles—Asia and Australia 24 2.2.1.1 Chinese Textiles 24 2.2.1.2 Japanese Textiles 24 2.2.1.3 Indian Textile 26 2.2.1.4 Turkish Textiles 27 2.2.1.5 Persian Rugs 27 2.2.2 African Textile 28 2.2.3 Scandinavian Textile Design 29 2.2.4 American Textiles 30 2.3 Role of Museum: Textile as a Part of Heritage and Culture 32 2.4 Marketing Strategies for Museums and Conservation 33 2.5 Conclusion 35 References 35 3 Important Woven Textile Specimens in World Museums 39 Karthika Audinet 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Methodology 40 3.3 Prehistoric Textiles 42 3.3.1 Textile Specimen 1.3.1 44 3.3.2 Textile Specimen 1.3.2 44 3.3.3 Textile Specimen 1.3.3 45 3.3.4 Textile Specimen 1.3.4 45 3.3.5 Textile Specimen 1.3.5 46 3.3.6 Textile Specimen 1.3.6 46 3.4 Textiles from Peru 46 3.4.1 Textile Specimen 1.4.1 48 3.4.2 Textile Specimen 1.4.2 48 3.4.3 Textile Specimen 1.4.3 49 3.4.4 Textile Specimen 1.4.4 49 3.4.5 Textile Specimen 1.4.5 49 3.4.6 Textile Specimen 1.4.6 50 3.4.7 Textile Specimen 1.4.7 50 3.5 Chinese Textiles 50 3.5.1 Textile Specimen 1.5.1 52 3.5.2 Textile Specimen 1.5.2 52 3.5.3 Textile Specimen 1.5.3 53 3.5.4 Textile Specimen 1.5.4 54 3.5.5 Textile Specimen 1.5.5 54 3.5.6 Textile Specimen 1.5.6 55 3.5.7 Textile Specimen 1.5.7 55 3.6 Textiles from the Indian Subcontinent 56 3.6.1 Textile Specimen 1.6.1 57 3.6.2 Textile Specimen 1.6.2 58 3.6.3 Textile Specimen 1.6.3 58 3.6.4 Textile Specimen 1.6.4 58 3.6.5 Textile Specimen 1.6.5 59 3.6.6 Textile Specimen 1.6.6 59 3.6.7 Textile Specimen 1.6.7 59 3.7 Textiles from Sudan, Egypt, Mali, and Ghana (North and West African Textiles) 60 3.7.1 Textile Specimen 1.7.1 61 3.7.2 Textile Specimen 1.7.2 62 3.7.3 Textile Specimen 1.7.3 63 3.7.4 Textile Specimen 1.7.4 63 3.8 Textiles from Japan 64 3.8.1 Textile Specimen 1.8.1 65 3.8.2 Textile Specimen 1.8.2 65 3.8.3 Textile Specimen 1.8.3 66 3.8.4 Textile Specimen 1.8.4 66 3.8.5 Textile Specimen 1.8.5 66 3.8.6 Textile Specimen 1.8.6 67 3.9 Textiles from Iran and Central Asia 67 3.9.1 Textile Specimen 1.9.1 69 3.9.2 Textile Specimen 1.9.2 69 3.9.3 Textile Specimen 1.9.3 69 3.9.4 Textile Specimen 1.9.4 70 3.9.5 Textile Specimen 1.9.5 70 3.10 Textiles from Italy and France 71 3.10.1 Textile Specimen 1.10.1 73 3.10.2 Textile Specimen 1.10.2 73 3.10.3 Textile Specimen 1.10.3 73 3.10.4 Textile Specimen 1.10.4 73 3.11 Conclusion: Toward an Understanding of the Historic Foundations of Woven Structures 74 References 77 List of Museums 82 Glossary 83 4 Types of Conservation of Textiles in the Museum: Their Importance and Scope 87 K. B. Binita and B. Sunita 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Importance of Conservation 88 4.3 Principles of Conservation 89 4.3.1 Determining the Need and Laying the Foundation for Conservation 89 4.3.2 The Conservation Assessment and Process 89 4.3.3 Obtaining a Conservation Assessment 89 4.3.4 Selecting an Assessor or Conservator 89 4.3.5 The Assessment as a Planning Tool 90 4.3.6 Conservation Collection Condition Survey 90 4.3.7 Object Treatment 90 4.3.8 Risk Assessment and Management 90 4.4 Types of Textile Articles Conserved 90 4.5 Methods of Conservation 91 4.5.1 Preventive Conservation 91 4.5.1.1 Climate 92 4.5.1.2 Light 92 4.5.1.3 Insects 93 4.5.1.4 Microorganisms 93 4.5.1.5 Dust, Soil, and Other Contaminants 94 4.5.1.6 Disaster 94 4.5.2 Curative/Interventive Conservation 95 4.5.2.1 Surface Cleaning 95 4.5.2.2 Vacuuming 95 4.5.2.3 Wet Cleaning 95 4.5.2.4 Solvent or Dry Cleaning 96 4.5.2.5 Stabilization 96 4.6 Storage, Display, and Handling of Museum Textiles 96 4.7 Scope of Conservation 97 4.7.1 Education and Knowledge Dissemination 97 4.7.2 Lecture, Seminar, Workshops, and Research 98 4.7.3 Photography and Publication 98 4.8 New Approaches in Conservation 98 4.9 Conclusion 99 References 99 Webliography 100 5 Fashion and Textile Museums Across the Globe 101 Arpana Kamboj and Surabhi Mahajan 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Victoria and Albert Museum, London 103 5.2.1 History 103 5.2.2 Collection 104 5.3 Fashion Museum, Bath, UK 104 5.3.1 History 104 5.3.2 Collection 105 5.4 Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York City 106 5.4.1 History 106 5.4.2 Collection 107 5.5 Musée De La Mode Et Du Textile, France 108 5.5.1 History 108 5.5.2 Collection 109 5.6 Palais Galliera, France 109 5.6.1 History 110 5.6.2 Collection 110 5.6.2.1 Eighteenth Century Dress Office 110 5.6.2.2 Nineteenth Century Ensembles Division 111 5.6.2.3 Fashion of the Principal Half of 20th Century 111 5.6.2.4 Haute Couture 111 5.6.2.5 Contemporary Office 111 5.6.2.6 Extras Office 111 5.7 Kyoto Costume Institute, Japan 111 5.7.1 History 112 5.7.2 Collection 112 5.8 Museum of Fashion Institute of Technology, New York, USA 113 5.8.1 History 113 5.8.2 Collection 114 5.9 Museo Del Traje, Spain 115 5.9.1 History 115 5.9.2 Collection 116 5.10 Fashion Institute of Design & Merchandising, California 116 5.10.1 History 117 5.10.2 Collection 117 5.11 Kent State University Museum, USA 117 5.11.1 History 118 5.11.2 Collection 119 5.12 Conclusion 119 References 119 6 Documentation of Museum Textiles 123 Simmi Bhagat and Radhana Raheja 6.1 Introduction 123 6.2 Functions of Documentation 124 6.3 Features of Documentation System 125 6.4 Collection Management Policy 126 6.5 Assessment Standards 128 6.5.1 Collection Assessment 128 6.5.2 Assessment of Objects 129 6.6 Types of Documentation 130 6.6.1 Written Description 130 6.6.2 Photographic Records 131 6.7 Formats of Documentation 136 6.7.1 Styles of Written Documentation 136 6.7.2 Manual and Digitized Documentation 136 6.8 Case Study 137 6.9 Conclusion 141 References 141 7 Ideal Storage Conditions for Museum Textiles 143 Simmi Bhagat and Kanika Sachdeva 7.1 Introduction 143 7.2 Published Standards in Museum Storage 144 7.3 Storage Design and Architecture 145 7.3.1 Museum Storage Building and Space Allocation 146 7.3.2 Building Monitoring and Maintenance 146 7.4 Environmental Conditions 147 7.4.1 Temperature and Relative Humidity 147 7.4.2 Light 148 7.5 Storage Techniques 148 7.5.1 Accession and Labeling 149 7.5.2 Flat Storage 149 7.5.3 Rolled Storage 150 7.5.4 Hanging Storage 151 7.5.5 Special Storage 152 7.6 Safety Systems 153 7.6.1 Location, Structural, and Physical Protection 153 7.6.2 Perimeter Alarms 153 7.6.3 Invigilation 154 7.6.4 Key Security 154 7.7 Disaster Handling 154 7.7.1 Protecting from Fire 155 7.7.2 Protecting from Floods 155 7.7.3 Protecting from Pests 156 7.7.4 Day-to-Day Maintenance 156 7.8 Managing Dust and Dirt 157 7.9 Pollutants 157 7.10 Conclusion 159 References 159 8 Tools and Methods for Handling and Storage of Museum Textiles 161 Pratikhya Badanayak, Seiko Jose, Ragini Dubey and Ritu Pandey 8.1 Introduction 161 8.2 Care, Maintenance, and Handling of Museum Textiles 162 8.2.1 General Storage Factors 162 8.2.2 General Guideline in Handling 163 8.3 Ideal Conditions, Temperature, Humidity 163 8.4 Storage Units 163 8.5 Storage Materials 164 8.6 Tools Used in Maintenance of Museum Textiles 164 8.6.1 Equipping the Workspace 164 8.6.2 Housekeeping 164 8.6.2.1 Cleaning the Collection and Environment 166 8.6.2.2 Basic and Best Practices for Checking and Monitoring in Museum 166 8.6.3 Materials and Supplies 167 8.6.3.1 Handling 167 8.6.4 Packing and Unpacking 168 8.6.5 Moving 170 8.6.6 Rolling and Unrolling 170 8.7 Labeling 170 8.8 Cleaning 171 8.9 Dealing with Separations 171 8.10 Tools Used for Displaying Museum Textiles 172 8.10.1 Showcases and Galleries 172 8.10.2 Frames 172 8.10.3 Mannequins 173 8.10.4 Hangers 174 8.11 Handling During Transportation 175 8.11.1 By Road 175 8.11.2 By Rail 176 8.11.3 By Sea 176 8.11.4 By Air 176 8.12 Handling Techniques and Conservation Practices of Ancient Textiles in Museums 177 8.12.1 Egyptian Shroud 177 8.12.2 Jordanian Belt 177 8.12.3 Silk Textile 177 8.12.4 Coptic Tapestry 178 8.13 Conclusions 178 References 178 9 Roles and Responsibilities of Museum Professionals 181 Kanika Sachdeva 9.1 Introduction 181 9.2 History of Museums Professionals Training in India 182 9.3 Roles in a Textile Museum 182 9.3.1 Conservator 185 9.3.2 Conservation Scientist 185 9.3.3 Curator 186 9.3.4 Collections Manager 187 9.3.5 Registrar/Documentalist 187 9.3.6 Historian 188 9.3.7 Exhibition Coordinator/Designer 188 9.3.8 Museum Education Officer 189 9.3.9 Photographer 189 9.3.10 Information Technologist 190 9.3.11 Health and Safety Officer 190 9.3.12 Security Officer 191 9.4 Conclusion 191 References 191 10 Ancient Weaving and Dyeing Techniques 193 Hannah Dewey, Meghan Lord, Seonyoung Youn, Januka Budhathoki-Uprety and Kavita Mathur 10.1 Introduction to Weaving 193 10.2 Ancient Weaving by Geographical Region 194 10.2.1 In the Middle East and Central Eurasia 194 10.2.2 In Egypt 195 10.2.3 In Greece, Italy, and Romania 196 10.2.4 In India 198 10.2.5 In Southeast Asia and China 199 10.2.6 In The Americas 200 10.3 Conclusion on Weaving Techniques 203 10.4 Introduction to Dyes and Dyeing Technologies 203 10.5 Ancient Dyes, Pigments, and Dyeing Technologies 203 10.5.1 Indigoids (Indigo and Tyrian Purple) 203 10.5.2 Quinonoids (Madder) 204 10.5.3 Carotenoids (Saffron) 204 10.5.4 Flavonoids 205 10.5.5 Dihydropyran (Brazilwood and Logwood) 205 10.5.6 Tannins 205 10.6 Conclusion 205 References 205 11 Armours: Ancient Metallic Textiles 209 Ritu Pandey, Ragini Dubey, Pintu Pandit, Suruchi Pandey, Mukesh Kumar Sinha and Amarish Dubey 11.1 Introduction 209 11.2 Parts of Armour and Accessories 210 11.2.1 Helmet 210 11.2.2 Coif 210 11.2.3 Ventail 213 11.2.4 Mail 213 11.2.5 Hauberk 213 11.2.6 Gauntlet and Pauldron 213 11.2.7 Sabatons and Greaves 214 11.3 Armour Designs 215 11.4 Armour Materials 215 11.5 Metallic Costume of King Tutankhamen 217 11.6 Conclusion 217 References 218 12 Textile Conservation in India: A Case Series 219 Deepshikha Kalsi, Elizabeth-Anne Haldane and Lynda Hillyer 12.1 Introduction 219 12.2 Internship Training in Textile Conservation at the V&A 220 12.2.1 Condition Assessment 221 12.2.2 Case Study: Conservation of a Painted and Dyed Cotton Chintz Appliqué Panel 221 12.2.3 Condition Assessment 222 12.2.4 Conservation Treatment and Mounting 222 12.3 Setting Up a Textile Conservation Studio in India 224 12.4 Conservation of an 19th Century Jama 225 12.5 Case Study—Conservation of a Military Frock Coat 227 12.5.1 Historical Context 227 12.5.2 Documentation of Construction and Condition Assessment 228 12.5.3 Conservation Treatment 229 12.5.4 Customizing the Mannequin Mount 232 12.6 Developing Display and Mounting Solutions for Flat Textiles and Costumes for the Special Exhibition PRA-KASHI Silk, Gold and Silver from the City of Lights at the National Museum, New Delhi 232 12.7 Technical Analysis and Documentation 233 12.8 Training and Outreach 234 12.8.1 Case Study—Indian Museum, Kolkata 235 12.8.2 Case Study—The Registry of Sarees, Bangalore 235 12.9 Conclusion 236 Acknowledgments 237 References 237 13 Symbolism and Conservation of Indigenous African Textiles for Museums 239 Raphael Kanyire Seidu, Ebenezer Kofi Howard, Edward Apau and Benjamin Eghan 13.1 Introduction 239 13.2 Types of Indigenous African Textiles 240 13.2.1 African Weave Traditions 240 13.2.1.1 Smock Weaves/Fugu 240 13.2.1.2 Aso-Oke 242 13.2.1.3 Kente 243 13.2.1.4 Kete 244 13.2.1.5 Akwete 245 13.2.1.6 Berber Cloth 246 13.2.1.7 Shuka Cloth 247 13.2.1.8 Kuba Raffia Cloth 247 13.2.2 African Dye Traditions 248 13.2.2.1 Adire 248 13.2.2.2 Ukara 250 13.2.2.3 Mud Cloth 251 13.2.3 African Print Traditions 253 13.2.3.1 Adinkra Cloth 253 13.2.3.2 Kanga Cloth 255 13.2.3.3 Shweshwe 256 13.2.3.4 Ankara or African Wax Prints (West Africa) or Kitenge (East Africa) 256 13.2.4 Other African Traditions 257 13.2.4.1 Bark Cloth 257 13.2.4.2 Fon Appliqué Cloth 258 13.3 Indigenous African Textiles Techniques 259 13.4 Museums in African 259 13.4.1 Challenges of Museums in Africa 260 13.4.2 Contribution of Technology for African Museums 260 13.5 Conclusion 261 References 261 Appendix (Figure sources) 265 14 Conservation of Textile Immemorial: The Fading Past of Uttarakhand Museums 267 Pooja Singh and Alka Goel 14.1 Introduction 267 14.2 Materials and Methods 269 14.2.1 Selection of Locale 269 14.2.2 Tool Preparation and Data Collection 269 14.2.3 Data Collection 269 14.2.4 Statistical Analysis of the Data 270 14.2.4.1 Weighted Mean Score 270 14.3 Results and Discussion 270 14.3.1 General Information About the Museums 270 14.3.1.1 The Number of People Who Work at the Museums that Have Been Chosen 270 14.3.1.2 Conservation Laboratories 271 14.3.1.3 Acquisition of Textile Antiquities 272 12.3.1.4 Ageing of Textile Articles Placed in Different Museums 274 14.3.1.5 Air Circulation Facilities in Museums 274 14.3.1.6 Protective Measures Used to Protect the Windows/ Ventilators From Sunlight and Dust 275 14.3.1.7 Methods Used for Identification of Fibers 276 14.3.1.8 The Details of Temperature and Relative Humidity Ranges in a Variety of Museums 276 14.3.2 Types of Display Techniques Used for Textile Antiquities 276 14.3.2.1 Labeling Methods Carried Out for the Displayed Artifacts 279 14.3.3 Storage Equipments Used in Selected Museums 280 14.3.4 The Collection of Textile Artifacts Collections in Various Museums of Uttarakhand 281 14.3.4.1 Details of Stored Textile Materials 281 14.3.4.2 Govind Ballabh Pant Museum, Almora 281 14.3.4.3 Tribal Museum, Munsyari 282 14.3.4.4 Kumaon Regiment Museum, Ranikhet 282 14.3.4.5 Lok Sangrah, Folk Culture Museum, Bhimtal 283 14.3.4.6 Jim Corbett Museum 283 14.3.4.7 Gurney House Museum, Nainital 284 14.3.5 Various Methods of Prevention Used in Various Selected Museums 284 14.3.5.1 Covering Materials Used for Various Artifacts Displayed in Selected Museums 285 14.3.5.2 Special Kind of Lighting System in the Museum to Protect the Textiles/Garments From Fading/Ageing 286 14.3.5.3 Touching on Museum Antiquities 287 14.3.6 Conservation Techniques Used in the Museum 287 14.3.6.1 Pretreatments Given to Textile Antiquities and Display Boards 287 14.3.6.2 Methods of Reinforcing the Deteriorated Textile Antiquities 288 14.3.6.3 Backing Material Used in Conservation of Museum Textiles 288 14.4 Conclusion 289 References 289 15 The Conservation and Display of Indian Textiles at the Victoria and Albert Museum 291 Elizabeth-Anne Haldane, Lynda Hillyer and Deepshikha Kalsi 15.1 Introduction to the V&A and the Indian Textile Collections 291 15.2 Care of Collections 294 15.3 Conservation 295 15.3.1 Principles of Conservation 295 15.3.2 Assessing Condition, Causes of Deterioration 295 15.3.3 Preventive Conservation 297 15.3.4 Understanding the Object—Context and Scientific Investigation 297 15.4 Object Treatment 300 15.4.1 Object Treatment—Cleaning 300 15.4.2 Surface Cleaning and Humidification 301 15.4.3 Wet Cleaning 303 15.4.4 Solvent Cleaning 305 15.4.5 Stabilization and Support 306 15.5 Display 308 15.6 Conclusion 312 Acknowledgments 312 References 313 16 Between Science and Art: Activities of the Natural Dyeing Laboratory 315 Katarzyna Schmidt-Przewoźna 16.1 Introduction 315 16.2 Promotion of Antique Dyes, Pigments, and Prints 320 16.2.1 Projects 320 16.2.2 Workshop and Exhibitions 321 16.2.3 Color Catalog of Ancient Dye and Its Reproduction 323 16.2.4 Reconstruction of Ancient Dyeing Techniques 323 16.3 Analysis of Antique Polish Kontush Sash Dyeing Material: A Case Study 324 16.4 Conclusion 325 Acknowledgment 326 References 326 17 Visitor Interactions and Museum Textiles 327 Kanika Sachdeva and Divya Singhal Gupta 17.1 Introduction 327 17.2 Textile Exhibitions—Challenges in Display 328 17.2.1 Display Method 328 17.2.1.1 Open Display or Display Cases 329 17.2.1.2 Display Design 330 17.2.1.3 Points to be Considered While Planning a Textile Display 332 17.2.1.4 Level of Interaction Between the Visitors and the Objects on Display 333 17.2.2 Display Lighting 334 17.2.2.1 Hacks for Appropriate Lighting of Textile Exhibitions in Museums 335 17.3 Exhibition Protocols Followed by the Museum 335 17.3.1 Safety Guidelines—Visitor Safety, Conduct and Access 335 17.3.2 Safety of Museum Artifacts 336 17.3.3 Let Us Look at Some Examples of the Protocols Followed by the Museums and the Changes that Have Taken Place After the Pandemic 336 17.4 Photography and Memorabilia 336 17.5 Access Guidelines for Museum Storage 337 17.6 An Ideal Textile Exhibition 338 17.6.1 Case Study 1 338 17.6.2 Case Study 2 338 17.7 Conclusion 339 References 339 18 Educational Value of Clothing and Textile Museums 341 Sara Marcketti and Jennifer Gordon 18.1 Introduction 341 18.2 Importance of Conservation in Textiles and Clothing Collections 342 18.3 Frameworks for Material Culture Analysis in the Learning Process 344 18.4 The Value of Collections to Students’ Education 344 18.4.1 The Collection at Iowa State University 345 18.5 Taxonomy of Significant Learning and Collections 345 18.5.1 Foundational Knowledge 346 18.5.2 Application 347 18.5.3 Integration 348 18.5.4 Human Dimensions 349 18.5.5 Caring 350 18.5.6 Learning How to Learn 351 18.6 Conclusion 352 References 352 19 Career in Textile Museum 355 Maanasaa Sethuraman, Suruchi Pandey and Ritu Pandey 19.1 Introduction 355 19.2 Sources of Textile Museum Collections 356 19.3 Scope of Careers in Textile Museum 358 19.3.1 Job Opportunities 358 19.3.1.1 Public Sector 359 19.3.1.2 Private Sector 361 19.3.1.3 Opportunities Offshores 362 19.3.2 Changing Hiring Trends 362 19.3.2.1 Work-Life Balance in Careers in Museum Textile 363 19.3.2.2 Job Description 363 19.4 Glimpses of Work in Progress on Museum Textile 366 19.5 Sourcing for Talent at Textile Museums 369 19.5.1 Private Job Sites 369 19.5.2 Museum Websites 370 19.5.3 Consultant Hiring 371 19.5.4 Social Media 371 19.5.5 Newspaper Advertisement 371 19.5.6 Word of Mouth 372 19.5.7 Campus Hiring 372 19.6 Educational Opportunities 374 19.6.1 School or Pre-University Level 374 19.6.2 University Level (Under Graduation) 374 19.6.3 Postgraduation 374 19.7 Sample Organization Structure 375 19.8 Limitations and Challenges in the Field of Textile Museum 375 19.9 Conclusion 375 Acknowledgment 379 References 379 Index 383

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides comprehensive coverage of organic corrosion inhibitors used in modern industrial platforms, including current developments in the design of promising classes of organic corrosion inhibitors Corrosion is the cause of significant economic and safety-related problems that span across industries and applications, including production and processing operations, transportation and public utilities infrastructure, and oil and gas exploration. The use of organic corrosion inhibitors is a simple and cost-effective method for protecting processes, machinery, and materials while remaining environmentally acceptable. Organic Corrosion Inhibitors: Synthesis, Characterization, Mechanism, and Applications provides up-to-date coverage of all aspects of organic corrosion inhibitors, including their fundamental characteristics, synthesis, characterization, inhibition mechanism, and industrial applications. Divided into five sections, the text first covers the basiTable of Contents Preface xv About the Editors xvii List of Contributors xix Part I Basics of Corrosion and Prevention 1 1 An Overview of Corrosion 3 Marziya Rizvi 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Basics about Corrosion 3 1.2 Economic and Social Aspect of Corrosion 4 1.3 The Corrosion Mechanism 5 1.3.1 Anodic Reaction 6 1.3.2 Cathodic Reactions 7 1.4 Classification of Corrosion 8 1.4.1 Uniform Corrosion 8 1.4.2 Pitting Corrosion 9 1.4.3 Crevice Corrosion 9 1.4.4 Galvanic Corrosion 9 1.4.5 Intergranular Corrosion 10 1.4.6 Stress-Corrosion Cracking (SCC) 10 1.4.7 Filiform Corrosion 10 1.4.8 Erosion Corrosion 10 1.4.9 Fretting Corrosion 11 1.4.10 Exfoliation 11 1.4.11 Dealloying 11 1.4.12 Corrosion Fatigue 11 1.5 Common Methods of Corrosion Control 11 1.5.1 Materials Selection and Design 12 1.5.2 Coatings 12 1.5.3 Cathodic Protection (CP) 12 1.5.4 Anodic Protection 13 1.5.5 Corrosion Inhibitors 13 1.6 Adsorption Type Corrosion Inhibitors 13 1.6.1 Anodic Inhibitors 14 1.6.2 Cathodic Inhibitors 14 1.6.3 Mixed Inhibitors 14 1.6.4 Green Corrosion Inhibitors 15 References 15 2 Methods of Corrosion Monitoring 19 Sheerin Masroor 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Methods and Discussion 21 2.2.1 Corrosion Monitoring Techniques 21 2.3 Conclusion 33 References 33 3 Computational Methods of Corrosion Monitoring 39 Hassane Lgaz, Abdelkarim Chaouiki, Mustafa R. Al-Hadeethi, Rachid Salghi, and Han-Seung Lee 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Quantum Chemical (QC) Calculations-Based DFT Method 40 3.2.1 Theoretical Framework 40 3.2.2 Theoretical Application of DFT in Corrosion Inhibition Studies: Design and Chemical Reactivity Prediction of Inhibitors 42 3.2.2.1 HOMO and LUMO Electron Densities 43 3.2.2.2 HOMO and LUMO Energies 43 3.2.2.3 Electronegativity (ɳ), Chemical Potential (μ), Hardness (η), and Softness (σ) Indices 43 3.2.2.4 Electron-Donating Power (ω−) and Electron-Accepting Power (ω+) 44 3.2.2.5 The Fraction of Electrons Transferred (ΔN) 44 3.2.2.6 Fukui Indices (FIs) 45 3.3 Atomistic Simulations 45 3.3.1 Molecular Dynamics (MD) Simulations 46 3.3.1.1 Total Energy Minimization 46 3.3.1.2 Ensemble 47 3.3.1.3 Force Fields 47 3.3.1.4 Periodic Boundary Condition 47 3.3.2 Monte Carlo (MC) Simulations 48 3.3.3 Parameters Derived from MD and MC Simulations of Corrosion Inhibition 48 3.3.3.1 Interaction and Binding Energies 49 3.3.3.2 Radial Distribution Function 50 3.3.3.3 Mean Square Displacement, Diffusion Coefficient, and Fractional Free Volume 50 Acknowledgments 51 Suggested Reading 51 References 51 4 Organıc and Inorganıc Corrosıon Inhıbıtors: A Comparıson 59 Goncagül Serdaroğlu and Savaş Kaya 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Corrosion Inhibitors 61 4.2.1 Organic Corrosion Inhibitors 61 4.2.1.1 Azoles 62 4.2.1.2 Azepines 63 4.2.1.3 Pyridine and Azines 64 4.2.1.4 Indoles 65 4.2.1.5 Quinolines 66 4.2.1.6 Carboxylic Acid and Biopolymers 67 4.2.1.7 Inorganic Corrosion Inhibitors 68 4.2.1.8 Anodic Inhibitors 69 4.2.1.9 Cathodic Inhibitors 69 References 69 Part II Heterocyclic and Non-Heterocyclic Corrosion Inhibitors 75 5 Amines as Corrosion Inhibitors: A Review 77 Chandrabhan Verma, M. A. Quraishi, Eno E. Ebenso,and Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 5.1 Introduction 77 5.1.1 Corrosion: Basics and Its Inhibition 77 5.1.2 Amines as Corrosion Inhibitors 78 5.1.2.1 1o-, 2o-, and 3o-Aliphatic Amines as Corrosion Inhibitors 79 5.1.2.2 Amides and Thio-Amides as Corrosion Inhibitors 81 5.1.2.3 Schiff Bases as Corrosion Inhibitors 82 5.1.2.4 Amine-Based Drugs and Dyes as Corrosion Inhibitors 85 5.1.2.5 Amino Acids and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 88 5.2 Conclusion and Outlook 88 Important Websites 89 References 89 6 Imidazole and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 95 Jeenat Aslam, Ruby Aslam, and Chandrabhan Verma 6.1 Introduction 95 6.1.1 Corrosion and Its Economic Impact 95 6.2 Corrosion Mechanism 96 6.3 Corrosion Inhibitors 97 6.4 Corrosion Inhibitors: Imidazole and Its Derivatives 98 6.5 Computational Studies 110 6.6 Conclusions 113 References 113 7 Pyridine and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 123 Chandrabhan Verma, M. A. Quraishi, and Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 7.1 Introduction 123 7.1.1 Pyridine and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 124 7.1.2 Literature Survey 125 7.1.2.1 Substituted Pyridine as Corrosion Inhibitors 125 7.1.3 Pyridine-Based Schiff Bases (SBs) as Corrosion Inhibitors 129 7.1.4 Quinoline-Based Compounds as Corrosion Inhibitors 130 7.2 Summary and Outlook 130 References 140 8 Quinoline and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 149 Chandrabhan Verma and M. A. Quraishi 8.1 Introduction 149 8.2 Quinoline and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 151 8.2.1 8-Hydroxyquinoline and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 152 8.2.2 Quinoline Derivatives Other Than 8-hydroxyquinoline as Corrosion Inhibitors 156 8.3 Conclusion and Outlook 160 References 161 9 Indole and Its Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 167 Taiwo W. Quadri, Lukman O. Olasunkanmi, Ekemini D. Akpan, and Eno E. Ebenso 9.1 Introduction 167 9.2 Synthesis of Indoles and Its Derivatives 168 9.3 A Brief Overview of Corrosion and Corrosion Inhibitors 171 9.4 Application of Indoles as Corrosion Inhibitors 172 9.4.1 Indoles as Corrosion Inhibitors of Ferrous Metals 173 9.4.2 Indoles as Corrosion Inhibitors of Nonferrous Metals 192 9.5 Corrosion Inhibition Mechanism of Indoles 201 9.6 Theoretical Modeling of Indole-Based Chemical Inhibitors 202 9.7 Conclusions and Outlook 205 References 207 10 Environmentally Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors in Oil and Gas Industry 221 M. A. Quraishi and Dheeraj Singh Chauhan 10.1 Introduction 221 10.2 Corrosion in the Oil–Gas Industry 222 10.2.1 An Overview of Corrosion 222 10.2.2 Corrosion of Steel Structures During Acidizing Treatment 223 10.2.3 Limitations of the Existing Oil and Gas Corrosion Inhibitors 223 10.3 Review of Literature on Environmentally Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 223 10.3.1 Plant Extracts 223 10.3.2 Environmentally Benign Heterocycles 224 10.3.3 Pharmaceutical Products 226 10.3.4 Amino Acids and Derivatives 228 10.3.5 Macrocyclic Compounds 229 10.3.6 Chemically Modified Biopolymers 229 10.3.7 Chemically Modified Nanomaterials 231 10.4 Conclusions and Outlook 233 References 235 Part III Organic Green Corrosion Inhibitors 241 11 Carbohydrates and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 243 Jiyaul Haque and M. A. Quraishi 11.1 Introduction 243 11.2 Glucose- Based Inhibitors 244 11.3 Chitosan- Based Inhibitors 246 11.4 Inhibition Mechanism of Carbohydrate Inhibitor 251 11.5 Conclusions 252 References 252 12 Amino Acids and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 255 Saman Zehra and Mohammad Mobin 12.1 Introduction 255 12.2 Corrosion Inhibitors 257 12.3 Why There Is Quest to Explore Green Corrosion Inhibitors? 258 12.4 Amino Acids and Their Derived Compounds: A Better Alternate to the Conventional Toxic Corrosion Inhibitors 261 12.4.1 Amino Acids: A General Introduction 261 12.4.2 A General Mechanistic Aspect of the Applicability of Amino Acids and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 263 12.4.3 Factors Influencing the Inhibition Ability of Amino Acids and Their Derivatives 264 12.5 Overview of the Applicability of Amino Acid and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitors 264 12.5.1 Amino Acids and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitor for the Protection of Copper in Different Corrosive Solution 265 12.5.2 Amino Acids and Their Derivatives as Corrosion Inhibitor for the Protection of Aluminium and Its Alloys in Different Corrosive Solution 266 12.5.3 For the Protection of Iron and Its Alloys in Different Corrosive Solution 272 12.6 Recent Trends and the Future Considerations 277 12.6.1 Synergistic Combination of Amino Acids with Other Compounds 277 12.6.2 Self-Assembly Monolayers (SAMs) 278 12.6.3 Amino Acid-Based Ionic Liquids 278 12.6.4 Amino Acids as Inhibitors in Smart Functional Coatings 279 12.7 Conclusion 280 Acknowledgments 281 References 281 13 Chemical Medicines as Corrosion Inhibitors 287 Mustafa R. Al-Hadeethi, Hassane Lgaz, Abdelkarim Chaouiki, Rachid Salghi, and Han-Seung Lee 13.1 Introduction 287 13.2 Greener Application and Techniques Toward Synthesis and Development of Corrosion Inhibitors 288 13.2.1 Ultrasound Irradiation-Assisted Synthesis 288 13.2.2 Microwave-Assisted Synthesis 289 13.2.3 Multicomponent Reactions 289 13.3 Types of Chemical Medicine-Based Corrosion Inhibitors 291 13.3.1 Drugs 291 13.3.2 Expired Drugs 291 13.3.3 Functionalized Drugs 292 13.4 Application of Chemical Medicines in Corrosion Inhibition 292 13.4.1 Drugs 292 13.4.2 Expired Drugs 297 13.4.3 Functionalized Drugs 305 Acknowledgments 306 References 306 14 Ionic Liquids as Corrosion Inhibitors 315 Ruby Aslam, Mohammad Mobin, and Jeenat Aslam 14.1 Introduction 315 14.2 Inhibition of Metal Corrosion 316 14.3 Ionic Liquids as Corrosion Inhibitors 317 14.3.1 In Hydrochloric Acid Solution 318 14.3.2 In Sulfuric Acid Solution 322 14.3.3 In NaCl Solution 334 14.4 Conclusion and Future Trends 335 Acknowledgment 336 Abbreviations 336 References 337 15 Oleochemicals as Corrosion Inhibitors 343 F. A. Ansari, Sudheer, Dheeraj Singh Chauhan, and M. A. Quraishi 15.1 Introduction 343 15.2 Corrosion 344 15.2.1 Definition and Economic Impact 344 15.2.2 Corrosion Inhibitors 344 15.3 Significance of Green Corrosion Inhibitors 345 15.4 Overview of Oleochemicals 345 15.4.1 Environmental Sustainability of Oleochemicals 345 15.4.2 Production/Recovery of Oleochemicals 346 15.5 Literatures on the Utilization of Oleochemicals as Corrosion Protection 349 15.6 Conclusions and Outlook 365 References 366 Part IV Organic Compounds-Based Nanomaterials as Corrosion Inhibitors 371 16 Carbon Nanotubes as Corrosion Inhibitors 373 Yeestdev Dewangan, Amit Kumar Dewangan, Shobha, and Dakeshwar Kumar Verma 16.1 Introduction 373 16.2 Characteristics, Preparation, and Applications of CNTs 374 16.3 CNTs as Corrosion Inhibitors 376 16.3.1 CNTs as Corrosion Inhibitors for Ferrous Metal and Alloys 376 16.3.2 CNTs as Corrosion Inhibitors for Nonferrous Metal and Alloys 377 16.4 Conclusion 381 Conflict of Interest 381 Acknowledgment 381 Abbreviations 381 References 382 17 Graphene and Graphene Oxides Layers Application as Corrosion Inhibitors in Protective Coatings 387 Renhui Zhang, Lei Guo, Zhongyi He, and Xue Yang 17.1 Introduction 387 17.2 Preparation of Graphene and Graphene Oxides 388 17.2.1 Graphene 388 17.2.2 N-doped Graphene and Its Composites 390 17.2.3 Graphene Oxides 390 17.3 Protective Film and Coating Applications of Graphene 390 17.4 The Organic Molecules Modified Graphene as Corrosion Inhibitor 398 17.5 The Effect of Dispersion of Graphene in Epoxy Coatings on Corrosion Resistance 399 17.6 Challenges of Graphene 404 17.7 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 404 References 406 Part V Organic Polymers as Corrosion Inhibitors 411 18 Natural Polymers as Corrosion Inhibitors 413 Marziya Rizvi 18.1 An Overview of Natural Polymers 413 18.2 Mucilage and Gums from Plants 415 18.2.1 Guar Gum 415 18.2.2 Acacia Gum 415 18.2.3 Xanthan Gum 417 18.2.4 Ficus Gum/Fig Gum 417 18.2.5 Daniella oliveri Gum 419 18.2.6 Mucilage from Okra Pods 419 18.2.7 Corn Polysaccharide 419 18.2.8 Mimosa/Mangrove Tannins 420 18.2.9 Raphia Gum 420 18.2.10 Various Butter-Fruit Tree Gums 420 18.2.11 Astragalus/Tragacanth Gum 421 18.2.12 Plantago Gum 421 18.2.13 Cellulose and Its Modifications 421 18.2.13.1 Carboxymethyl Cellulose 422 18.2.13.2 Sodium Carboxymethyl Cellulose 422 18.2.13.3 Hydroxyethyl Cellulose 422 18.2.13.4 Hydroxypropyl Cellulose 423 18.2.13.5 Hydroxypropyl Methyl Cellulose 423 18.2.13.6 Ethyl Hydroxyethyl Cellulose or EHEC 423 18.2.14 Starch and Its Derivatives 423 18.2.15 Pectin 424 18.2.16 Chitosan 425 18.2.17 Carrageenan 426 18.2.18 Dextrins 427 18.2.19 Alginates 427 18.3 The Future and Application of Natural Polymers in Corrosion Inhibition Studies 429 References 431 19 Synthetic Polymers as Corrosion Inhibitors 435 Megha Basik and Mohammad Mobin 19.1 Introduction 435 19.2 General Mechanism of Polymers as Corrosion Inhibitors 437 19.3 Corrosion Inhibitors – Synthetic Polymers 437 19.4 Conclusion 445 Useful Links 447 References 447 20 Epoxy Resins and Their Nanocomposites as Anticorrosive Materials 451 Omar Dagdag, Rajesh Haldhar, Eno E. Ebenso, Chandrabhan Verma,A. El Harfi, and M. El Gouri 20.1 Introduction 451 20.2 Characteristic Properties of Epoxy Resins 452 20.3 Main Commercial Epoxy Resins and Their Syntheses 453 20.3.1 Bisphenol A Diglycidyl Ether (DGEBA) 453 20.3.2 Cycloaliphatic Epoxy Resins 454 20.3.3 Trifunctional Epoxy Resins 455 20.3.4 Phenol-Novolac Epoxy Resins 456 20.3.5 Epoxy Resins Containing Fluorine 456 20.3.6 Epoxy Resins Containing Phosphorus 457 20.3.7 Epoxy Resins Containing Silicon 458 20.4 Reaction Mechanism of Epoxy/Amine Systems 459 20.5 Applications of Epoxy Resins 461 20.5.1 Epoxy Resins as Aqueous Phase Corrosion Inhibitors 461 20.5.2 Epoxy Resins as Coating Phase Corrosion Inhibitors 466 20.5.3 Composites of Epoxy Resins as Corrosion Inhibitors 467 20.5.4 Nanocomposites of Epoxy Resins as Corrosion Inhibitors 468 20.6 Conclusion 471 Abbreviations 471 References 472 Index483

Read more less

Book SynopsisPhysical Chemistry of Ionic Materials Discover the physical chemistry of charge carriers in the second edition of this popular textbook Ionic and electronic charge carriers are critical to the kinetic and electrochemical properties of ionic solids. These charge carriers are point defects and are decisive for electrical conductivity, mass transport, and storage phenomena. Generally, defects are deviations from the perfect structure, and if higher-dimensional, also crucial for the mechanical properties. The study of materials science and energy research therefore requires a thorough understanding of defects, in particular the charged point defects, their mobilities, and formation mechanisms. Physical Chemistry of Ionic Materials is a comprehensive introduction to these charge carrier particles and the processes that produce, move, and activate them. Covering both core principles and practical applications, it discusses subjects ranging from chemical bonding and thermodynamics to solid-state kinetics and electrochemical techniques. Now in an updated edition with numerous added features, it promises to be the essential textbook on this subject for a new generation of materials scientists. Readers of the 2nd Edition of Physical Chemistry of Ionic Materials will also find: Two new chapters on solid state electrochemistry and another on nanoionicsNovel brief sections on photoelectrochemistry, bioelectrochemistry, and atomistic modelling put the treatment into a broader contextDiscussion of the working principles required to understand electrochemical devices like sensors, batteries, and fuel cellsReal laboratory measurements to ground basic principles in practical experimentation Physical Chemistry of Ionic Materials is a valuable reference for chemists, physicists, and any working researchers or advanced students in the materials sciences.Table of ContentsPreface to the Second Edition ix Preface to the First Edition xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 The Defect Concept: Point Defects as the Main Actors 3 References 11 2 Bonding Aspects: From Atoms to Solid State 13 2.1 Chemical Bonding in Simple Molecules 13 2.1.1 Ideal Covalent Bonding 13 2.1.2 Polar Covalent Bonding 17 2.1.3 The Ionic Bonding 19 2.1.4 Metallic Bonding 20 2.1.5 Further Intermediate Forms of Chemical Bonding 21 2.1.6 Two-Body Potential Functions 21 2.2 Many Atoms in Contact: The Solid State as a Giant Molecule 23 2.2.1 The Band Model 23 2.2.2 Ionic Crystals 36 2.2.3 Molecular Crystals 41 2.2.4 Covalent Crystals 43 2.2.5 Metallic Crystals 44 2.2.6 Mixed Forms of Bonding in Solids 46 2.2.7 Crystal Structure and Solid State Structure 47 2.2.8 Atomistic Modelling 49 References 51 3 Phonons 55 3.1 Einstein and Debye models 55 3.2 Deviations From Ideality 58 References 61 4 Equilibrium Thermodynamics of the Perfect Solid 63 4.1 Preliminary Remarks 63 4.2 The Formalism of Equilibrium Thermodynamics 63 4.3 Examples of Equilibrium Thermodynamics 76 4.3.1 Solid–Solid Phase Transition 76 4.3.2 Melting and Evaporation 77 4.3.3 Solid–Solid Reaction 78 4.3.4 Solid–Gas Reaction 78 4.3.5 Phase Equilibria and Mixing Reactions 79 4.3.6 Spatial Equilibria in Inhomogeneous Systems 88 4.3.7 Thermodynamics of Elastically Deformed Solids 90 4.3.8 The Thermodynamic Functions of State of the Perfect Solid 91 References 93 5 Equilibrium Thermodynamics of the Real Solid 95 5.1 Preliminary Remarks 95 5.2 Equilibrium Thermodynamics of Point Defect Formation 96 5.3 Equilibrium Thermodynamics of Electronic Defects 110 5.4 Higher-Dimensional Defects 119 5.4.1 Equilibrium Concentration 119 5.4.2 Dislocations: Structure and Energetics 120 5.4.3 Interfaces: Structure and Energetics 124 5.4.4 Interfacial Thermodynamics and Local Mechanical Equilibria 130 5.5 Point Defect Reactions 139 5.5.1 Simple Internal Defect Equilibria 139 5.5.2 External Defect Equilibria 143 5.6 Doping and Freezing Effects 158 5.7 Interactions Between Defects 179 5.7.1 Associates 179 5.7.2 Activity Coefficients 187 5.8 Boundary Layers 194 5.8.1 General 194 5.8.2 Concentration Profiles in the Space Charge Zones 200 5.8.3 Conductivity Effects 204 5.8.4 Defect Thermodynamics of Interface: The Core-Space Charge Picture 209 5.8.5 Examples and Supplementary Comments 216 References 234 6 Kinetics and Irreversible Thermodynamics 243 6.1 Transport and Reaction 243 6.1.1 Transport and Reaction in the Light of Irreversible Thermodynamics 244 6.1.2 Transport and Reaction in the Light of Chemical Kinetics 249 6.2 Electrical Mobility 256 6.2.1 Ion Mobility 256 6.2.2 Electron Mobility 265 6.3 Phenomenological Diffusion Coefficients 267 6.3.1 Ion Conduction and Self-Diffusion 268 6.3.2 Tracer Diffusion 269 6.3.3 Chemical Diffusion 272 6.3.4 A Comparison of the Phenomenological Diffusion Coefficients 276 6.4 Concentration Profiles 278 6.5 Diffusion Kinetics of Stoichiometry Change 282 6.6 Complications of Matter Transport 289 6.6.1 Internal Interactions 289 6.6.2 Diffusion in Multicomponent Systems 300 6.6.3 Chemical Diffusion and Electrochemical Storage 301 6.6.4 Boundary Layers and Grain Boundaries 301 6.7 Surface Reactions 308 6.7.1 Elementary Processes 308 6.7.2 Coupled Reactions 310 6.7.3 Phenomenological Rate Constants 315 6.7.4 Reactivity, Chemical Resistance and Chemical Capacitance 328 6.8 Catalysis 329 6.9 Solid State Reactions 333 6.9.1 Fundamental Principles 333 6.9.2 Morphological and Mechanistic Complications 343 6.10 Processes Under Illumination 346 6.11 Nonlinear Phenomena 352 6.11.1 Irreversible Thermodynamics and Chemical Kinetics far From Equilibrium, and the Special Role of Autocatalysis 352 6.11.2 Nonequilibrium Structures in Time and Space 357 6.11.3 The Concept of Fractal Geometry 363 References 368 7 Solid State Electrochemistry I: Measurement Techniques 379 7.1 Preliminary Remarks 379 7.1.1 Current and Voltage in the Light of Defect Chemistry 379 7.1.2 Electrochemical Measurement Cells 383 7.2 Open Circuit Cells 384 7.2.1 Equilibrium Cells: Thermodynamic Measurements 384 7.2.2 Permeation Cells and Chemical Polarization: Measurement of Transport Parameters 390 7.3 Polarization Cells 395 7.3.1 Dielectric and Interfacial Polarization 397 7.3.2 Stoichiometry Polarization 414 7.3.3 Impedance Spectroscopy 427 7.3.4 Cyclic Voltammetry 437 7.3.5 Inhomogeneities and Heterogeneities: Many-Point Measurements and Point Electrodes 440 7.4 Coulometric Titration Cells 448 References 451 8 Solid State Electrochemistry II: Applications and Devices 457 8.1 Sensors, Actuators and Related Devices 457 8.1.1 Electrochemical Sensors 458 8.1.2 Electrochemical Actuators 464 8.2 Electrochemical Devices for Energy Conversion and Storage 467 8.2.1 Cells Generating Current: General 467 8.2.2 Fuel Cells 470 8.2.3 Batteries 477 8.2.4 Supercapacitors 495 8.2.5 Photoelectrochemical Devices 496 8.3 Bioelectrochemical Elements 498 8.4 Outlook 500 References 501 9 Nanoionics 507 9.1 Thermodynamic Aspects of Nanoparticles 508 9.2 Charge Carrier Thermodynamics in Nanosystems 516 9.3 Ion and Mass Transport Involving Interfaces 517 9.3.1 Ion Transport: Semi-Infinite 517 9.3.2 Ion Transport: Mesoscopic 520 9.3.3 Ion Transport: Mesoscopic Phase Transition 524 9.3.4 Fluoride Heterolayers 526 9.3.5 Nanocrystalline Oxides 531 9.3.6 Chemical Diffusion in Nano-Systems 535 9.4 Storage in Nanoparticles and Nanocomposites 536 9.4.1 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of Storage in Nanoparticles 536 9.4.2 Thermodynamics and Kinetics of Storage at Interfaces 539 9.4.3 Storage and Nano-Morphology 545 9.5 Nanoionics: Beyond Solid State Ionics Applications 546 9.6 Pushing Nanoionics to the Limits 547 References 549 Index 555

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplains how to apply time-tested engineering design methods when developing equipment and systems for oil industry and drilling applications Although specific requirements and considerations must be incorporated into an engineering design for petroleum drilling and production, the approach for developing a successful solution is the same across many engineering disciplines. Engineering Practice with Oilfield and Drilling Applications helps readers understand the engineering design process while demonstrating how basic engineering tools can be applied to meet the needs of the oil and petroleum industry. Divided into three parts, the book opens with an overview of best practices for engineering design and problem solving, followed by a summary of specific mechanical design requirements for different modes of power generation, transmission, and consumption. The book concludes with explanations of various analytical tools of design and their application in vibration analysis, fluid mechaTable of ContentsPreface xxi Nomenclature xxiii Part I Engineering Design and Problem Solving 1 1 Design and Problem Solving Guidelines 3 Design Methodology 3 Market Analysis 5 Operational Requirements 5 Product Development 6 Government Procurement Procedure 6 Petroleum Industry Procedure 6 Design Specifications 7 Specification Topics 7 Performance Requirements 7 Sustainability 7 Codes and Standards 8 Environmental 8 Social Considerations 9 Reliability 9 Cost Considerations 10 Aesthetics 10 Product Life Cycle 10 Product Safety and Liability 11 Engineering Ethics 11 Creating Design Alternatives 12 Tools of Innovation 12 Patents 13 Reference Books and Trade Journals 13 Experts in a Related Field 13 Brainstorming 13 Existing Products and Concepts 13 Concurrent Engineering 14 Feasibility of Concept 14 Evaluating Design Alternatives 14 Evaluation Metrics 15 Scoring Alternative Concepts 15 Starting the Design 16 Design for Simplicity 16 Identify Subsystems 17 Development of Oil and Gas Reservoirs 17 Design of Offshore Drilling and Production Systems 18 Connection of Subsystems 19 Torsion Loading on Multibolt Patterns 19 Make-Up Force on Bolts 21 Preload in Drill Pipe Tool Joints 24 Shoulder Separation 26 Possible Yielding in the Pin 26 Make-Up Torque 28 Bolted Brackets 29 Welded Connections 30 Torsion Loading in Welded Connections 30 Attachments of Offshore Cranes 32 Quality Assurance 33 Engineering Education 34 Mission Statement 34 Academic Design Specifications 34 Design of the Academic Program 35 Outcomes Assessment 35 Saturn – Apollo Project 35 Notes 36 References 36 2 Configuring the Design 37 Force and Stress Analysis 37 Beam Analysis 39 Shear and Bending Moment Diagrams 40 Bending Stresses 45 Beam Deflection and Boundary Conditions 47 Shear Stress in Beams 48 Neutral Axis 50 Composite Cross Sections 52 Material Selection 54 Mechanical Properties of Steel 54 Use of Stress–Strain Relationship in a Simple Truss 57 Statically Indeterminate Member 59 Modes of Failure 62 Material Yielding 62 Stress Concentration 62 Wear 63 Fatigue 63 Stress Corrosion Cracking 69 Brittle Fracture 69 Fluid Flow Through Pipe 70 Continuity of Fluid Flow 70 Bernoulli’s Energy Equation (First Law) 71 Reynolds Number 71 Friction Head for Laminar Flow 72 Turbulent Flow Through Pipe 72 Senior Capstone Design Project 74 Pump Selection 74 Required Nozzle Velocity 74 Nozzle Pressure 74 Pump Flow Rate Requirement 75 Vibration Considerations 77 Natural Frequency of SDOF Systems 80 Location of Center of Gravity 84 Moment of Inertia with Respect to Point A 84 Springs in Series, Parallel 85 Deflection of Coiled Springs 86 Free Vibration with Damping 86 Quantifying Damping 87 Critical Damping in Vibrating Bar System 88 Forced Vibration of SDOF Systems with Damping 89 Nonlinear Damping 93 Vibration Control 93 Other Vibration Considerations 94 Transmissibility 94 Vibration Isolation 95 Commonality of Responses 96 Application of Vibration Absorbers in Drill Collars 96 Natural Frequencies with Vibration Absorbers 97 Responses to Nonperiodic Forces 100 Dynamic Load Factor 102 Packaging 103 Vibrations Caused by Rotor Imbalance 105 Response to an Imbalanced Rotating Mass 105 Synchronous Whirl of an Imbalanced Rotating Disk 106 Balancing a Single Disk 109 Synchronous Whirl of Rotating Pipe 109 Stability of Rotating Pipe under Axial Load 110 Balancing Rotating Masses in Two Planes 112 Refining the Design 113 Manufacturing 113 Manufacturing Drawings 114 Dimensioning 114 Tolerances 115 Three Types of Fits 116 Surface Finishes 117 Nanosurface Undulations 118 Machining Tools 119 Lathes 119 Drill Press 119 Milling Machines 120 Machining Centers 120 Turning Centers 120 References 121 Part II Power Generation, Transmission, Consumption 123 3 Power Generation 125 Water Wheels 125 Fluid Mechanics of Water Wheels 125 Steam Engines 127 Steam Locomotives 128 Power Units in Isolated Locations 130 Regional Power Stations 131 Physical Properties of Steam 131 Energy Extraction from Steam 132 First Law of Thermodynamics – Enthalpy 132 Entropy – Second Law 132 Thermodynamics of Heat Engines 133 Steam Turbines 135 Electric Motors 136 Internal Combustion Engines 137 Four Stroke Engine 137 Two Stroke Engines 138 Diesel Engines 139 Gas Turbine Engines 139 Impulse/Momentum 141 Energy Considerations 142 Engine Configurations 142 Rocket Engines 144 Rocketdyne F-1 Engine 144 Atlas Booster Engine 144 Gas Dynamics Within Rocket Engines 145 Rocket Dynamics 146 Energy Consumption in US 147 Solar Energy 148 Hydrogen as a Fuel 149 Hydroelectric Power 149 Wind Turbines 149 Geothermal Energy 149 Atomic Energy 150 Biofuels 150 Notes 150 References 150 4 Power Transmission 151 Gear Train Transmission 153 Water Wheel Transmission 153 Fundamental Gear Tooth Law 154 Involute Gear Features 154 Gear Tooth Size – Spur Gears 156 Simple Gear Train 158 Kinematics 158 Worm Gear Train 159 Planetary Gear Trains 160 Compound Gear Trains 161 Pulley Drives 162 Rope and Friction Pulleys 162 Belted Connections Between Pulley Drives 164 Fundamentals of Shaft Design 166 Shear Stress 167 Stress Analysis of Shafts 170 Twisting in Shafts Having Multiple Gears 171 Keyway Design 172 Mechanical Linkages 173 Relative Motion Between Two Points 173 Absolute Motion Within a Rotating Reference Frame 175 Scotch Yoke 177 Slider Crank Mechanism 178 Velocity Analysis 179 Acceleration Analysis 180 Four-Bar Linkage 181 Velocity Analysis 183 Acceleration Analysis 183 Three Bar Linkage 184 Velocity Equation 185 Acceleration Equation 185 Velocity Analysis 186 Acceleration Analysis 187 Geneva Mechanism 188 Flat Gear Tooth and Mating Profile 189 Cam Drives 191 Cam Drives – Linear Follower 191 Velocity Analysis 191 Acceleration Polygon 193 Cam with Linear Follower, Roller Contact 194 Velocity Analysis – Rotating Reference Frame 195 Acceleration Analysis – Rotating Reference Frame 195 Velocity Analysis – Ritterhaus Model 196 Acceleration Analysis – Ritterhaus Model 196 Cam with Pivoted Follower 196 Power Screw 198 Hydraulic Transmission of Power 199 Kinematics of the Moineau Pump/Motor 202 Mechanics of Positive Displacement Motors 203 References 208 5 Friction, Bearings, and Lubrication 209 Rolling Contact Bearings 209 Rated Load of Rolling Contact Bearings 210 Effect of Vibrations on the Life of Rolling Contact Bearings 213 Effect of Environment on Rolling Contact Bearing Life 216 Effect of Vibration and Environment on Bearing Life 217 Hydrostatic Thrust Bearings 220 Flow Between Parallel Plates 220 Fluid Mechanics of Hydrostatic Bearings 222 Optimizing Hydrostatic Thrust Bearings 224 Pumping Requirements 224 Friction Losses Due to Rotation 225 Total Energy Consumed 226 Coefficient of Friction 227 Squeeze Film Bearings 228 Pressure Distribution Under a Flat Disc 228 Comparison of Pressure Profiles 230 Spring Constant of Hydrostatic Films 231 Damping Coefficient of Squeeze Films 231 Other Shapes of Squeeze Films 233 Squeeze Film with Recess 233 Squeeze Film Under a Washer 234 Spherical Squeeze Film 235 Nonsymmetrical Boundaries 236 Application to Wrist Pins 237 Thick Film Slider Bearings 240 Slider Bearings with Fixed Shoe 240 Load-Carrying Capacity 243 Friction in Slider Bearings 243 Coefficient of Friction 244 Center of Pressure 244 Slider Bearing with Pivoted Shoe 245 Frictional Resistance 246 Coefficient of Friction 246 Exponential Slider-Bearing Profiles 247 Pressure Distribution for Exponential Profile 247 Pressure Comparison with Straight Taper Profile 248 Load-Carrying Capacity 249 Pressure Distribution for Open Entry 249 Exponential Slider Bearing with Side Leakage 250 Hydrodynamic Lubricated Journal Bearings 254 Pressure Distribution Around an Idealized Journal Bearing 254 Load-Carrying Capacity 257 Minimum Film Thickness in Journal Bearings 258 Friction in an Idealized Journal Bearing 259 Petroff’s Law 259 Sommerfeld’s Solution 260 Stribeck Diagram and Boundary Lubrication 261 Regions of Friction 261 Comparison of Journal Bearing Performance with Roller Bearings 263 Journal Bearing 263 Roller Contact Bearing (See Footnote 1) 263 Ball Bearing (See Footnote 1) 264 Note 264 References 264 6 Energy Consumption 267 Subsystems of Drilling Rigs 267 Draw Works in Drilling Rigs 269 Block and Tackle Hoisting Mechanism 270 Spring Constant of Draw Works Cables 270 Band Brakes Used to Control Rate of Decent 270 Rotary Drive and Drillstring Subsystem 272 Kelly and Rotary Table Drive 272 Friction in Directional Wells 272 Top Drive 273 Drillstring Design and Operation 275 Buoyancy 276 Hook Load 277 Definition of Neutral Point 277 Basic Drillstring: Drill Pipe and Drill Collars 279 Physical Properties of Drill Pipe 279 Selecting Drill Pipe Size and Grade 281 Select Pipe Grade for a Given Pipe Size 281 Determine Maximum Depth for Given Pipe Size and Grade 282 Roller Cone Rock Bits 283 Polycrystalline Diamond Compact (PDC) Drill Bits 283 Natural Diamond Drill Bits 284 Hydraulics of Rotary Drilling 285 Optimized Hydraulic Horsepower 285 Field Application 288 Controlling Formation Fluids 290 Hydrostatic Drilling Mud Pressure 290 Annular Blowout Preventer 290 Hydraulic Rams 292 Casing Design 293 Collapse Pressure Loading (Production Casing) 295 Burst Pressure Loading (Production Casing) 295 API Collapse Pressure Guidelines 297 Plastic Yielding and Collapse with Tension 297 Summary of Pressure Loading (Production Casing) 298 Effect of Tension on Casing Collapse 298 Tension Forces in Casing 300 Design of 95 8 in. Production Casing 302 Design Without Factors of Safety 302 Directional Drilling 306 Downhole Drilling Motors 306 Rotary Steerable Tools 307 Stabilized Bottom-Hole Assemblies 308 Power Units at the Rig Site 310 References 310 Part III Analytical Tools of Design 313 7 Dynamics of Particles and Rigid Bodies 315 Statics – Bodies in Equilibrium 315 Force Systems 316 Freebody Diagrams 318 Force Analysis of Trusses 318 Method of Joints 319 Method of Sections 319 Kinematics of Particles 320 Linear Motion 320 Rectangular Coordinates 321 Polar Coordinates 322 Velocity Vector 325 Acceleration Vector 325 Curvilinear Coordinates 325 Navigating in Geospace 328 Tracking Progress Along a Well Path 328 Minimum Curvature Method 329 Dogleg Severity 331 Projecting Ahead 332 Kinematics of Rigid Bodies 333 Rigid Body Translation and Rotation 333 General Plane Motion 334 Dynamics of Particles 335 Units of Measure 335 Application of Newton’s Second Law 336 Static Analysis 336 Dynamic Analysis 337 Work and Kinetic Energy 337 Potential Energy 339 Drill Bit Nozzle Selection 341 Impulse–Momentum 342 Impulse–Momentum Applied to a System of Particles 343 Mechanics of Hydraulic Turbines 345 Performance Relationships 349 Maximum Output of Drilling Turbines 350 Dynamics of Rigid Bodies 351 Rigid Bodies in Plane Motion 352 Translation of Rigid Bodies 354 Rotation About a Fixed Point 354 Center of Gravity of Connecting Rod 355 Mass Moment of Inertia of Connecting Rod 356 General Motion of Rigid Bodies 356 Dynamic Forces Between Rotor and Stator 359 Interconnecting Bodies 361 Gear Train Start-Up Torque 361 Kinetic Energy of Rigid Bodies 363 The Catapult 364 Impulse–Momentum of Rigid Bodies 364 Linear Impulse and Momentum 365 Angular Impulse and Momentum 365 Angular Impulse Caused by Stabilizers and PDC Drill Bits 368 Accounting for Torsional Flexibility in Drill Collars 369 Interconnecting Bodies 370 Conservation of Angular Momentum 371 References 374 8 Mechanics of Materials 375 Stress Transformation 376 Theory of Stress 377 Normal and Shear Stress Transformations 377 Maximum Normal and Maximum Shear Stresses 378 Mohr’s Stress Circle 381 Theory of Strain 383 Strain Transformation 384 Mohr’s Strain Circle 386 Principal Axes of Stress and Strain 386 Generalized Hooke’s Law 388 Theory of Plain Stress 388 Orientation of Principal Stress and Strain 389 Theory of Plain Strain 391 Pressure Vessel Strain Measurements 391 Analytical Predictions of Stress and Strain 391 Strain in the Spherical Cap 393 Conversion of Strain Measurements to Principal Strains and Stresses 393 Beam Deflections 396 Cantilever Beam with Concentrated Force 397 Cantilevered Beam with Uniform Load 398 Simply Supported Beam with Distributed Load 399 Statically Indeterminate Beams 400 Multispanned Beam Columns 402 Large Angle Bending in Terms of Polar Coordinates 403 Bending Stresses in Drill Pipe Between Tool Joints 405 Application to Pipe Bending in Curved Well Bores 408 Multispanned Beam in Terms or Polar Coordinates 410 Pulling Out of the Well Bore 410 Columns and Compression Members 411 Column Buckling Under Uniform Compression 411 Columns of Variable Cross Section 415 Tubular Buckling Due to Internal Pressure 416 Effective Tension in Pipe 417 Buckling of Drill Collars 418 Combined Effects of Axial Force and Internal/External Pressure 420 Buckling of Drill Pipe 420 Bending Equation for Marine Risers 424 Unique Features of the Differential Equation of Bending 424 Effective Tension 426 Buckling of Marine Risers 426 Tapered Flex Joints 429 Equation of Bending 430 Parabolic Approximation to Moment of Inertia 430 Solution to Differential Equation 432 Application to Marine Risers 435 Torsional Buckling of Long Vertical Pipe 435 Boundary Conditions 436 Both Top and Bottom Ends Pinned 438 Simply Supported at Both Ends with no End Thrust 440 Force Applied to Lower End 441 Effect of Drilling Fluid on Torsional Buckling 442 Lower Boundary Condition Fixed 442 Operational Significance 442 Pressure Vessels 443 Stresses in Thick Wall Cylinders 443 Stresses in Thin-Wall Cylinders 444 Stresses Along a Helical Seam 444 Interference Fit Between Cylinders 445 Thin-Wall Cylinders 445 Surface Deflections of Thick-Wall Cylinders 447 Thick Wall Cylinder Enclosed by Thin Wall Cylinder 448 Thick Wall Cylinder Enclosed by Thick Wall Cylinder 448 Elastic Buckling of Thin Wall Pipe 449 Bresse’s Formulation 450 Application to Long Cylinders 451 Thin Shells of Revolution 452 Curved Beams 455 Location of Neutral Axis 455 Stress Distribution in Cross Section 456 Shear Centers 460 Unsymmetrical Bending 464 Principal Axis of Inertia 464 Neutral Axis of Bending 468 Bending Stresses 470 Beams on Elastic Foundations 471 Formulating the Problem 472 Mathematical Solution 473 Solution to Concentrated Force 474 Radial Deflection of Thin Wall Cylinders Due to Ring Loading 475 Formulation of Spring Constant 476 Equation of Bending for Cylindrical Arc Strip 477 Reach of Bending Moment 480 Bending Stress in Wall of a Multi Banded Cylinder 480 Criteria of Failure 482 Combined Stresses 482 Internal Pressure 483 Applied Torque 483 Bending Moment 483 Failure of Ductile Materials 484 Visualization of Stress at a Point 485 Pressure Required to Yield a Cylindrical Vessel 486 Failure of Brittle Materials 487 Mode of Failure in Third Quadrant 489 References 489 9 Modal Analysis of Mechanical Vibrations 491 Complex Variable Approach 491 Complex Transfer Function 493 Interpretation of Experimental Data 493 Natural Frequency 494 Damping Factor 494 Spring Constant 495 Mass 495 Damping Coefficient 495 Two Degrees of Freedom 495 Natural Frequencies and Modes of Vibration 495 SDOF Converted to 2-DOF 497 Single Degree of Freedom 497 Two Degrees of Freedom 498 Other 2-DOF Systems 499 Undamped Forced Vibrations (2 DOF) 500 Undamped Dynamic Vibration Absorber 502 Base and Absorber Pinned Together 503 Multi-DOF Systems – Eigenvalues and Mode Shapes 507 Flexibility Matrix – Stiffness Matrix 508 Direct Determination of the Stiffness Matrix 511 Direct Determination of the Mass Matrix 512 Amplitude and Characteristic Equations 512 Parameters Not Chosen at Discrete Masses 514 Lateral Stiffness of a Vertical Cable 515 Building the Damping Matrix 516 Modal Analysis of Discrete Systems 516 Orthogonal Properties of Natural Modes 517 Proportional Damping 518 Transforming Modal Solution to Local Coordinates 519 Free Vibration of Multiple DOF Systems 520 Free Vibration of 2 DOF Systems 521 Suddenly Stopping Drill Pipe with the Slips 522 Critical Damping of Vibration Modes 524 Forced Vibration by Harmonic Excitation 526 Complex Variable Approach 526 Harmonic Excitation of 3 DOF Systems 527 Modal Solution of a Damped 2-DOF System 529 General Complex Variable Solution 530 Experimental Modal Analysis 532 Modal Response to Nonperiodic Forces 535 Natural Frequencies of Drillstrings 536 References 538 10 Fluid Mechanics 541 Laminar Flow 541 Viscous Pumps 541 Force to Move Runner 543 Capillary Tubes 544 Flow Through Noncircular Conduits 545 Elliptical Conduit 545 Rectangular Conduit 546 Unsteady Flow Through Pipe 547 Hydraulics of Non-Newtonian Fluids 551 Hydraulics of Drilling Fluids 551 Pressure Loss Inside Drill Pipe 551 Pressure Loss in Annulus 552 Oil Well Drilling Pumps 552 Drilling Hydraulics 554 Power Demands of Downhole Motors 556 Performance of Positive Displacement Motors (PDM) 557 Application of Drilling Turbines 560 Hydraulic Demands of Drilling Motors – Turbines 561 Fluid Flow Around Vibrating Micro Cantilevers 562 Mathematical Model 563 Fluid Pressure Formulation 564 Fluid Velocity Formulation 565 References 566 11 Energy Methods 569 Principle of Minimum Potential Energy 569 Stable and Unstable Equilibrium 569 Stability of Floating Objects 570 Stability of a Vertical Rod 572 Rayleigh’s Method 573 Multiple Degrees of Freedom 574 Structure Having Two Degrees of Freedom 574 Analysis of Beam Deflection by Fourier Series 576 Concentrated Load 577 Distributed Load 577 Axially Loaded Beam (Column) 578 Principle of Complementary Energy 579 Engineering Application 580 Castigliano’s Theorem 582 Chemically Induced Deflections 588 Microcantilever Sensors 588 Simulation Model 588 Molecular and Elastic Potential Energies 591 References 592 Index 593

Read more less

Book SynopsisDynamic System Modeling & Analysis with MATLAB & Python A robust introduction to the advanced programming techniques and skills needed for control engineering In Dynamic System Modeling & Analysis with MATLAB & Python: For Control Engineers, accomplished control engineer Dr. Jongrae Kim delivers an insightful and concise introduction to the advanced programming skills required by control engineers. The book discusses dynamic systems used by satellites, aircraft, autonomous robots, and biomolecular networks. Throughout the text, MATLAB and Python are used to consider various dynamic modeling theories and examples. The author covers a range of control topics, including attitude dynamics, attitude kinematics, autonomous vehicles, systems biology, optimal estimation, robustness analysis, and stochastic system. An accompanying website includes a solutions manual as well as MATLAB and Python example code. Dynamic System Modeling & Analysis with MATLABTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xv Acronyms xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Scope of the Book 1 1.2 Motivation Examples 2 1.2.1 Free-Falling Object 2 1.2.1.1 First Program in Matlab 4 1.2.1.2 First Program in Python 10 1.2.2 Ligand–Receptor Interactions 14 1.3 Organization of the Book 21 Exercises 21 Bibliography 22 2 Attitude Estimation and Control 23 2.1 Attitude Kinematics and Sensors 23 2.1.1 Solve Quaternion Kinematics 26 2.1.1.1 MATLAB 26 2.1.1.2 Python 29 2.1.2 Gyroscope Sensor Model 33 2.1.2.1 Zero-Mean Gaussian White Noise 33 2.1.2.2 Generate Random Numbers 34 2.1.2.3 Stochastic Process 40 2.1.2.4 MATLAB 41 2.1.2.5 Python 45 2.1.2.6 Gyroscope White Noise 49 2.1.2.7 Gyroscope RandomWalk Noise 50 2.1.2.8 Gyroscope Simulation 53 2.1.3 Optical Sensor Model 57 2.2 Attitude Estimation Algorithm 64 2.2.1 A Simple Algorithm 64 2.2.2 QUEST Algorithm 65 2.2.3 Kalman Filter 66 2.2.4 Extended Kalman Filter 75 2.2.4.1 Error Dynamics 76 2.2.4.2 Bias Noise 77 2.2.4.3 Noise Propagation in Error Dynamics 78 2.2.4.4 State Transition Matrix, Φ 84 2.2.4.5 Vector Measurements 84 2.2.4.6 Summary 86 2.2.4.7 Kalman Filter Update 86 2.2.4.8 Kalman Filter Propagation 87 2.3 Attitude Dynamics and Control 88 2.3.1 Dynamics Equation of Motion 88 2.3.1.1 MATLAB 91 2.3.1.2 Python 94 2.3.2 Actuator and Control Algorithm 95 2.3.2.1 MATLAB Program 98 2.3.2.2 Python 101 2.3.2.3 Attitude Control Algorithm 103 2.3.2.4 Altitude Control Algorithm 105 2.3.2.5 Simulation 106 2.3.2.6 MATLAB 107 2.3.2.7 Robustness Analysis 107 2.3.2.8 Parallel Processing 110 Exercises 113 Bibliography 115 3 Autonomous Vehicle Mission Planning 119 3.1 Path Planning 119 3.1.1 Potential Field Method 119 3.1.1.1 MATLAB 122 3.1.1.2 Python 126 3.1.2 Graph Theory-Based Sampling Method 126 3.1.2.1 MATLAB 128 3.1.2.2 Python 129 3.1.2.3 Dijkstra’s Shortest Path Algorithm 130 3.1.2.4 MATLAB 130 3.1.2.5 Python 131 3.1.3 Complex Obstacles 134 3.1.3.1 MATLAB 135 3.1.3.2 Python 141 3.2 Moving Target Tracking 145 3.2.1 UAV and Moving Target Model 145 3.2.2 Optimal Target Tracking Problem 148 3.2.2.1 MATLAB 149 3.2.2.2 Python 151 3.2.2.3 Worst-Case Scenario 153 3.2.2.4 MATLAB 157 3.2.2.5 Python 159 3.2.2.6 Optimal Control Input 164 3.3 Tracking Algorithm Implementation 167 3.3.1 Constraints 167 3.3.1.1 Minimum Turn Radius Constraints 167 3.3.1.2 Velocity Constraints 169 3.3.2 Optimal Solution 172 3.3.2.1 Control Input Sampling 172 3.3.2.2 Inside the Constraints 175 3.3.2.3 Optimal Input 177 3.3.3 Verification Simulation 180 Exercises 182 Bibliography 182 4 Biological System Modelling 185 4.1 Biomolecular Interactions 185 4.2 Deterministic Modelling 185 4.2.1 Group of Cells and Multiple Experiments 186 4.2.1.1 Model Fitting and the Measurements 188 4.2.1.2 Finding Adaptive Parameters 190 4.2.2 E. coli Tryptophan Regulation Model 191 4.2.2.1 Steady-State and Dependant Parameters 194 4.2.2.2 Padé Approximation of Time-Delay 195 4.2.2.3 State-Space Realization 196 4.2.2.4 Python 205 4.2.2.5 Model Parameter Ranges 206 4.2.2.6 Model Fitting Optimization 213 4.2.2.7 Optimal Solution (MATLAB) 221 4.2.2.8 Optimal Solution (Python) 223 4.2.2.9 Adaptive Parameters 226 4.2.2.10 Limitations 226 4.3 Biological Oscillation 227 4.3.1 Gillespie’s Direct Method 231 4.3.2 Simulation Implementation 234 4.3.3 Robustness Analysis 241 Exercises 245 Bibliography 246 5 Biological System Control 251 5.1 Control Algorithm Implementation 251 5.1.1 PI Controller 251 5.1.1.1 Integral Term 252 5.1.1.2 Proportional Term 253 5.1.1.3 Summation of the Proportional and the Integral Terms 253 5.1.1.4 Approximated PI Controller 253 5.1.1.5 Comparison of PI Controller and the Approximation 254 5.1.2 Error Calculation: ΔP 260 5.2 Robustness Analysis: 𝜇-Analysis 269 5.2.1 Simple Examples 269 5.2.1.1 𝜇 Upper Bound 272 5.2.1.2 𝜇 Lower Bound 275 5.2.1.3 Complex Numbers in MATLAB/Python 278 5.2.2 Synthetic Circuits 280 5.2.2.1 MATLAB 281 5.2.2.2 Python 281 5.2.2.3 𝜇-Upper Bound: Geometric Approach 290 Exercises 291 Bibliography 292 6 FurtherReadings295 6.1 Boolean Network 295 6.2 Network Structure Analysis 296 6.3 Spatial-Temporal Dynamics 297 6.4 Deep Learning Neural Network 298 6.5 Reinforcement Learning 298 Bibliography 298 Appendix A Solutions for Selected Exercises 301 A.1 Chapter 1 301 Exercise 1.4 301 Exercise 1.5 301 A.2 Chapter 2 302 Exercise 2.5 302 A.3 Chapter 3 302 Exercise 3.1 302 Exercise 3.6 303 A.4 Chapter 4 303 Exercise 4.1 303 Exercise 4.2 303 Exercise 4.7 304 A.5 Chapter 5 304 Exercise 5.2 304 Exercise 5.3 304 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe latest edition of the leading resource on unmanned aerial vehicle systems In the newly revised Fifth Edition of Introduction to UAV Systems, an expert team of aviators, engineers, and researchers delivers the fundamentals of UAV systems for both professionals and students in UAV courses. Suitable for students in both Aerospace Engineering programs, as well as Flight and Aeronautics programs, this new edition now includes end-of-chapter questions and online instructor ancillaries that make it an ideal textbook. As the perfect complement to the author's Design of Unmanned Aerial Systems, this book includes the history, classes, and missions of UAVs. It covers fundamental topics, like aerodynamics, stability and control, propulsion, loads and structures, mission planning, payloads, and communication systems. Brand-new materials in areas including autopilots, quadcopters, payloads, and ground control stations highlight the latest industry technologies. The authors also discuss: A thorough introduction to the history of unmanned aerial vehicles, including their use in various conflicts, an overview of critical UAV systems, and the Predator/ReaperA comprehensive exploration of the classes and missions of UAVs, including several examples of UAV systems, like Mini UAVs, UCAVs, and quadcoptersPractical discussions of air vehicles, including coverage of topics like aerodynamics, flight performance, stability, and controlIn-depth examinations of propulsion, loads, structures, mission planning, control systems, and autonomy Perfect for professional aeronautical and aerospace engineers, as well as students and instructors in courses like Unmanned Aircraft Systems Design and Introduction to Unmanned Aerial Systems, Introduction to UAV Systems is also an indispensable resource for anyone. seeking coverage of the latest industry advances and technologies in UAV and UAS technology.Table of ContentsPreface Aerospace Series List Acknowledgments List of Acronyms Part One Introduction 1. History and Overview 1.1. Overview 1.2. History 1.2.1. Early History 1.2.2. The Vietnam War 1.2.3. Resurgence 1.2.4. Joint Operations 1.2.5. Desert Storm 1.2.6. Bosnia 1.2.7. Afghanistan and Iraq 1.2.8. Long-Range Long-Endurance Operations 1.3. Overview of UAV Systems 1.3.1. Air Vehicle 1.3.2. Mission Planning and Control Station 1.3.3. Launch and Recovery Equipment 1.3.4. Payloads 1.3.5. Data Links 1.3.6. Ground Support Equipment 1.4. The Aquila 1.4.1. Aquila Mission and Requirements 1.4.2. Air Vehicle 1.4.3. Ground Control Station 1.4.4. Launch and Recovery 1.4.5. Payload 1.4.6. Other Equipment 1.4.7. Summary 1.5. Global Hawk 1.5.1. Mission Requirements and Development 1.5.2. Air Vehicle 1.5.3. Payloads 1.5.4. Communications System 1.5.5. Development Setbacks 1.5. Predator Family 1.5.1. Predator Development 1.5.2. Reaper 1.5.3. Features 1.6. Top UAV Manufacturers 1.7. Ethical Concerns of UAVs Questions 2 Classes and Missions of UAVs 2.1. Overview 2.2. Classes of UAV Systems 2.2.1. Classification Criteria 2.2.2. Classification by Range and Endurance 2.2.3. Classification by Missions 2.2.4. The Tier System 2.3. Examples of UAVs by Size Group 2.3.1. Micro UAVs 2.3.2. Mini UAVs 2.3.3. Very Small UAVs 2.3.4. Small UAVs 2.3.5. Medium UAVs 2.3.6. Large UAVs 2.4. Expendable UAVs Questions Part Two The Air Vehicle 3 Aerodynamics 3.1. Overview 3.2. Aerodynamic Forces 3.3. Mach Number 3.4. Airfoil 3.5. Pressure Distribution 3.6. Drag Polar 3.7. The Real Wing and Airplane 3.8. Induced Drag 3.9. Boundary Layer 3.10. Friction Drag 3.11. Total Air-Vehicle Drag 3.12. Flapping Wings 3.13. Aerodynamic Efficiency Questions 4 Performance 4.1. Overview 4.2. Cruising Flight 4.3. Range 4.3.1. Range for a Non-Electric-Engine Propeller-Driven Aircraft 4.3.2. Range for a Jet-Propelled Aircraft 4.4. Endurance 4.4.1. Endurance for a Non-Electric-Engine Propeller-Driven Aircraft 4.4.2. Endurance for a Jet-Propelled Aircraft 4.5. Climbing Flight 4.6. Gliding Flight 4.7. Launch 4.8. Recovery Questions 5 Flight Stability and Control 5.1. Overview 5.2. Trim 5.2.1. Longitudinal Trim 5.2.2. Directional Trim 5.2.3. Lateral Trim 5.2.4. Summary 5.3. Stability 5.3.1. Longitudinal Static Stability 5.3.2. Directional Static Stability 5.3.3. Lateral Static Stability 5.3.4. Dynamic Stability 5.4. Control 5.4.1. Aerodynamic Control 5.4.2. Pitch Control 5.4.3. Directional Control 5.4.4. Lateral Control Questions 6 Propulsion 6.1. Overview 6.2. Propulsion Systems Classification 6.3. Thrust Generation 6.4. Powered Lift 6.5. Sources of Power 6.5.1. Four-Cycle Engine 6.5.2. Two-Cycle Engine 6.5.3. Rotary Engine 6.5.4. Gas Turbine Engines 6.5.5. Electric Motors 6.6. Sources of Electric Energy 6.6.1. Batteries 6.6.2. Solar Cells 6.6.3. Fuel Cells 6.7. Power and Thrust 6.7.1. Relation between Power and Thrust 6.7.2. Propeller 6.7.3. Variations of Power and Thrust with Altitude Questions 7 Air Vehicle Structures 7.1. Overview 7.2. Structural Members 7.2.1. Skin 7.2.3. Fuselage Structural Members 7.2.3. Wing and Tail Structural Members 7.2.4. Other Structural Members 7.3. Basic Flight Loads 7.4. Dynamic Loads 7.5. Structural Materials 7.5.1. Overview 7.5.2. Aluminum 7.6. Composite Materials 7.6.1. Sandwich Construction 7.6.2. Skin or Reinforcing Materials 7.6.3 Resin Materials 7.6.4. Core Materials 7.7. Construction Techniques 7.8. Basic Structural Calculations 7.8.1. Normal and Shear Stress 7.8.2. Deflection 7.8.3. Bulking load 7.8.4. Factor of Safety 7.8.5. Structural Fatigue Questions Part Three Mission Planning and Control 8 Mission Planning and Control Station 8.1. Introduction 8.2. MPCS Subsystems 8.3. MPCS Physical Configuration 8.4. MPCS Interfaces 8.5. MPCS Architecture 8.5.1. Fundamentals 8.5.2. Local Area Networks 8.5.3. Levels of Communication 8.5.4. Bridges and Gateways 8.6. Elements of a LAN 8.6.1. Layout and Logical Structure (Topology) 8.6.2. Communications Medium 8.6.3. Network Transmission and Access 8.7. OSI Standard 8.7.1. Physical Layer 8.7.2. Data-Link Layer 8.7.3. Network Layer 8.7.4. Transport Layer 8.7.5. Session Layer 8.7.6. Presentation Layer 8.7.7. Application Layer 8.8. Mission Planning 8.9. Pilot-In-Command Questions 9 Control of Air Vehicle and Payload 9.1. Overview 9.2. Levels of Control 9.3. Remote Piloting the Air Vehicle 9.3.1. Remote Manual Piloting 9.3.2. Autopilot-Assisted Control 9.3.3. Complete Automation 9.3.4. Summary 9.4. Autopilot 9.4.1. Fundamental 9.4.2. Autopilot Categories 9.4.3. Inner and Outer Loops 9.4.4. Overall Modes of Operation 9.4.5. Control Process 9.4.6. Control Axes 9.4.7. Controller 9.4.8. Actuator 9.4.9. Open-Source Commercial Autopilots 9.5. Sensors Supporting the Autopilot 9.5.1. Altimeter 9.5.2. Airspeed Sensor 9.5.3. Attitude Sensors 9.5.4. GPS 9.5.5. Accelerometers 9.6. Navigation and Target Location 9.7. Controlling Payloads 9.7.1. Signal Relay Payloads 9.7.2. Atmospheric, Radiological, and Environmental Monitoring 9.7.3. Imaging and Pseudo-Imaging Payloads 9.8. Controlling the Mission 9.9. Autonomy Questions Part Four Payloads 10 Reconnaissance/Surveillance Payloads 10.1. Overview 10.2. Imaging Sensors 10.3. Target Detection, Recognition, and Identification 10.3.1. Sensor Resolution 10.3.2. Target Contrast 10.3.3. Transmission through the Atmosphere 10.3.4. Target Signature 10.3.5. Display Characteristics 10.3.6. Range Prediction Procedure 10.3.7. A few Considerations 10.3.8. Pitfalls 10.4. The Search Process 10.4.1. Types of Search 10.4.2. Field of View 10.4.3. Search Pattern 10.4.4. Search Time 10.5. Other Considerations 10.5.1. Location and Installation 10.5.2. Stabilization of the Line of Sight 10.5.3. Gyroscope and Gimbal 10.5.4. Gimbal-Gyro Configuration 10.5.5. Thermal Design 10.5.6. Environmental Conditions Affecting Stabilization 10.5.7. Boresight 10.5.8. Stabilization Design Questions 11 Weapon Payloads 11.1. Overview 11.2. History of Lethal Unmanned Aircraft 11.3. Mission Requirements for Armed Utility UAVs 11.4. Design Issues Related to Carriage and Delivery of Weapons 11.4.1. Payload Capacity 11.4.2. Structural Issues 11.4.3. Electrical Interfaces 11.4.4. Electromagnetic Interference 11.4.5. Launch Constraints for Legacy Weapons 11.4.6. Safe Separation 11.4.7. Data Links 11.4.8. Payload Location 11.5. Signature Reduction 11.5.1. Acoustical Signatures 11.5.2. Visual Signatures 11.5.3. Infrared Signatures 11.5.4. Radar Signatures 11.5.5. Emitted Signals 11.5.6. Active Susceptibility Reduction Measures 11.6. Autonomy for Weapon Payloads 11.6.1. Fundamental Concept 11.6.2. Rules of Engagement Questions 12 Other Payloads 12.1. Overview 12.2. Radar 12.2.1. General Radar Considerations 12.2.2. Synthetic Aperture Radar 12.3. Electronic Warfare 12.4. Chemical Detection 12.5. Nuclear Radiation Sensors 12.6. Meteorological and Environmental Sensors 12.7. Pseudo-Satellites 12.8. Robotic Arm 12.9. Package and Cargo 12.10. Urban Air Mobility Questions Part Five Data Links 13 Data-Link Functions and Attributes 13.1. Overview 13.2. Background 13.3. Data-Link Functions 13.4. Desirable Data-Link Attributes 13.4.1. Worldwide Availability 13.4.2. Resistance to Unintentional Interference 13.4.3. Low Probability of Intercept (LPI) 13.4.4. Security 13.4.5. Resistance to Deception 13.4.6. Anti-ARM 13.4.7. Anti-Jam 13.4.8. Digital Data Links 13.4.9. Signal Strength 13.5. System Interface Issues 13.5.1. Mechanical and Electrical 13.5.2. Data-Rate Restrictions 13.5.3. Control-Loop Delays 13.5.4. Interoperability, Interchangeability, and Commonality 13.6. Antennas 13.6.1. Omnidirectional Antenna 13.6.2. Parabolic Reflectors 13.6.3. Array/Directional Antennas 13.6.4. Lens Antennas 13.7. Data Link Frequency Questions 14 Data-Link Margin 14.1. Overview 14.2. Sources of Data-Link Margin 14.2.1. Transmitter Power 14.2.2. Antenna Gain 14.2.3. Processing Gain 14.3. Anti-Jam Margin 14.3.1. Definition of Anti-Jam Margin 14.3.2. Jammer Geometry 14.3.3. System Implications of AJ Capability 14.3.4. Anti-Jam Uplinks 14.4. Propagation 14.4.1. Obstruction of the Propagation Path 14.4.2. Atmospheric Absorption 14.4.3. Precipitation Losses 14.5. Data-Link Signal-to-Noise Budget Questions 15 Data-Rate Reduction 15.1. Overview 15.2. Compression Versus Truncation 15.3. Video Data 15.3.1. Gray Scale 15.3.2. Encoding of Gray Scale 15.3.3. Effects of Bandwidth Compression on Operator Performance 15.3.4. Frame Rate 15.3.5. Control Loop Mode 15.3.6. Forms of Truncation 15.3.7. Summary 15.4. Non-Video Data 15.5. Location of the Data-Rate Reduction Function Questions 16 Data-Link Tradeoffs 16.1. Overview 16.2 Basic Tradeoffs 16.3. Pitfalls of “Putting Off” Data-Link Issues 16.4. Future Technology Questions Part Six Launch and Recovery 17 Launch Systems 17.1. Overview 17.2. Conventional Takeoff XXX 17.3. Basic Considerations 17.4. Launch Methods for Fixed-Wing Air Vehicles 14.4.1. Overview 17.4.2. Rail Launchers 17.4.3. Pneumatic Launchers 17.4.4. Hydraulic-Pneumatic Launchers 17.4.5. Zero Length RATO Launch of UAVs 17.4.6. Tube Launch 17.5. Rocket Assisted Takeoff xxx 17.5.1. RATO Configuration 17.5.2. Ignition Systems 17.5.3. Expended RATO Separation 17.5.4. Other Launch Equipment 17.5.5. Energy (Impulse) Required 17.5.6. Propellant Weight Required 17.5.7. Thrust, Burning Time, and Acceleration 17.6. Vertical Takeoff Questions 18 Recovery Systems 18.1. Overview 18.2. Conventional Landing 18.3. Vertical Net Systems 18.4. Parachute Recovery 18.5. VTOL UAVs 18.6. Mid-Air Retrieval 18.7. Shipboard Recovery 18.8. Break-Apart Landing 18.9. Skid and Belly Landing 18.10. Suspended Cables Questions 19 Launch and Recovery Tradeoffs 19.1. UAV Launch Method Tradeoffs 19.2. Recovery Method Tradeoffs 19.3. Overall Conclusions Questions 20 Rotary-Wing UAVs and Quadcopters 20.1. Overview 20.2. Rotary-Wing Configurations 20.2.1. Single Rotor 20.2.2. Twin Co-axial Rotors 20.2.3. Twin Tandem Rotors 20.2.4. Multi-copter 20.3. Hybrid UAVs 20.3.1. Tilt Rotor 20.3.2. Tilt Wing 20.3.3. Thrust Vectoring 20.3.4. Fixed-Wing Quadcopter Combination 20.4. Quadcopters 20.4.1. Overview 20.4.2. Aerodynamics 20.4.3. Control Questions References

Read more less

Book SynopsisThermal Systems Design Discover a project-based approach to thermal systems design In the newly revised Second Edition of Thermal Systems Design: Fundamentals and Projects, accomplished engineer and educator Dr. Richard J. Martin offers senior undergraduate and graduate students an insightful exposure to real-world design projects. The author delivers a brief review of the laws of thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, heat transfer, and combustion before moving on to a more expansive discussion of how to apply these fundamentals to design common thermal systems like boilers, combustion turbines, heat pumps, and refrigeration systems. The book includes design prompts for 14 real-world projects, teaching students and readers how to approach tasks like preparing Process Flow Diagrams and computing the thermodynamic details necessary to describe the states designated therein. Readers will learn to size pipes, ducts, and major equipment and to prepare Piping and InsTable of ContentsPreface to the First Edition (A Most Practical Guidebook) xi Acknowledgments xi Preface to the Second Edition (Fundamentals and Projects) xiii Acknowledgments xv About the Author and the Textbook xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Thermodynamics 1 1.1 Units of Measure 1 1.2 Mass/Force Unit Conversion 2 1.3 Standard Temperature and Pressure 3 1.4 Control Mass, Control Volume 3 1.5 Laws of Thermodynamics 5 1.6 Conservation Laws 6 1.7 Thermodynamic Variable Categories 7 1.8 Ideal Gas Law 10 1.9 History of Temperature 11 1.10 Thermodynamic States 12 1.11 Internal Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy 13 1.12 Availability (Exergy) 15 1.13 Homework Problems 16 Cited References 17 2 Fluid Mechanics 19 2.1 Viscosity, Shear, Velocity 19 2.2 Hydrostatics, Buoyancy 20 2.3 The Continuity Equation 21 2.4 Mass, Volume, Mole Flows 22 2.5 Reynolds Number, Velocity Profiles 23 2.6 The Momentum Equation 27 2.7 Bernoulli’s Equation 27 2.8 Stagnation, Static, Dynamic Pressure 28 2.9 Friction Factor, Hydraulic Diameter 29 2.10 Moody Chart, Chen Equation 31 2.11 Modified Bernoulli Equation 33 2.12 Alternate Moody Charts 33 2.13 Entry Effects, Minor Losses 35 2.14 Porous Media Pressure Drop 36 2.15 Homework Problems 37 Cited References 38 3 Heat Transfer 41 3.1 Fourier’s Law 41 3.2 Newton’s Law of Cooling 43 3.3 The Stefan–Boltzmann Law 43 3.4 The Energy Equation 44 3.5 The Entropy Equation 45 3.6 Electricity Analogy for Heat 45 3.7 Film, Mean Temperature 47 3.8 Nusselt, Prandtl Numbers 48 3.9 Flows Across Tube Banks 49 3.10 “Gotcha” Variables 52 3.11 Radiation and Natural Convection 53 3.12 Radiant Exchange 54 3.13 Types of Heat Exchangers 58 3.14 Heat Exchanger Fundamentals 59 3.15 Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient 59 3.16 LMTD Method 60 3.17 Effectiveness-NTU Method 61 3.18 Porous Media Heat Transfer 63 3.19 External Convection to Individual Spheres and Cylinders 65 3.20 Homework Problems 67 Cited References 68 4 Introduction to Combustion 71 4.1 Fuels for Combustion 71 4.2 Air for Combustion 72 4.3 Atomic and Molar Mass 73 4.4 Balancing Chemical Equations 73 4.5 Stoichiometry and Equivalence Ratio 74 4.6 The Atom Equations 76 4.7 Sensible and Chemical Enthalpies 78 4.8 Thermochemical Property Tables 82 4.9 Enthalpy of Combustion 83 4.10 Enthalpy Datum States 85 4.11 Adiabatic Combustion Temperature 86 4.12 Equilibrium and Kinetics 88 4.13 Pollutant Formation and Control 93 4.14 Combustion Safety Fundamentals 95 4.15 Other Topics in Combustion 96 4.16 Homework Problems 97 Cited References 98 5 Process Flow Diagrams 101 5.1 Intelligent CAD 101 5.2 Equipment 102 5.3 Process Lines 105 5.4 Valves and Instruments 105 5.5 Nonengineering Items 105 5.6 Heat and Material Balance 106 5.7 PFD Techniques 107 5.8 Homework Problems 111 Cited References 113 6 Advanced Thermodynamics 115 6.1 Equations of State 115 6.2 Thermodynamic Property Diagrams 117 6.3 Gibbs, Helmholtz, and Maxwell 118 6.4 Equations of State 121 6.5 Boiling and Condensation 124 6.6 Psychrometry 126 6.7 Liquid–Vapor Equilibrium for NH3 + H2O Mixtures 133 6.8 Efficiency vs Effectiveness 137 6.9 Space vs Time 139 6.10 Homework Problems 141 Cited References 142 7 Burners and Heat Recovery 145 7.1 Burners 145 7.2 Combustion Safeguarding 147 7.3 Thermal Oxidizers 149 7.4 Destruction Efficiency 151 7.5 Recuperators and Regenerators 152 7.6 Packed-bed Heat Storage 156 7.7 Heat Exchanger Discretization 157 7.8 Thermal Destruction of Airborne Pathogens 159 7.9 Special Atmosphere Heat Treating 160 7.10 Burner and Heat Exchanger Failures 161 7.11 Homework Problems 163 References 166 8 Boilers and Power Cycles 169 8.1 Rankine Cycle 169 8.2 Boiler Terminology 171 8.3 Efficiency Improvement 174 8.4 Controls and Safeguards 177 8.5 Blowdown and Water Treatment 179 8.6 Air Pollutant Reduction 181 8.7 Organic Rankine Cycle 185 8.8 Boiler Failure Analysis 186 8.9 Homework Problems 189 Cited References 191 9 Combustion Turbines 193 9.1 Turbomachinery 193 9.2 Brayton Cycle 194 9.3 Polytropic Processes 196 9.4 Isentropic Efficiency 197 9.5 Gas Property Relationships 200 9.6 Reheating, Intercooling 201 9.7 Recuperation 202 9.8 Homework Problems 204 Cited References 206 10 Refrigeration and Heat Pumps 207 10.1 Vapor Refrigeration Cycle 207 10.2 Gas Refrigeration Cycle 210 10.3 Heat Pump Efficiency 211 10.4 Sizing and Energy Usage 212 10.5 Refrigerants 214 10.6 Compressors 217 10.7 Air Handlers 219 10.8 Refrigeration Control 222 10.9 Coil Defrost 224 10.10 Compressorless Refrigeration 225 10.11 Thermoelectric Coolers 234 10.12 Refrigeration System Failures 235 10.13 Homework Problems 238 Cited References 242 11 Other Thermal Systems 245 11.1 Solar Fluid Heating 245 11.2 Fluid Heaters 248 11.3 Evaporative Cooling 251 11.4 Geothermal Heat Sink 252 11.5 Thermal Energy Storage 254 11.6 Thick-layer Product Dehydration 257 11.7 Desalination 259 11.8 Steam Sterilization 261 11.9 Espresso Machine 262 11.10 Hot Air Balloon 266 11.11 Homework Problems 269 Cited References 272 12 Pipe and Fluid Mover Analysis 275 12.1 Fluid Mover Categories 275 12.2 Conveying Means Categories 277 12.3 Leak Prevention 278 12.4 Pressure Rise and Drop 279 12.5 Electricity Analogy for Flow 280 12.6 Piping Network Rules 282 12.7 Blower and System Curves 283 12.8 Pump and Blower Work 287 12.9 Compressibility in Long Pipes 291 12.10 Chimney Effect 292 12.11 Homework Problems 295 Cited References 297 13 Thermal Protection 299 13.1 Refractory Ceramics 299 13.2 Refractory Metals 301 13.3 Thermal Insulation 301 13.4 Radiative-Convective Insulation Systems 304 13.5 Skin Contact Burns 304 13.6 Protection Against Thermal Expansion 305 13.7 Protection Against Thermal Shock 308 13.8 Homework Problems 309 Cited References 310 14 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams 311 14.1 Design Packages 311 14.2 Temperature Sensors 313 14.3 Pressure Sensors 315 14.4 Flow Sensors 317 14.5 Level Sensors 319 14.6 Exhaust Gas Analyzers 321 14.7 Combustion Safety Instruments 323 14.8 Valves and Actuators 325 14.9 ISA Tag Glossary 329 14.10 P&ID Techniques 331 14.11 Homework Problems 332 Cited References 333 15 Control of Thermal Systems 335 15.1 Control Nomenclature 335 15.2 Thermostatic Control 335 15.3 PID Control 338 15.4 Safety Controls and Interlocks 341 15.5 Sequencing Control 342 15.6 Ladder Logic 343 15.7 Homework Problems 345 Cited References 346 16 Process Safety 347 16.1 Safety Terminology 347 16.2 Safety Hierarchy 349 16.3 Safeguards and Warnings 350 16.4 History of Safety Standards 351 16.5 Process Hazard Analysis 352 16.6 Homework Problems 354 Cited References 355 17 Process Quality Methods 357 17.1 Quality Terminology 357 17.2 Advanced Statistical Methods for Quality in Thermal Processes 358 17.3 Management of Change for Quality, Stewardship, and Safety 362 17.4 Homework Problems 364 Cited References 366 18 Procurement, Operation, and Maintenance 367 18.1 Engineering Design Deliverable 367 18.2 Engineering Data Sheets 367 18.3 Construction and Commissioning 368 18.4 Inspection, Maintenance, and Training 371 18.5 Operation and Maintenance Manual 373 18.6 Homework Problems 375 Cited References 375 Appendix A Property Tables 377 Appendix B Excel (VBA) Custom Functions 449 Index 511

Read more less

Book SynopsisTWO-DIMENSIONAL (2D) NMR METHODS Practical guide explaining the fundamentals of 2D-NMR for experienced scientists as well as relevant for advanced students Two-Dimensional (2D) NMR Methods is a focused work presenting an overview of 2D-NMR concepts and techniques, including basic principles, practical applications, and how NMR pulse sequences work. Contributed to by global experts with extensive experience in the field, Two-Dimensional (2D) NMR Methods provides in-depth coverage of sample topics such as: Basics of 2D-NMR, data processing methods (Fourier and beyond), product operator formalism, basics of spin relaxation, and coherence transfer pathways Multidimensional methods (single- and multiple-quantum spectroscopy), NOESY (principles and applications), and DOSY methods Multiple acquisition strategies, anisotropic NMR in molecular analysis, ultrafast 2D methods, and multidimensional methods in bio-NMR TROSY (prTable of ContentsDedication v List of Contributors xvii Preface xix 1 Basics of Two-dimensional NMR 1Malcolm H. Levitt 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Spin Dynamics 2 1.3 One-dimensional Fourier NMR 6 1.4 Two-dimensional NMR 11 1.5 Summary 14 2 Data Processing Methods: Fourier and Beyond 19Vladislav Orekhov, Pawel Kasprzak, and Krzysztof Kazimierczuk 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Time-domain NMR Signal 19 2.3 NMR Spectrum 20 2.4 The Most Important Features of FT 20 2.5 Distortion: Phase 23 2.6 Kramers-Kronig Relations and Hilbert Transform 23 2.7 Distortion: Truncation 25 2.8 Distortion: Noise and Multiple Scans 27 2.9 Distortion: Sampling and DFT 27 2.10 Quadrature Detection 30 2.11 Processing:Weighting 31 2.12 Processing: Zero Filling 33 2.13 Fourier Transform in Multiple Dimensions 33 2.14 Quadrature Detection in Multiple Dimensions 36 2.15 Projection Theorem 37 2.16 ND Sampling Aspects and Sparse Sampling 40 2.17 Reconstructing Sparsely Sampled Data Sets 41 2.18 Deconvolution 42 3 Product Operator Formalism 47Rolf Boelens and Robert Kaptein 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Product Operators and Time Evolution 48 3.3 Time Evolution of the Product Operators 55 3.4 Applications 59 3.4.1 Spin-echo Experiments 59 3.5 Two-dimensional Experiments 66 4 Relaxation in NMR Spectroscopy 93Matthias Ernst 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Theory 95 4.3 Relaxation in Spin-1/2 Systems: Dipolar and CSA Relaxation 104 4.4 Other Relaxation Mechanisms 125 4.5 Concluding Remarks 130 5 Coherence Transfer Pathways 135David E. Korenchan and Alexej Jerschow 5.1 Coherence Transfer Pathways: What and Why? 135 5.2 Principles of Coherence Selection 137 5.3 Coherence Transfer Pathway Selection by Phase Cycling 140 5.4 Cogwheel Phase Cycling 146 5.5 Coherence Transfer Pathway Selection by Pulsed-field Gradients 147 5.6 Comparison Between Phase Cycling and Pulsed-field Gradients 150 5.7 CTP Selection in Heteronuclear Spin Systems 150 5.8 Additional Approaches to Coherence Selection 151 6 Nuclear Overhauser Effect Spectroscopy 153P.K. Madhu 6.1 Introduction 153 6.2 Nuclear Overhauser Effect 153 6.3 Measurement of NOE 161 6.4 Heteronuclear NOE 161 6.5 NOE Kinetics 162 6.6 Nuclear Overhauser Effect Spectroscopy, NOESY 164 6.7 Rotating-frame NOE, ROE 166 6.8 Relative Signs of Cross Peaks 168 6.9 Generalised Solomon’s Equation 169 6.10 NOESY and ROESY: Practical Considerations and Experimental Spectra 170 6.11 Conclusions 170 7 DOSY Methods for Studying Non-equilibrium Molecular and Ionic Systems 175Muslim Dvoyashkin, Monika Schoönhoff, and Ville-Veikko Telkki 7.1 Introduction 175 7.2 Spatial Spin "Encoding" Using Magnetic Field Gradient 175 7.3 Formation of NMR Signal and Spin Echo in the Presence of Field Gradient 176 7.4 NMR of Liquids in An Electric Field: Electrophoretic NMR 178 7.5 Ultrafast Diffusion Measurements 186 7.6 Ultrafast Diffusion Exchange Spectroscopy 189 8 Multiple Acquisition Strategies 195Nathaniel J. Traaseth 8.1 Introduction 195 8.2 Types of Multiple Acquisition Experiments 195 8.3 Utilization of Forgotten Spin Operators 196 8.4 Application of Multiple Acquisition Techniques 198 8.5 Modularity of Multiple Detection Schemes and Other Novel Approaches 201 8.6 Future of Multiple Acquisition Detection 202 9 Anisotropic One-dimensional/Two-dimensional NMR in Molecular Analysis 209Philippe Lesot and Roberto R. Gil 9.1 Introduction 209 9.2 Advantages of Oriented Solvents 210 9.3 Description of Useful Anisotropic NMR Parameters 213 9.4 Adapted 2D NMR Tools 221 9.5 Examples of Polymeric Liquid Crystals 226 9.6 Contribution to the Analysis of Chiral and Prochiral Molecules 232 9.7 Structural Value of Anisotropic NMR Parameters 248 9.8 Conformational Analysis in Oriented Solvents 276 9.9 Anisotropic 2H 2D NMR Applied to Molecular Isotope Analysis 277 9.10 Anisotropic NMR in Molecular Analysis: What You Should Keep in Mind 281 10 Ultrafast 2D methods 297Boris Gouilleux 10.1 Introduction 297 10.2 UF 2D NMR Principles: Entangling the Space and the Time 299 10.3 Specific Features of UF 2D NMR 305 10.4 Advanced UF Methods 307 10.5 UF 2D NMR: A Versatile Approach 311 10.6 Overview of UF 2D NMR Applications 316 10.7 Conclusion 326 11 Multi-dimensional Methods in Biological NMR 333Tobias Schneider and Michael Kovermann 11.1 Introduction 333 11.2 Experimental Approaches 334 11.3 Case Studies 338 12 TROSY: Principles and Applications 365Harindranath Kadavath and Roland Riek 12.1 Introduction 365 12.2 The Principles of TROSY 366 12.3 Practical Aspects of TROSY 371 12.4 Applications of TROSY 374 12.5 Transverse Relaxation-optimization in the Polarization Transfers 379 12.6 15N Direct Detected TROSY 380 12.7 [1H,13C]-TROSY Correlation Experiments 380 12.8 Applications to Nucleic Acids 382 12.9 Intermolecular Interactions and Drug Design 383 12.10 Conclusion 383 13 Two-Dimensional Methods and Zero- to Ultralow-Field (ZULF) NMR 395K.L. Ivanov, John Blanchard, Dmitry Budker, Fabien Ferrage, Alexey Kiryutin, Tobias Sjolander, Alexandra Yurkovskaya, and Ivan Zhukov 13.1 Introduction and Motivation 395 13.2 EarlyWork 396 13.3 Two-dimensional NMR Measured at Zero Magnetic Field 397 13.4 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance at Millitesla Fields Using a Zero-Field Spectrometer 403 13.5 Field Cycling NMR and Correlation Spectroscopy 404 13.6 ZERO-Field - High-Field Comparison 409 13.7 Conclusion and Outlook 412 14 Multidimensional Methods and Paramagnetic NMR 415Thomas Robinson, Kevin J. Sanders, Andrew J. Pell, and Guido Pintacuda 14.1 Introduction 415 14.2 NMR Methods for Paramagnetic Systems in Solution 416 14.3 NMR Methods for Paramagnetic Systems in Solids 423 15 Chemical Exchange 435Ashok Sekhar and Pramodh Vallurupalli 15.1 Introduction 435 15.2 Bloch-McConnell Equations 436 15.3 Studying Exchange Between Visible States 443 15.4 Studying Exchange Between a Visible State and Invisible State(s) 448 15.5 Summary 458 Acknowledgments 459 References 459 Appendix A Proton-Detected Heteronuclear and Multidimensional NMR 461Christian Griesinger, Harald Schwalbe, Jürgen Schleucher, and Michael Sattler Index 553

Read more less

Book SynopsisModel-Based Reinforcement Learning Explore a comprehensive and practical approach to reinforcement learning Reinforcement learning is an essential paradigm of machine learning, wherein an intelligent agent performs actions that ensure optimal behavior from devices. While this paradigm of machine learning has gained tremendous success and popularity in recent years, previous scholarship has focused either on theoryoptimal control and dynamic programming or on algorithmsmost of which are simulation-based. Model-Based Reinforcement Learning provides a model-based framework to bridge these two aspects, thereby creating a holistic treatment of the topic of model-based online learning control. In doing so, the authors seek to develop a model-based framework for data-driven control that bridges the topics of systems identification from data, model-based reinforcement learning, and optimal control, as well as the applications of each. This new technique for assesTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Acronyms xv Introduction xvii 1 Nonlinear Systems Analysis 1 1.1 Notation 1 1.2 Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 2 1.2.1 Remarks on Existence, Uniqueness, and Continuation of Solutions 2 1.3 Lyapunov Analysis of Stability 3 1.4 Stability Analysis of Discrete Time Dynamical Systems 7 1.5 Summary 10 Bibliography 10 2 Optimal Control 11 2.1 Problem Formulation 11 2.2 Dynamic Programming 12 2.2.1 Principle of Optimality 12 2.2.2 Hamilton–Jacobi–Bellman Equation 14 2.2.3 A Sufficient Condition for Optimality 15 2.2.4 Infinite-Horizon Problems 16 2.3 Linear Quadratic Regulator 18 2.3.1 Differential Riccati Equation 18 2.3.2 Algebraic Riccati Equation 23 2.3.3 Convergence of Solutions to the Differential Riccati Equation 26 2.3.4 Forward Propagation of the Differential Riccati Equation for Linear Quadratic Regulator 28 2.4 Summary 30 Bibliography 30 3 Reinforcement Learning 33 3.1 Control-Affine Systems with Quadratic Costs 33 3.2 Exact Policy Iteration 35 3.2.1 Linear Quadratic Regulator 39 3.3 Policy Iteration with Unknown Dynamics and Function Approximations 41 3.3.1 Linear Quadratic Regulator with Unknown Dynamics 46 3.4 Summary 47 Bibliography 48 4 Learning of Dynamic Models 51 4.1 Introduction 51 4.1.1 Autonomous Systems 51 4.1.2 Control Systems 51 4.2 Model Selection 52 4.2.1 Gray-Box vs. Black-Box 52 4.2.2 Parametric vs. Nonparametric 52 4.3 Parametric Model 54 4.3.1 Model in Terms of Bases 54 4.3.2 Data Collection 55 4.3.3 Learning of Control Systems 55 4.4 Parametric Learning Algorithms 56 4.4.1 Least Squares 56 4.4.2 Recursive Least Squares 57 4.4.3 Gradient Descent 59 4.4.4 Sparse Regression 60 4.5 Persistence of Excitation 60 4.6 Python Toolbox 61 4.6.1 Configurations 62 4.6.2 Model Update 62 4.6.3 Model Validation 63 4.7 Comparison Results 64 4.7.1 Convergence of Parameters 65 4.7.2 Error Analysis 67 4.7.3 Runtime Results 69 4.8 Summary 73 Bibliography 75 5 Structured Online Learning-Based Control of Continuous-Time Nonlinear Systems 77 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 A Structured Approximate Optimal Control Framework 77 5.3 Local Stability and Optimality Analysis 81 5.3.1 Linear Quadratic Regulator 81 5.3.2 SOL Control 82 5.4 SOL Algorithm 83 5.4.1 ODE Solver and Control Update 84 5.4.2 Identified Model Update 85 5.4.3 Database Update 85 5.4.4 Limitations and Implementation Considerations 86 5.4.5 Asymptotic Convergence with Approximate Dynamics 87 5.5 Simulation Results 87 5.5.1 Systems Identifiable in Terms of a Given Set of Bases 88 5.5.2 Systems to Be Approximated by a Given Set of Bases 91 5.5.3 Comparison Results 98 5.6 Summary 99 Bibliography 99 6 A Structured Online Learning Approach to Nonlinear Tracking with Unknown Dynamics 103 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 A Structured Online Learning for Tracking Control 104 6.2.1 Stability and Optimality in the Linear Case 108 6.3 Learning-based Tracking Control Using SOL 111 6.4 Simulation Results 112 6.4.1 Tracking Control of the Pendulum 113 6.4.2 Synchronization of Chaotic Lorenz System 114 6.5 Summary 115 Bibliography 118 7 Piecewise Learning and Control with Stability Guarantees 121 7.1 Introduction 121 7.2 Problem Formulation 122 7.3 The Piecewise Learning and Control Framework 122 7.3.1 System Identification 123 7.3.2 Database 124 7.3.3 Feedback Control 125 7.4 Analysis of Uncertainty Bounds 125 7.4.1 Quadratic Programs for Bounding Errors 126 7.5 Stability Verification for Piecewise-Affine Learning and Control 129 7.5.1 Piecewise Affine Models 129 7.5.2 MIQP-based Stability Verification of PWA Systems 130 7.5.3 Convergence of ACCPM 133 7.6 Numerical Results 134 7.6.1 Pendulum System 134 7.6.2 Dynamic Vehicle System with Skidding 138 7.6.3 Comparison of Runtime Results 140 7.7 Summary 142 Bibliography 143 8 An Application to Solar Photovoltaic Systems 147 8.1 Introduction 147 8.2 Problem Statement 150 8.2.1 PV Array Model 151 8.2.2 DC-D C Boost Converter 152 8.3 Optimal Control of PV Array 154 8.3.1 Maximum Power Point Tracking Control 156 8.3.2 Reference Voltage Tracking Control 162 8.3.3 Piecewise Learning Control 164 8.4 Application Considerations 165 8.4.1 Partial Derivative Approximation Procedure 165 8.4.2 Partial Shading Effect 167 8.5 Simulation Results 170 8.5.1 Model and Control Verification 173 8.5.2 Comparative Results 174 8.5.3 Model-Free Approach Results 176 8.5.4 Piecewise Learning Results 178 8.5.5 Partial Shading Results 179 8.6 Summary 182 Bibliography 182 9 An Application to Low-level Control of Quadrotors 187 9.1 Introduction 187 9.2 Quadrotor Model 189 9.3 Structured Online Learning with RLS Identifier on Quadrotor 190 9.3.1 Learning Procedure 191 9.3.2 Asymptotic Convergence with Uncertain Dynamics 195 9.3.3 Computational Properties 195 9.4 Numerical Results 197 9.5 Summary 201 Bibliography 201 10 Python Toolbox 205 10.1 Overview 205 10.2 User Inputs 205 10.2.1 Process 206 10.2.2 Objective 207 10.3 SOL 207 10.3.1 Model Update 208 10.3.2 Database 208 10.3.3 Library 210 10.3.4 Control 210 10.4 Display and Outputs 211 10.4.1 Graphs and Printouts 213 10.4.2 3D Simulation 213 10.5 Summary 214 Bibliography 214 A Appendix 215 A.1 Supplementary Analysis of Remark 5.4 215 A.2 Supplementary Analysis of Remark 5.5 222 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Technology of Discovery Incisive discussions of a critical mission-enabling technology for deep space missions In The Technology of Discovery: Radioisotope Thermoelectric Generators and Thermoelectric Technologies for Space Exploration, distinguished JPL engineer and manager David Woerner delivers an insightful discussion of how radioisotope thermoelectric generators (RTGs) are used in the exploration of space. It also explores their history, function, their market potential, and the governmental forces that drive their production and design. Finally, it presents key technologies incorporated in RTGs and their potential for future missions and design innovation. The author provides a clear and understandable treatment of the subject, ranging from straightforward overviews of the technology to complex discussions of the field of thermoelectrics. Included is also background on NASA's decision to resurrect the GPHS-RTG and discussion of the future of commercialiTable of ContentsForeward xi Note from the Series Editor xiii Preface xv Authors xix Reviewers xxi Acknowledgments xxiii Glossary xxv List of Acronyms and Abbreviations xxxiii 1 The History of the Invention of Radioisotope Thermoelectric Generators (RTGs) for Space Exploration 1 Chadwick D. Barklay References 5 2 The History of the United States’s Flight and Terrestrial RTGs 7 Andrew J. Zillmer 2.1 Flight RTGs 7 2.1.1 SNAP Flight Program 7 2.1.1.1 Snap-3 8 2.1.1.2 Snap-9 8 2.1.1.3 Snap-19 9 2.1.1.4 Snap-27 11 2.1.2 Transit-RTG 13 2.1.3 Multi-Hundred-Watt RTG 13 2.1.4 General Purpose Heat Source RTG 15 2.1.4.1 General Purpose Heat Source 15 2.1.4.2 GPHS-RTG System 16 2.1.5 Multi-Mission Radioisotope Thermoelectric Generator 17 2.1.6 US Flight RTGs 18 2.2 Unflown Flight RTGs 18 2.2.1.1 Snap-1 18 2.2.1.2 Snap-11 18 2.2.1.3 Snap-13 18 2.2.1.4 Snap-17 22 2.2.1.5 Snap-29 22 2.2.1.6 Selenide Isotope Generator 23 2.2.1.7 Modular Isotopic Thermoelectric Generator 24 2.2.1.8 Modular RTG 24 2.3 Terrestrial RTGs 25 2.3.1 SNAP Terrestrial RTGs 25 2.3.1.1 Snap-7 25 2.3.1.2 Snap-15 26 2.3.1.3 Snap-21 26 2.3.1.4 Snap-23 26 2.3.2 Sentinel 25 and 100 Systems 27 2.3.3 Sentry 28 2.3.4 URIPS-P 1 28 2.3.5 RG-1 29 2.3.6 BUP-500 30 2.3.7 Millibatt-1000 31 2.4 Conclusion 31 References 31 3 US Space Flights Enabled by RTGs 35 Young H. Lee and Brian K. Bairstow 3.1 SNAP-3B Missions (1961) 35 3.1.1 Transit 4A and Transit 4B 35 3.2 SNAP-9A Missions (1963–1964) 36 3.2.1 Transit 5BN-1, 5BN-2, and 5BN-3 36 3.3 SNAP-19 Missions (1968–1975) 38 3.3.1 Nimbus-B and Nimbus III 38 3.3.2 Pioneer 10 and 11 41 3.3.3 Viking 1 and 2 Landers 43 3.4 SNAP-27 Missions (1969–1972) 45 3.4.1 Apollo 12–17 45 3.5 Transit-RTG Mission (1972) 47 3.5.1 TRIAD 47 3.6 MHW-RTG Missions (1976–1977) 48 3.6.1 Lincoln Experimental Satellites 8 and 9 48 3.6.2 Voyager 1 and 2 50 3.7 GPHS-RTG Missions (1989–2006) 52 3.7.1 Galileo 52 3.7.2 Ulysses 53 3.7.3 Cassini 55 3.7.4 New Horizons 57 3.8 MMRTG Missions: (2011-Present (2021)) 59 3.8.1 Curiosity 59 3.8.2 Perseverance 61 3.8.3 Dragonfly–Scheduled Future Mission 62 3.9 Discussion of Flight Frequency 64 3.10 Summary of US Missions Enabled by RTGs 73 References 74 4 Nuclear Systems Used for Space Exploration by Other Countries 77 Christofer E. Whiting 4.1 Soviet Union 77 4.2 China 81 References 82 5 Nuclear Physics, Radioisotope Fuels, and Protective Components 85 Michael B.R. Smith, Emory D. Collins, David W. DePaoli, Nidia C. Gallego, Lawrence H. Heilbronn, Chris L. Jensen, Kaara K. Patton, Glenn R. Romanoski, George B. Ulrich, Robert M. Wham, and Christofer E. Whiting 5.1 Introduction 85 5.2 Introduction to Nuclear Physics 86 5.2.1 The Atom 86 5.2.2 Radioactivity and Decay 88 5.2.3 Emission of Radiation 90 5.2.3.1 Alpha Decay 91 5.2.3.2 Beta Decay 92 5.2.3.3 Photon Emission 92 5.2.3.4 Neutron Emission 93 5.2.3.5 Decay Chains 94 5.2.4 Interactions of Radiation with Matter 94 5.2.4.1 Charged Particle Interactions with Matter 96 5.2.4.2 Neutral Particle Interactions with Matter 97 5.2.4.3 Biological Interactions of Radiation with Matter 100 5.3 Historic Radioisotope Fuels 102 5.3.1 Polonium-210 104 5.3.2 Cerium-144 104 5.3.3 Strontium-90 105 5.3.4 Curium-242 106 5.3.5 Curium-244 106 5.3.6 Cesium-137 107 5.3.7 Promethium-147 107 5.3.8 Thallium-204 108 5.4 Producing Modern PuO2 108 5.4.1 Cermet Target Design, Fabrication, and Irradiation 110 5.4.2 Improved Target Design 111 5.4.3 Post-Irradiation Chemical Processing 112 5.4.4 Waste Management 113 5.4.5 Conversion to Production Mode of Operation 114 5.5 Fuel, Cladding, and Encapsulations for Modern Spaceflight RTGs 115 5.5.1 Evolution of Radioisotope Heat Source Protection 115 5.5.2 General Purpose Heat Source 119 5.5.3 Fine Weave Pierced Fabric (FWPF) 120 5.5.4 Carbon-Bonded Carbon Fiber (CBCF) 121 5.5.5 Heat Transfer Considerations 122 5.5.6 Cladding 122 5.6 Summary 125 References 125 6 A Primer on the Underlying Physics in Thermoelectrics 133 Hsin Wang 6.1 Underlying Physics in Thermoelectric Materials 133 6.1.1 Reciprocal Lattice and Brillouin Zone 135 6.1.2 Electronic Band Structure 135 6.1.3 Lattice Vibration and Phonons 138 6.2 Thermoelectric Theories and Limitations 141 6.2.1 Best Thermoelectric Materials 141 6.2.2 Imbalanced Thermoelectric Legs 143 6.3 Thermal Conductivity and Phonon Scattering 144 6.3.1 Highlights of SiGe 145 References 145 7 End-to-End Assembly and Pre-flight Operations for RTGs 151 Shad E. Davis 7.1 GPHS Assembly 151 7.2 RTG Fueling and Testing 159 7.3 RTG Delivery, Spacecraft Checkout, and RTG Integration for Flight 172 References 181 8 Lifetime Performance of Spaceborne RTGs 183 Christofer E. Whiting and David Friedrich Woerner 8.1 Introduction 183 8.2 History of RTG Performance at a Glance 185 8.3 RTG Performance by Generator Type 189 8.3.1 Snap-3B 189 8.3.2 Snap-9A 189 8.3.3 Snap-19B 191 8.3.4 Snap-27 194 8.3.5 Transit-RTG 196 8.3.6 Snap-19 197 8.3.7 Multi-Hundred Watt RTG 201 8.3.8 General Purpose Heat Source RTG 204 8.3.9 Multi-Mission RTG 207 References 210 9 Modern Analysis Tools and Techniques for RTGs 213 Christofer E. Whiting, Michael B.R. Smith, and Thierry Caillat 9.1 Analytical Tools for Evaluating Performance Degradation and Extrapolating Future Power 213 9.1.1 Integrated Rate Law Equation 214 9.1.2 Multiple Degradation Mechanisms 215 9.1.3 Solving for k′ and x 217 9.1.4 Integrated Rate Equation 220 9.1.5 Analysis of Residuals 220 9.1.6 Rate Law Equations: RTGs versus Chemistry versus Math 221 9.1.6.1 Application to RTG Performance 222 9.2 Effects of Thermal Inventory on Lifetime Performance 222 9.2.1 Analysis of GPHS-RTG 223 9.2.2 Analysis of MMRTG 226 9.3 (Design) Life Performance Prediction 228 9.3.1 RTG’s Degradation Mechanisms 229 9.3.2 Physics-based RTG Life Performance Prediction 233 9.4 Radioisotope Power System Dose Estimation Tool (RPS-DET) 235 9.4.1 Motivation 235 9.4.2 RPS-DET Software Components 236 9.4.3 RPS-DET Geometries 237 9.4.4 RPS-DET Source Terms and Radiation Transport 238 9.4.5 Simulation Results 239 9.4.6 Validation and Verification 240 9.4.7 Conclusion 240 References 241 10 Advanced US RTG Technologies in Development 245 Chadwick D. Barklay 10.1 Introduction 245 10.1.1 Background 246 10.2 Skutterudite-based Thermoelectric Converter Technology for a Potential MMRTG Retrofit 247 Thierry Caillat, Stan Pinkowski, Ike C. Chi, Kevin L. Smith, Jong-Ah Paik, Brian Phan, Ying Song, Joe VanderVeer, Russell Bennett, Steve Keyser, Patrick E. Frye, Karl A. Wefers, Andrew M. Lane, and Tim Holgate 10.2.1 Introduction 247 10.2.2 Thermoelectric Couple and 48-Couple Module Design and Fabrication 248 10.2.3 Performance Testing of Couples and 48-Couple Module 252 10.2.4 Generator Life Performance Prediction 255 10.3 Next Generation RTG Technology Evolution 257 Chadwick D. Barklay 10.3.1 Introduction 257 10.3.2 Challenges to Reestablishing a Production Capability 260 10.3.2.1 Design Trades 260 10.3.2.2 Silicon Germanium Unicouple Production 261 10.3.2.3 Converter Assembly 262 10.3.3 Opportunities for Enhancements 264 10.4 Considerations for Emerging Commercial RTG Concepts 265 Chadwick D. Barklay 10.4.1 Introduction 265 10.4.2 Challenges for Commercial Space RTGs 266 10.4.2.1 Radioisotopes 267 10.4.2.2 Specific Power 267 10.4.2.3 Launch Approval 268 10.4.3 Launch Safety Analyses and Testing 270 10.4.3.1 Modeling Approaches 270 10.4.3.2 Safety Testing 271 10.4.3.3 Leveraging Legacy Design Concepts 271 References 273 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisHandbook of Natural Colorants Second Edition A detailed survey of a variety of natural colorants and their different applications including textiles, polymers, and cosmetics Colorants describe a wide range of materials such as dyes, pigments, inks, paint, or chemicals, which are used in small quantities but play an important role in many products such as textiles, polymers, food, and cosmetics. As the effects of climate change begin to be felt, there has been a shift in focus in the field to renewable resources and sustainability, and an interest in the replacement of oil-based products with greener substitutions. As the push to adopt natural resources grows, there have been significant developments in the research and application of natural colorants as a step in the transition to a bio-based economy. The second edition of Handbook of Natural Colorants provides a detailed introduction to natural colorants in a marriage of theory and practice, from Table of ContentsList of Contributors xxi Series Preface xxv Preface xxvii I Historical Development 1 1 History of Natural Dyes in the Ancient Mediterranean Civilization 3 Maria J. Melo 1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.1 Ancient Mediterranean World 3 1.1.2 Dyes from Antiquity 4 1.1.3 Unveiling the Secrets of Ancient Dyes with Modern Science 7 1.2 Ancient Reds 7 1.2.1 Anthraquinone Reds 7 1.2.2 Redwoods 10 1.2.3 Flavylium/Anthocyanin Reds 12 1.2.3.1 Equilibria in solution 13 1.3 Ancient Blues 14 1.3.1 Indigo Blues 14 1.3.2 Anthocyanin Blues 15 1.4 Ancient Purples 16 1.4.1 Tyrian Purple: Real Purple from Sea Snails 16 1.4.2 Orchil Purples 18 1.4.3 Folium 18 1.5 Ancient Yellows 20 1.5.1 Flavonoid Yellows 20 1.5.2 Carotenoid Yellows 21 1.5.3 Chalcone and Aurone Yellows 22 Acknowledgements 22 References 22 2 Colors in Civilizations of the World and Natural Colorants: History under Tension 27 Dominique Cardon 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 The Triumph of Mauveine: Synthetic Fulfillment of the Antique Purplemania 28 2.3 Blue: From Kingly Regional to Globally Democratic 29 2.4 Red and Yellow: From Micro to Macro Scales 29 2.5 What Is the Future for Natural Colorants in the Dawning Era of Renewable Resources? 30 Acknowledgement 31 References 31 3 History of Natural Dyes in North Africa_Egypt 33 Harby Ezzeldeen Ahmed 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Natural Dyes in Pharaonic Textiles 34 3.3 Dyeing Techniques 34 3.4 Dye Sources 34 3.4.1 Woad 35 3.4.2 Indigo 35 3.4.3 Red 35 3.4.4 Yellow 36 3.4.5 Black 36 3.4.6 Brown 36 3.4.7 Green 36 3.4.8 Purple 36 3.5 Dyeing in Coptic Textiles 36 3.6 Wool- Dyed Fabric with Natural Dye 38 3.7 Dyes in Islamic Textiles 38 3.8 Mordants 40 References 40 II Natural Colorants in Different Regions of the World 43 4 Sources for Natural Colorants in Europe 45 Thomas Bechtold, Tung Pham and Avinash P. Manian 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 Cultivation 46 4.2.1 Potential European Dye Plants Yesterday and Now 46 4.2.2 Modern Cultivation Methods— General Facts 47 4.2.3 Blue- Dye Plants 48 4.2.4 Red- Dye Plants 49 4.2.5 Yellow- Dye Plants 49 4.2.6 Brown- Dye Plants 52 4.2.7 Production of Dye Extracts 54 4.3 Natural Colorants from Agro- Food Residues 55 4.4 Natural Colorants from Forestry and Timber Industry 56 4.5 Relevant Examples for the Application 57 4.6 Conclusions, Discussion, and Summary 58 Acknowledgement 58 References 59 5 Dyes in South America 63 Veridiana Vera de Rosso and Adriana Zerlotti Mercadante 5.1 Introduction 63 5.2 Annatto 65 5.3 Turmeric 67 5.4 Marigold 68 5.5 Cochineal and Carmine 69 Acknowledgements 71 References 71 6 Natural Dyes in Eastern Asia (Vietnam and Neighboring Countries) 75 Tung Pham and Thomas Bechtold 6.1 Introduction 75 6.2 Annatto (Bixa orellana L., Family Bixaceae) 75 6.3 Tea (Camellia sinensis (L.) Kuntze, Family Theaceae) 77 6.4 Umbrella Tree (Terminalia catappa L., Family Combretaceae) 77 6.5 Mackloeur (Diospyros mollis L. Griff, Family Ebenaceae) 78 6.6 Indigo (Indigofera L., Family Fabaceae) 79 6.6.1 Indigofera tinctoria L. 79 6.6.2 Indigofera galegoides dc 80 6.6.3 Strobilanthes cusia (Baphicacanthus) 80 6.7 Henna (Kok Khan or Khao Youak in Laos) (Lawsonia spinosa L., Family Lythraceae) 80 6.8 Nacre (African Mahogany, Khaya senegalensis, Family Meliaceae) 81 6.9 Sappan Wood (Caesalpinia sappan L., Family Fabaceae) 81 6.10 Japanese Pagoda Tree Flowers (Sophora japonica L., Family Leguminosae) 82 6.11 Turmeric (Curcuma longa L., Family Zingiberaceae) 82 6.12 Sapodilla (Manilkara zapota L. or Achras zapota, Family Sapotaceae) 82 6.13 Betel (Piper betel L., Family Piperaceae) 83 6.14 Eucalyptus (Eucalyptus, Family Myrtaceae) 83 6.15 Caesalpinia Yellow (Caesalpinia pulcherrima L., Family Fabaceae) 83 6.16 Brow- Tuber; Yam (Dioscorea cirrhosa Lour, Family Dioscoreaceae) 83 6.17 Others 84 Acknowledgement 84 References 84 7 Sources for Natural Colorants in China 89 Ren-Cheng Tang 7.1 Introduction 89 7.2 Sophora japonica Yellow 92 7.3 Turmeric 93 7.4 Gardenia Yellow 93 7.5 Emodin 93 7.6 Baicalin 94 7.7 Berberine 94 7.8 Henna 94 7.9 Monascus Red 95 7.10 Madder 95 7.11 Sorghum Red 95 7.12 Mulberry Red 96 7.13 Shikonin 96 7.14 Indigo 96 7.15 Condensed Tannins 97 7.16 Tea Polyphenols 98 7.17 Gallnut 99 References 99 8 Sources, Application, and Analysis of Natural Colorants: An Indian Perspective 103 Prof. (Dr.) Ashis Kumar Samanta and Prof. (Dr.) Deepali Singhee 8.1 Introduction 103 8.2 Natural Dyes in India 104 8.2.1 History 104 8.2.2 Traditional Processes of Dyeing with Natural Dyes in Different Parts of India 105 8.2.3 Sources of Natural Dyes in India 106 8.2.4 Use of Some Natural Dyes in Traditional Textiles of India 107 8.3 Details of Some Dye Sources and Their Application in India 109 8.3.1 Turmeric 109 8.3.2 Pomegranate 111 8.3.3 Flame of Forest 114 8.3.4 Marigold 116 8.3.5 Safflower 118 8.3.6 Annatto 120 8.3.7 Madder 123 8.3.8 Indian Mulberry 125 8.3.9 Arjuna 127 8.3.10 Sappanwood 130 8.3.11 Eucalyptus 132 8.3.12 Catechu 134 8.3.13 Gallnut 137 8.3.14 Myrobolan 140 8.3.15 Lac 142 8.3.16 Indigo 145 References 147 9 Natural Dye Gardens in North America 161 Wendy Weiss and Thomas Bechtold 9.1 Introduction 161 9.2 Participants 162 9.3 Education 163 9.4 Motivation to Work with Natural Dye 166 9.5 Plant List— Cultivated Plants 166 9.6 Chemical Background of Most Relevant Plants 168 9.7 Plant List— Foraged Plants 172 9.8 Plants with Indigotin 172 9.9 Importance of the Fibershed Movement 173 9.10 Educational and Community Gardens 174 9.11 Mexico 177 9.12 Canada 177 9.13 Future Research 178 References 178 Notes 179 III Colorant Production and Properties 181 10 Chlorophylls 183 María Roca 10.1 Introduction 183 10.2 Chemical Structures and Physicochemical Properties 184 10.3 Chlorophylls as Colorants 187 10.4 New Trends in the Use of Chlorophylls as Colorants 189 10.5 Stability and Analysis 190 10.6 Toxicological and Safety Aspects 191 References 192 11 Indigo— Production and Properties 195 Philip John and Luciana Gabriella Angelini 11.1 Introduction 195 11.2 Agronomy 196 11.2.1 Isatis 196 11.2.1.1 Developmental Stages and Climate and Soil Crop Requirements 197 11.2.1.2 Rotation 201 11.2.1.3 Soil Tillage and Seed Sowing 202 11.2.1.4 Weeds, Pests, and Diseases 203 11.2.1.5 Fertilizers and Irrigation 204 11.2.1.6 Harvesting and Yields 205 11.2.1.7 Seed Production 207 11.2.1.8 Isatis indigotica Compared with Isatis tinctoria 208 11.2.2 Persicaria 209 11.2.2.1 Introduction 209 11.2.2.2 Developmental Stages 211 11.2.2.3 Sowing, Harvesting, and Yield 211 11.2.2.4 Weeds, Pests, and Diseases 216 11.2.2.5 Fertilizer and Irrigation Requirement 216 11.2.2.6 Seed Production 217 11.2.3 Indigofera 217 11.3 Methods of Determining Indigo 219 11.4 Precursors in the Plants 222 11.5 Direct Dyeing with Indican 227 11.6 Indigo Formation 227 11.7 Extraction Procedures 229 11.7.1 Traditional Process Using Crushed Leaf Material 229 11.7.1.1 Isatis 229 11.7.1.2 Persicaria 230 11.7.2 Steeping in Water 231 11.7.2.1 Indigofera 232 11.7.2.2 Isatis 234 11.7.2.3 Persicaria 239 11.8 Purity of Natural Indigo 240 11.8.1 Purification by Sublimation 241 11.8.2 Impurities in Natural Indigo 242 Acknowledgements 245 References 245 12 Anthocyanins: Revisiting Nature’s Glamorous Palette 251 Maria J. Melo, Fernando Pina, Natércia Teixeira and Claude Andary 12.1 Chemical Basis 251 12.1.1 Chemical Structures 251 12.1.2 Equilibria in Solution 253 12.1.3 Kinetics 254 12.1.4 Color and Color Stability 254 12.1.5 Anthocyanins as Antioxidants 258 12.2 Natural Sources and Applications for Anthocyanins 259 12.2.1 Plants Sources, Content, Influencing Parameters 259 12.2.2 Food Colorants 260 12.2.3 Other Uses 261 12.2.4 Examples of Commercial Products and Processing 262 References 263 Appendix 1 267 A1.1 Multi-Equilibria in Acidic and Basic Media 267 A1.2 Measuring the Equilibria Constants 269 13 Natural Colorants— Quinoid, Naphthoquinoid, and Anthraquinoid Dyes 271 Goverdina C. H. Derksen and Thomas Bechtold 13.1 Introduction 271 13.2 Benzoquinone Dyes 271 13.3 Diaryloylmethane Dyes 273 13.4 Naphthoquinone Dyes 273 13.4.1 Lawson (2- hydroxy- 1,4- naphthoquinone, CI Natural Orange 6) 274 13.4.1.1 Properties and Use 274 13.4.1.2 Agricultural Aspects 276 13.4.2 Juglone (5- hydroxy- 1,4- naphthoquinone, CI Natural Brown 7) 278 13.5 Anthraquinone Dyes 279 13.5.1 Main Components Emodin and Chrysophanol— Rheum and Rumex Species 279 13.5.2 Main Components Alizarin and/or Pseudopurpurin/Purpurin 281 13.5.2.1 Plant Sources 281 13.5.2.2 Madder CI Natural Red 8 282 References 294 14 Natural Colorants from Lichens and Mushrooms 317 Riikka Räisänen 14.1 Use of Lichen and Mushroom Colorants in History 317 14.2 Cultivation of Lichens and Mushrooms 318 14.3 Colorant Structures in Lichens and Mushrooms 319 14.3.1 Lichen Dyes: Orchils and Litmus 321 14.3.2 Yellowish, Brownish, and Reddish Colorants from Lichen 322 14.3.3 Blue Terphenylquinones from Mushrooms 322 14.3.4 Anthraquinones 324 14.3.4.1 Bloodred Webcap (Cortinarius sanguineus) 324 14.3.5 Other Colorants of Fungi 326 14.3.5.1 Yellows from Grevillines 326 14.3.5.2 Yellow and Orange Colors from Pulvinic Acid Derivatives 326 14.3.5.3 Brown from Badiones 326 14.4 Stability of Lichen and Mushroom Colorants 326 14.5 New Approaches to Lichen and Fungal Colorants 327 References 328 15 Focus on Tannins 333 Riitta Julkunen-Tiitto and Hely Häggman 15.1 Introduction 333 15.2 Chemical Structure, Biosynthesis, and Degradation 335 15.3 Properties of Tannins 338 15.4 Chemical Activities of Tannins 340 15.5 Analysis of Tannins 340 15.5.1 Sample Preservation 340 15.5.2 Extraction and Purification 340 15.5.3 Quantification of Tannins 341 15.6 Use, Toxicology, and Safety Aspects of Tannins 342 References 345 16 Carotenoid Dyes— Properties and Production 351 U. Gamage Chandrika 16.1 Introduction 351 16.1.1 Occurrence of Carotenoids 351 16.1.2 Chemistry of Carotenoids 351 16.1.3 Chemical Characteristics of Natural Carotenoids 352 16.2 Properties and Functions of Carotenoids 354 16.2.1 Carotenoids’ Role as Pro- vitamin A 354 16.2.2 Use of Carotenoids as Markers of Dietary Practices 356 16.2.3 Carotenoids as Antioxidants 356 16.2.4 Carotenoids in the Macular Region of the Retina 357 16.2.5 Carotenoids as Anticancer Agents 357 16.2.6 Carotenoids as Natural Colorants 357 16.3 General Procedure for Carotenoid Analysis 357 16.3.1 Sampling 359 16.3.2 Extraction 359 16.3.3 Saponification of Carotenoids 359 16.3.4 Chromatographic Separation 359 16.3.5 Chemical Tests 361 16.3.6 Detection and Identification of Carotenoids 361 16.3.7 Quantification of Carotenoids 362 16.4 Problems in Carotenoid Analysis 362 16.5 Factors Influencing Carotenoid Composition in Plant Sources 363 16.5.1 Stage of Maturity 363 16.5.2 Cultivar or Varietal Differences 363 16.5.3 Climatic or Geographic Effects 364 16.5.4 Post- Harvest Storage and Packing 364 16.5.5 Changes in Processing/Cooking 364 16.5.6 Effect of Agrochemicals 366 References 366 17 Flavonoids as Natural Pigments 371 M. Monica Giusti, Gonzalo Miyagusuku-Cruzado and Taylor C. Wallace 17.1 Introduction 371 17.2 Role of Localized Flavonoids in the Plant 372 17.3 General Flavonoid Chemical Structure 372 17.4 Biosynthesis of Flavonoids 373 17.5 Anthocyanins as Natural Colorants 373 17.5.1 Structure 375 17.5.2 Structural Transformation and pH 376 17.5.3 Temperature 377 17.5.4 Oxygen and Ascorbic Acid 377 17.5.5 Light 378 17.5.6 Enzymes and Sugars 379 17.5.7 Sulfur Dioxide 379 17.5.8 Co- Pigmentation and Metal Complexation 380 17.6 Other Flavonoids as Natural Colorants 381 17.6.1 Yellow Flavonoid Pigments 381 17.6.2 Tannins 381 17.6.3 Anthocyanin- Derived Pigments: Pyranoanthocyanins 382 17.7 Therapeutic Effects of Flavonoids in the Diet 382 17.8 The Use of Flavonoids as Food Colors in the US and EU 383 References 384 18 Natural Colorants from Fungi 391 Cassamo U. Mussagy, Fernanda de Oliveira and Valeria C. Santos-Ebinuma 18.1 Introduction 391 18.2 Types of Fungi Colorants 392 18.3 Fungal Producer of Colorants 394 18.4 Bioprocess 395 18.4.1 Biosynthesis Pathway 395 18.4.2 Production and Extraction Process 400 18.5 Toxicity 404 18.6 Industrial Application of Fungi Colorants 406 18.7 Conclusion 407 References 407 19 Natural Colorants from Cyanobacteria and Algae 417 Laurent Dufossé 19.1 Introduction 417 19.2 Phycobiliproteins from Cyanobacteria 418 19.2.1 Structural Characteristics of Phycobiliproteins 420 19.2.2 Food Grade Phycobiliproteins 422 19.2.3 Future Trends 422 19.3 Pigments from Microalgae 422 19.3.1 β- Carotene from the Microalga Dunaliella, Salty but Effective! 423 19.3.1.1 β- Carotene from Microalgae 423 19.3.1.2 Dunaliella Species for Carotenoids 424 19.3.2 Why Carotenoids from Dunaliella? 424 19.3.2.1 Natural vs. Synthetic β- Carotene 424 19.3.2.2 Applications of β- Carotene 424 19.3.2.3 Advantages of Carotenoids Production from Dunaliella 425 19.3.2.4 Process for Production of β- Carotene from Dunaliella 425 19.3.2.5 Companies Producing Dunaliella 425 19.3.2.6 Marketed Products of β- Carotene 426 19.3.3 Haematococcus for Astaxanthin, the Red Gold Rush 426 19.3.3.1 Advantages of Astaxanthin over Other Carotenoids 427 19.3.3.2 Astaxanthin as Nutraceutical 427 19.3.3.3 Astaxanthin as Antioxidant 427 19.3.3.4 Astaxanthin for Health 428 19.3.3.5 Astaxanthin for Salmon and Trout Feeds 428 19.3.3.6 Astaxanthin for Humans 429 19.3.3.7 Production System for Haematococcus 429 19.3.3.8 Companies Producing Astaxanthin from Haematococcus 430 19.3.3.9 Astaxanthin- Containing Formulations 431 19.4 Natural Colorants from Macroalgae (e.g., Seaweeds) 431 19.4.1 Biodiversity of Seaweeds 431 19.4.2 Seasonal Variations and Environmental Threats 432 19.4.3 Major Classes of Seaweed Pigments 433 19.4.3.1 Chlorophylls 433 19.4.3.2 Carotenoids 433 19.4.3.3 Phycobiliproteins 434 19.5 Conclusion 434 References 434 20 Biotechnological Production of Microbial Pigments: Recent Findings 439 Vivian Katherine Colorado Gómez, Juan Pablo Ruiz-Sánchez, Alejandro Méndez-Zavala, Lourdes Morales-Oyervides and Julio Montañez 20.1 Introduction 439 20.2 Microbial Pigments Market 440 20.3 Production Strategies 440 20.4 Novel Extraction Technologies for Pigments Recovery 441 20.5 Regulation and Biosynthesis of Microbial Pigments 443 20.6 Strain Engineering Strategies for Pigment Production 446 20.7 Trends in New Microbial Sources of Pigments 448 20.8 Microbial Pigments Applications 449 20.8.1 Solar Cells 449 20.8.2 Therapeutic Application 450 20.8.3 Other Applications 450 20.9 Regulations on Microbial Pigments Use 451 20.10 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 452 References 452 21 Analytical Methods for Characterization and Standardization of Natural Dyes and Pigments 459 Tung Pham, Avinash Manian and Thomas Bechtold 21.1 Introduction 459 21.2 Chemical Analysis— Identification 460 21.3 Quantification by Sum Parameters 463 21.4 Applicatory Tests 464 21.5 Product Performance 465 References 466 22 Wood— From Natural Color Patterns Toward Naturally Altered Color Impressions 469 Martin Weigl-Kuska, Andreas Kandelbauer, Christian Hansmann and Ulrich Müller 22.1 The Color of Wood 469 22.1.1 Wood Chemical Composition 470 22.1.2 Wood Anatomical Appearance 471 22.1.3 Physical Properties of the Wood Surface 472 22.2 Coatings 473 22.3 Dyes 477 22.3.1 Impregnation 477 22.3.1.1 Technology 477 22.3.1.2 Color 479 22.3.1.3 Products 480 22.4 Color Modification 481 22.4.1 Drying 482 22.4.1.1 Basics 482 22.4.1.2 Technology 483 22.4.1.3 Color 484 22.4.2 Steaming 485 22.4.2.1 Basics 485 22.4.2.2 Technology 485 22.4.2.3 Color 486 22.4.3 Thermal Treatment 487 22.4.3.1 Technology 487 22.4.3.2 Color 487 22.4.4 Ammoniation 488 22.4.4.1 Basics 488 22.4.4.2 Color 489 22.4.5 Bleaching 491 22.4.5.1 Basics 491 22.4.5.2 Color 491 22.4.6 Enzymatic Treatment 492 22.4.6.1 Basics 492 22.4.6.2 Laccases 493 22.4.7 Radiation 495 22.4.7.1 Basics 495 22.4.7.2 Color 495 22.4.7.3 Technology 497 22.5 Outlook 498 References 498 23 The Role of Mordants in Fixation of Natural Dyes 507 Avinash P. Manian 23.1 Introduction 507 23.2 Metal Salts 508 23.3 Biomordants 508 23.4 Substrate Pretreatments 508 23.5 No Mordant 509 References 509 24 Textile Coloration with Natural Dyes and Pigments 517 Thomas Bechtold, Tung Pham and Avinash P. Manian 24.1 Introduction 517 24.2 Reasons for Natural Coloration 518 24.3 The Dyestuff–Fiber Interaction 520 24.4 Design of a Dyeing Process 521 24.5 Transfer of a Dyeing Process into Technical Scale 523 24.6 Processes and Resources 524 24.7 Technical Requirements for a Natural Dyestuff 526 24.7.1 Gamut and Color Shade 526 24.7.2 Fastness Criteria 528 24.8 Handling of Natural Dyes in a Technical Dyehouse 530 24.9 Mordanting 531 24.10 Natural Dyes on an Industrial Scale 533 24.10.1 Dyeing Technology— Exhaust Process 533 24.10.2 Hank Dyeing of Woolen Yarn and Production of Woolen Caps 534 24.10.3 Dyeing of Cones in a Yarn Dyeing Machine 534 24.10.4 Dyeing of Cotton Fabric on a Jet Dyeing Machine 535 24.10.5 Fabric Dyeing on a Garment Dyeing Machine 536 24.10.6 Dyeing of Polyamide Tights in a Paddle Dyeing Machine 536 24.10.7 Dyeing Technology— Continuous Dyeing 536 24.11 Conclusion 537 Acknowledgement 538 References 538 25 Hair Coloration with Natural Dyes and Pigments 543 Thomas Bechtold 25.1 Introduction 543 25.2 Human Hair 544 25.3 General Requirements on Hair Dyeing Concepts 544 25.4 Chemical Principles of Dyestuff Binding 546 25.5 Relevant Natural Dyes for Hair Dyeing 546 25.5.1 Naphthoquinone Dyes— Henna and Walnut 546 25.5.1.1 Henna, CI (Color Index) Natural Orange 6 546 25.5.1.2 Juglon, CI Natural Brown 7 547 25.5.2 Indigo 548 25.5.3 Metal Complexes 548 25.5.4 Metal Reaction Dyes 550 25.5.5 Anthraquinoid Dyes 551 25.6 Specialties 551 25.7 Regulations 552 References 552 26 Natural Colorants in the Mass Coloration of Plastics 557 Thomas Bechtold and Tung Pham 26.1 Introduction 557 26.2 Representative Examples 559 Acknowledgement 561 References 561 27 Natural Colorants in Printing/Packaging 563 Thomas Bechtold and Tung Pham 27.1 Introduction 563 27.2 Packaging Films 564 27.3 Film Coloration 567 27.4 Paper Dyeing 568 27.5 Paints 568 Acknowledgement 569 References 569 28 Technical Aspects and Requirements to Produce Natural Colorants— Processes and Product Standardization 573 Thomas Bechtold and Avinash Manian 28.1 Introduction 573 28.2 Sources of Plant Material— Product I 576 28.2.1 Organic Farming 576 28.2.2 Sustainable Farming 576 28.2.3 Native Species 577 28.2.4 Farming for Food or/and Natural Colorants 577 28.2.5 Residual Materials and By- Products 577 28.3 Processing to Dyestuff— Product II 579 28.4 Quality Control and Standardization of a Dye (Product II) 583 28.4.1 Anthocyanins 584 28.4.2 Flavonoids 584 28.4.3 Dye Lakes 585 28.5 Challenges for the Industrial Use of Natural Colorants 585 28.6 Dealing with Sustainability 586 28.7 Conclusions 587 References 587 29 Environmental and Economic Position of Natural Colorants— Energy and Resources Balances, Sustainability, Ecology, and Costs 591 Susanne Geissler and Thomas Bechtold 29.1 Introduction 591 29.2 Dye Plant Production 592 29.3 Dye Extraction and Dyestuff Production 595 29.4 Transportation 596 29.5 Textile Dyeing 596 29.6 Commercial Aspects— Costs 597 29.6.1 Basic Requirements for the Industrial Use of Natural Colorants 598 29.6.1.1 Precondition 1: acceptable costs of natural colorants and dyeing processes 599 29.6.1.2 Precondition 2: feasible cost of process engineering 599 29.6.1.3 Precondition 3: compliance with requested colorfastness properties 599 29.6.1.4 Precondition 4: competitive cost of naturally dyed products 600 29.6.1.5 Precondition 5: security of natural colorant supply 600 29.6.2 Consumer Expectations 600 29.6.3 Market Research for Naturally Dyed Products 601 29.7 Production Costs of Natural Colorant Products 602 29.7.1 Cost Categories 603 29.7.2 Aspects Influencing Production Costs 603 29.8 Prices of Synthetic Dyes— How Much Are Textile Companies Prepared to Pay for Dyes? 605 29.9 Acceptable Production Costs through a Mixed Portfolio (Agricultural Primary Production and Residues from Other Production Processes) 606 29.10 Closed- Loop Economy: Toward a Zero- Emission and Zero- Waste Society 607 29.11 Considerations Concerning the Life Cycle 609 29.12 Conclusion: Aspects Influencing Market Development for Natural Colorants 609 References 610 30 Aspects of Human Toxicology and Consumer Safety 613 Judith Büttler, Thomas Bechtold and Tung Pham 30.1 Introduction 613 30.2 Basic Aspects of Xenobiotic- Induced Toxicity 614 30.3 Toxicological Aspects of Natural Colorants in Food and Medical Applications 615 30.3.1 Risk Assessment 617 30.3.2 Therapeutic Effects (= Risk) 618 30.4 Toxicological Aspects of Natural Colorants in Cosmetics 618 30.4.1 Risk Assessment 619 30.5 Toxicological Aspects of Natural Colorants in Textile Dyeing 619 30.5.1 Plant Extracts 620 30.5.2 Pretreatment Agents and Mordants 621 30.5.3 Wastewater and Antimicrobial Compounds 621 30.5.4 Dyed Products 622 30.6 Test Methods for Toxicity Screening 622 30.6.1 Extract Preparation 624 30.6.2 Cytotoxicity 624 30.6.3 Mutagenicity and Carcinogenicity 625 30.6.4 Antimicrobial Activity 625 30.6.5 Metabolism and In Vivo Animal Bioassays 626 Acknowledgement 626 References 626 Index 629

Read more less

Book SynopsisPhytoantioxidants and Nanotherapeutics Discover the medicinal importance of antioxidant herbal medicines, phytochemicals, and nanodelivery systems for a wide range of diseases Phytomedicine has beenand continues to becentral to many cultures and societies due to its low toxicity, low cost, accessibility, and efficacy in treating difficult diseases. In fact, many plant-derived bioactive natural products serve as potential sources of drug leads or therapeutic agents in the treatment of a wide range of human diseases. When combined with nanotechnology, phytomedicine has the potential to affect and impact a tissue-specific site, which can reduce drug dosage and side effects while improving activity. Phytoantioxidants and Nanotherapeutics offers a comprehensive look at the significant role that phytomedicine-derived antioxidants play on the field of medicine, particularly when combined with the nanotechnology-derived drug delivery systems. The book thoroughly covers the herbs, plant extractTable of ContentsChapter 1 - Natural antioxidants in oxidative stress induced diseases Chapter 2 - Phytomedicines as sources of natural antioxidants Chapter 3 - Herbs, spices and dietary constituents as sources of phytoantioxidants Chapter 4 - Phytoantioxidants and their role in cellular oxidative stress Chapter 5 - Bioactive flavonoids as phytoantioxidants Chapter 6 - Nanoparticulate delivery systems for phytoconstituents Chapter 7 - Nanodelivery of herbal- and phyto-antioxidants Chapter 8 - Nanodelivery of antioxidant herbal extracts, spice and dietary constituents Chapter 9 - Nanophytomedicines in disease and therapy Chapter 10 - Biochemical and therapeutic targets for nanophytomedicines Chapter 11 - Green approaches for synthesis of nanophytopharmaceuticals/nanophytodelivery systems Chapter 12 - Characterization of nanophytopharmaceuticals Chapter 13 - Toxicity of nanostructures and nanodrugs Chapter 14 - Nanotherapeutics of Phytoantioxidants for Microbial Infections Chapter 15 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for viral infections Chapter 16 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for parasitic diseases and neglected tropical diseases Chapter 17 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for inflammatory disorders Chapter 18 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for cardiovascular diseases Chapter 19 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for diabetes Chapter 20 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for CNS disorders Chapter 21 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for aging and neurological disorders Chapter 22 - Nanotherapeutics of phytoantioxidants for cancer Chapter 23 - Challenges and regulatory issues of nanophytotherapeutics

Read more less

Book SynopsisSustainable Energy Storage in the Scope of Circular Economy Comprehensive resource reviewing recent developments in the design and application of energy storage devices Sustainable Energy Storage in the Scope of Circular Economy reviews the recent developments in energy storage devices based on sustainable materials within the framework of the circular economy, addressing the sustainable design and application of energy storage devices with consideration of the key advantages and remaining challenges in this rapidly evolving research field. Topics covered include: Sustainable materials for batteries and fuel cell devices Multifunctional sustainable materials for energy storage Energy storage devices in the scope of the Internet of Things Sustainable energy storage devices and device design for sensors and actuators Waste prevention for energy storage devices based on second life and recycling Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv Part I Introduction 1 1 The Central Role of Energy in the Scope of Circular Economy and Sustainable Approaches in Energy Generation and Storage 3 Renato Gonçalves, Arkaitz Fidalgo- Marijuan, Carlos Miguel Costa, and Senentxu Lanceros- Méndez 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Circular Economy and the Central Role of Energy 5 1.3 The Central Role of Energy in the Scope of Sustainability 8 1.3.1 Energy Generation 8 1.3.2 Energy Storage 10 1.4 Conclusions and Outlook 11 Acknowledgments 12 References 13 2 Reactive Metals as Energy Storage and Carrier Media 17 Hüseyin Ersoy, Manuel Baumann, Marcel Weil, Linda Barelli, and Stefano Passerini 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Significance of a Circular Metal Economy for the Energy Transition 18 2.3 Energy Carrier Properties of Reactive Metals 20 2.4 Potential Reactive Metal Energy Carrier and Storage Applications 22 2.4.1 Metals as Thermal Energy Carriers 22 2.4.2 Combustible Metal Fuels, and Hydrogen Carriers 26 2.4.3 Reactive Metal- Based Electrochemical Energy Storage 30 2.5 Economic and Environmental Implications of Reactive Metals 33 2.6 Conclusion and Outlook 36 Aknowledgements 37 References 37 Part II Sustainable Materials for Batteries and Supercapacitors 43 3 Lithium- Ion Batteries: Electrodes, Separators, and Solid Polymer Electrolytes 45 Manuel Salado, Renato Gonçalves, Carlos Miguel Costa, and Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Lithium- Ion Batteries 51 3.2.1 Electrodes 51 3.2.2 Separator 53 3.2.3 Electrolyte 54 3.3 Sustainable Materials for Li- Ion Batteries 56 3.3.1 Electrodes 56 3.3.2 Separator 59 3.3.3 Solid Polymer Electrolytes 61 3.4 Conclusions and Outlook 61 Acknowledgments 62 References 62 4 Solid Batteries Chemistries Beyond Lithium 69 Mary York, Karl Larson, Kailot C. Harris, Eric Carmona, Paul Albertus, Rosy Sharma, Malachi Noked, Ela Strauss, Heftsi Ragones, and Diana Golodnitsky 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Brief Overview of Solid Alkali- Ion and Alkaline- Earth- Ion Electrolytes 72 4.2.1 Types of Solid Electrolytes 72 4.2.2 Insights and Developments Regarding Metal Dendrites in Solid Electrolyte Systems 75 4.2.2.1 Metal Growth Through Na Ceramic Solid Electrolytes 77 4.3 Solid- State Sodium- Ion Batteries 79 4.3.1 Solid Electrolytes for Sodium Batteries 80 4.3.2 Anode Materials for Solid- State Sodium Batteries 82 4.3.3 Cathode Materials for Solid- State Sodium Batteries 84 4.3.4 Solid- State Sodium Battery, Full- Cell Results 86 4.4 Solid- State Potassium- Ion Batteries 88 4.4.1 Solid Electrolytes for Potassium Batteries 89 4.4.2 Anode Materials for Solid- State Potassium Batteries 90 4.4.3 Cathode Materials and Electrochemical Performance of Solid- State Potassium Batteries 91 4.5 Solid- State Magnesium- Ion Batteries 94 4.5.1 Solid Electrolytes for Magnesium- Ion Batteries 94 4.5.2 Anode Materials for Solid- State Magnesium Batteries 100 4.5.3 Cathode Materials and Electrochemical Performance of Magnesium Batteries 101 4.6 Specific Challenges and Future Perspectives 104 References 106 5 A Rationale for the Development of Sustainable Biodegradable Batteries 123 Marina Navarro- Segarra and Juan P. Esquivel 5.1 Challenges for Powering a Digital Society 123 5.2 State of the Art of Portable Batteries with a Disruptive End of Life 126 5.3 How to Design a Truly Sustainable Battery? 130 5.3.1 Portable Battery Development in a Doughnut Model 132 5.3.1.1 Materials 134 5.3.1.2 Fabrication and Distribution 134 5.3.1.3 Application 135 5.3.1.4 End of Life 136 5.4 Global Trends and Opportunities 137 Acknowledgments 138 Notes 138 References 139 6 Recent Advances of Sustainable Electrode Materials for Supercapacitor Devices 145 Shilpi Sengupta and Manab Kundu 6.1 Introduction 145 6.2 Charge Storage Mechanism 148 6.2.1 Electric Double- Layer Capacitor 149 6.2.1.1 Activated Carbon 150 6.2.1.2 Carbon Nanotubes 150 6.2.1.3 Graphene 151 6.2.1.4 Metal–Organic Frameworks (MOFs) 151 6.2.2 Pseudocapacitor 153 6.2.2.1 Transition Metal Hydroxides 153 6.2.2.2 Transition Metal Oxides 154 6.2.2.3 Transition Metal Sulfides 154 6.2.2.4 Transition Metal Diselenides 155 6.3 Conclusion 156 References 156 Part III Sustainable Approaches for Fuel Cells 159 7 Sustainable Materials for Fuel Cell Devices 161 Weidong He, Shijie Zhong, Yunfa Dong, and Qun li 7.1 Introduction 161 7.2 Catalysts 161 7.2.1 Introduction 161 7.2.2 PGM- Based Catalysts 163 7.2.2.1 Carbon- Based Supported PGM Catalysts 163 7.2.2.2 Oxide- Based Supported PGM- Based Catalysts 166 7.2.2.3 Pt Alloy Catalysts 166 7.2.2.4 Pt Core–Shell Structure Catalysts 166 7.2.3 PGM- Free Catalysts 166 7.2.3.1 Metal- Free Catalysts 167 7.2.3.2 Metal–Nitrogen–Carbon Catalysts 168 7.3 Proton Exchange Membrane (PEM) 169 7.3.1 PFSA and Their Composite Membranes 170 7.3.2 SHPs and Their Composite Membranes 174 7.3.3 PBI/H 3 PO 4 Membrane 175 7.4 The Other Components 176 7.4.1 Gas Diffusion Layer (GDL) 176 7.4.2 Bipolar Plate (BP) 177 7.4.3 Current Collector 177 7.4.4 Sealing Material (SM) 178 References 179 8 Recent Advances in Microbial Fuel Cells for Sustainable Energy 183 Muhammad R. Sulaiman and Ram K. Gupta 8.1 Introduction 183 8.1.1 Introduction to Microbial Fuel Cells 184 8.1.2 Electron Transfer Mechanism 184 8.1.3 MFC Substrate 187 8.1.4 Electrode Materials 187 8.2 Materials for Anode 187 8.2.1 Conventional Carbonaceous Materials 188 8.2.2 Metal and Metal Oxide- Based Anode for MFC 191 8.2.3 Natural Waste- Based Anode Material for MFC 191 8.2.4 Modification Approaches for MFC Anode 194 8.3 Materials for Cathode 196 8.3.1 Pt- Based Cathode 196 8.3.2 Nonprecious Metal Cathode 196 8.3.3 Biocathodes 197 8.3.4 Metal- Free Cathode 197 8.4 Conclusion 197 References 198 Part IV Sustainable Energy Storage Devices and Device Design 203 9 Multifunctional Sustainable Materials for Energy Storage 205 Michael Thielke and Ana J. Sobrido 9.1 Redox Flow Batteries as Alternative Energy Storage Technology for Grid- Scale and Off- Grid Applications 205 9.1.1 Traditional Carbon Electrodes in Redox Flow Batteries 208 9.1.2 Processing of Biomass Into Electroactive Materials 213 9.1.3 Examples of Biomass- Derived Electrodes for Redox Flow Batteries 213 References 221 10 Sustainable Energy Storage Devices and Device Design for Sensors and Actuators Applications 225 Reeya Agarwal, Sangeeta Singh, and Ahmed E. Shalan 10.1 Introduction of Sustainable Energy Storage Devices 225 10.2 Literature Survey 229 10.3 Need for the Sustainable Energy Storage Devices 236 10.3.1 Reduce First 236 10.3.2 Electricity Generation and Health 237 10.3.2.1 The Economic Benefits of Using Renewable Energy Sources are Numerous 237 10.3.2.2 Protection of the Energy Supply 237 10.3.2.3 Increasing the Economy 238 10.3.2.4 Stability of the Currency 238 10.3.2.5 Electricity and the Environment 238 10.3.3 Energy Storing Approaches 239 10.3.4 Storage Systems for Large Amounts of Energy 239 10.3.4.1 Electrochemical Storage 239 10.3.4.2 Thermochemical Storage 241 10.3.4.3 Thermochemical Energy Storage (TCES): Physical Fundamentals 242 10.3.4.4 Thermal Energy Storage 243 10.3.4.5 Chemical and Hydrogen Energy Storage 243 10.4 Sustainable and Ecofriendly Energy Storage 246 10.4.1 Longer Charges 248 10.4.2 Safer Batteries 249 10.4.3 Storing Sunlight as Heat 249 10.4.4 Advanced Renewable Fuels 250 10.5 Different Energy Storage Mechanisms 250 10.5.1 Hydroelectricity 250 10.5.2 Hydroelectric Power Was Generated and Then Transferred 252 10.5.3 A Compressor That Produces Compressed Air 252 10.5.4 Flywheel 253 10.5.5 Gravitational Pull of a Massive Object 253 10.5.6 Thermal 253 10.5.7 Thermal Heat Sensitiveness 254 10.5.8 Latent Heat Thermal (LHTES) 254 10.5.9 Charging System for the Carnot Battery 254 10.5.10 Lithium- Ion Battery 254 10.5.11 Supercapacitor 254 10.5.12 Chemical 255 10.5.13 Hydrogen 255 10.5.14 Electrochemical 255 10.5.15 Methane 256 10.5.16 Biofuels 257 10.5.17 Aluminum 257 10.5.18 Ways Utilizing Electricity 257 10.5.19 Magnetic Materials with Superconductivity 257 10.6 Different Novel 2D Materials for Energy Storage 258 10.6.1 2D Materials for Energy Storage Devices 260 10.6.2 Challenges Facing 2D Energy Technology 261 10.7 Nature- Inspired Materials for Sensing and Energy Storage Applications 262 10.7.1 Sensing and Energy Storage Artificial Nano and Microstructures 262 10.7.2 Bioinspired Hierarchical Nanofibrous Materials 263 10.7.3 Nature- Inspired Polymer Nanocomposites 264 10.7.4 Skin- Inspired Hierarchical Polymer Materials 265 10.7.5 Neuron- Inspired Network Materials 267 10.7.6 Tunable Energy Storage Materials 267 10.7.7 Tunable Sensing Materials 270 10.7.8 Bioinspired Batteries 273 10.7.9 Bioinspired Energy Storage Devices 274 10.8 Conclusions 276 References 276 11 Sustainable Energy Storage Devices and Device Design for in the Scope of Internet of Things 291 Vitor Correia, Carlos Miguel Costa, and Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez 11.1 Introduction 291 11.2 New Materials and Manufacturing Methods for Batteries 296 11.3 New Materials and Manufacturing Methods for Supercapacitors 299 11.4 New Designs to Optimize the Management and Energy Needs of the Devices 301 11.5 Recycling Solutions for Energy Storage Systems 302 11.6 Conclusions 302 Acknowledgments 303 References 303 Part V Waste Prevention and Recycling 307 12 Waste Prevention for Energy Storage Devices Based on Second- Life Use of Lithium- Ion Batteries 309 Oliver Pohl, Gavin Collis, Peter Mahon, and Thomas Rüther 12.1 Introduction 309 12.1.1 Benefits of Second- Life 312 12.1.2 Economic Benefits 313 12.1.3 Environmental Benefits 315 12.2 Challenges 315 12.2.1 Chemical Challenges 315 12.2.2 Methods of Investigating Lithium- Ion Battery State of Health 318 12.2.2.1 Coulomb Counting 318 12.2.2.2 Battery Management System Data Extraction 318 12.2.2.3 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy (EIS) 319 12.2.2.4 Incremental Capacity Analysis (ICA) 320 12.2.3 Engineering Challenges 320 12.2.4 Economic Challenges 321 12.2.5 Legal Challenges 322 12.2.6 Current Implementations 323 12.2.7 Outlook 324 References 324 13 Recycling Procedures for Energy Storage Devices in the Scope of the Electric Vehicle Implementation 335 Carlos Miguel Costa, Yifeng Wang, Eider Goikolea, Qi Zhang, Hélder Castro, Renato Gonçalves, and Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez 13.1 Introduction 335 13.2 Lithium- Ion Batteries: Environmental Impact and Sustainability 336 13.3 Lithium- Ion Batteries: Recycling Strategies and Processes 337 13.3.1 Electrode Recycling Approaches 337 13.3.1.1 Pyrometallurgical Methods 337 13.3.2 Separators/electrolytes 356 13.4 Status of the Battery Electric Vehicle Fleet 356 13.4.1 Battery Demand 356 13.4.2 Battery Electric Vehicle Outlook 361 13.4.2.1 Sustainability 361 13.4.2.2 Production Stage 362 13.4.2.3 Use Stage 362 13.4.2.4 End of Life and Analysis 363 13.5 Conclusions and Outlook 365 Acknowledgments 366 References 366 14 Summary and Outlook 375 Renato Gonçalves, Arkaitz Fidalgo- Marijuan, Carlos Miguel Costa, and Senentxu Lanceros-Méndez Acknowledgments 377 References 377 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisARC WELDING PROCESSES HANDBOOK An applied reference, each part of this Handbook gives valuable information regarding the industry or industries where the process is commonly used as well as a description of the equipment. Written by a welding/metallurgical engineer with over 40 years of experience, Arc Welding Processes Handbook delivers the welding and materials expertise required to master complex welding processes and techniques to ensure that the task is done correctly and safely, while reinforcing an understanding of international welding standards and rules. The perfect handbook for those professionals who need an up-to-date reference to advance processes as well as those welders new to the field and need to hone their skills. Arc Welding Processes Handbook five-part treatment starts with a clear and rigorous exposition of the applications and equipment of Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) and Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW), followed by self-contained parts concerning processes Table of ContentsList of Figures xvii List of Tables xxv Foreword xxix Preface xxxi 1 Introduction to Welding Processes 1 1.1 Synopsis 1 1.2 Keywords 1 1.3 Welding 1 1.4 Defining Welding 2 1.5 Welding and Joining Processes 3 1.6 Arc Welding 3 1.6.1 Carbon Arc Welding 3 1.6.2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) 3 1.6.3 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) 4 1.6.4 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) 7 1.6.5 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) 7 1.7 Efficiency of Energy Use 7 1.8 Welding Procedures 8 1.9 Qualification of Welders and Operators 11 2 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) 13 2.1 Synopsis 13 2.2 Keywords 13 2.3 Introduction 13 2.4 Process Fundamentals 14 2.5 How the Process Works 15 2.6 Power Sources 16 2.6.1 Constant Current and Constant Voltage Power Source 17 2.6.2 Constant Current Curve 18 2.6.3 Constant Voltage Curve 18 2.7 AC Power Sources 18 2.7.1 The Alternator Type AC Welding Machines 19 2.7.2 Movable Coil Type Control 20 2.7.3 Movable Shunt Type Control 20 2.7.4 Movable Core (Reactor) Type of Control 20 2.7.5 Magnetic Amplifier Method of Current Control 21 2.7.6 Diode 22 2.7.7 Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs) 23 2.7.8 Transistors 24 2.8 Direct Current Power Sources 24 2.8.1 Generator 26 2.8.2 Alternator 27 2.8.2.1 Power Source Remote Control 29 2.8.3 Installation of Welding Machines 29 2.8.3.1 Cooling System for Welding Power Sources 30 2.8.3.2 Welding Connections – Welding Cable and Electrode Holders 30 2.8.4 Electrode Holders 31 2.8.5 Arc Welding Power Source Classification by NEMA 32 2.8.5.1 Duty Cycle 33 2.8.5.2 Power Requirement 34 2.9 Welding Safety and Personal Protecting Equipment 34 2.9.1 Shields and Helmets 34 2.9.2 Optical Clarity for Welding 37 2.9.3 Other Essential Clothing for Welders 38 2.10 Covered Electrodes Used in SMAW Process 39 2.10.1 Coating Types 39 2.10.1.1 Cellulose-Coated Electrodes 40 2.10.1.2 Rutile-Coated Electrodes 40 2.10.1.3 Basic-Coated Electrodes 40 2.10.2 Portfolio of SMAW Electrode 41 2.10.3 Identification of Welding Electrode 41 2.10.4 Need for the Covered Electrode 45 2.10.5 Electrode Conditioning 45 2.11 Welding Training – Making of a Welder 47 2.11.1 Joint Design and Preparation 47 2.11.2 SMAW Welding of Plate 50 2.11.3 Making of a SMAW Welder 50 2.11.3.1 SMAW Welding Practice Step 1 51 2.11.3.2 SMAW Welding Practice Step 2 52 2.11.3.3 SMAW Welding Practice Step 3 56 2.11.4 Inspection of the Weld 57 2.11.4.1 Appearance of the Weld 57 2.11.5 Step 3 Practice 2 59 2.11.6 SMAW Welding Step 4 59 2.11.7 SMAW Welding Step 5 60 2.11.8 Set a Next Goal to Achieve 61 2.11.9 SMAW Welding of Pipes 62 2.11.9.1 Pipe Welding Step 1 62 2.11.10 Pipe Welding Technique and Pipeline Welding 67 2.11.10.1 Vertical Up Technique 69 2.11.11 In-Plant Piping 70 2.11.12 Pipeline Welding 72 2.11.12.1 Making a Root Pass 72 2.12 Welding Other Metals 74 2.12.1 SMAW Welding Aluminum 74 2.12.2 Aluminum Alloys and Their Characteristics 75 2.12.2.1 1xxx Series Alloys 75 2.12.2.2 2xxx Series Alloys 75 2.12.2.3 3xxx Series Alloys 75 2.12.2.4 4xxx Series Alloys 76 2.12.2.5 5xxx Series Alloys 76 2.12.2.6 6XXX Series Alloys 76 2.12.2.7 7XXX Series Alloys 77 2.12.3 The Aluminum Alloy Temper and Designation System 77 2.12.4 Wrought Alloy Designation System 78 2.12.5 Cast Alloy Designation 78 2.12.6 The Aluminum Temper Designation System 80 2.12.6.1 Aluminum Welding Electrodes 82 2.12.6.2 Electrical Parameters 83 2.12.7 SMAW Welding of Stainless Steel 83 2.12.8 Introduction to Stainless-Steels 84 2.12.8.1 Cutting Stainless Steel for Fabrication 84 2.12.8.2 Finishing 84 2.12.9 Fabrication of Stainless Steel 85 2.12.9.1 Why Use Stainless Steel 85 2.12.10 General Welding Characteristics 85 2.12.10.1 Protection Against Oxidation 86 2.12.11 Welding and Joining Stainless Steel 87 2.12.12 Importance of Cleaning Before and After Welding 87 2.12.13 Filler Metals 88 2.12.14 Austenitic Stainless Steels 89 2.12.14.1 Metallurgical Concerns Associated with Welding Austenitic Stainless Steels 89 2.12.14.2 Mechanical Properties of Stainless Steels 89 2.12.15 Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steels 90 2.12.16 Super-Austenitic Stainless Steels 91 2.12.17 Welding and Joining of Supper-Austenitic Stainless Steels 92 2.12.17.1 Difficulties Associated with Welding Stainless Steel 93 2.12.18 Martensitic Stainless Steels 96 2.12.18.1 Properties and Application 96 2.12.18.2 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels 97 2.12.19 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 98 2.12.19.1 Properties and Application 98 2.12.20 Welding Ferritic Steel 99 2.12.21 Precipitation Hardening (PH) Stainless Steels 100 2.12.21.1 Properties and Application of Precipitation Hardening Steels 100 2.12.22 Welding Precipitation Hardened (PH) Steels 100 2.13 Welding and Fabrication of Duplex Stainless Steels 103 2.13.1 Mechanical Properties 103 2.13.2 Heat Treatment 104 2.14 SMAW Welding Nickel Alloys 106 2.14.1 Welding of Precipitation Hardenable Nickel Alloy 109 2.14.2 Welding of Cast Nickel Alloy 110 2.14.3 Nickel – Chromium Alloys 110 2.14.4 Nickel – Copper (Cupro-Nickle Alloys) 111 2.14.5 Nickel – Iron – Chromium Alloys 111 2.15 Minimizing Discontinuities in Nickel and Alloys Welds 112 2.15.1 Porosity 112 2.15.2 Weld Cracking 113 2.15.3 Stress Corrosion Cracking 113 2.15.4 Effect of Slag on Weld Metal 113 2.16 Review Your Knowledge 114 3 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding 115 3.1 Synopsis 115 3.2 Keywords 115 3.3 Introduction to Gas Tungsten Arc Welding Process 115 3.4 Process Description 117 3.5 How the Process Works 118 3.6 Process Advantages and Limitations 120 3.7 Power Sources 122 3.7.1 AC Power Sources 122 3.7.1.1 The Alternator Type AC Welding Machines 124 3.7.1.2 Movable Coil Movable Core (Reactor) 124 3.7.1.3 Magnetic Amplifier Method of Current Control 125 3.7.1.4 AC Inverters for GTAW Process 125 3.7.2 Other Control Methods 126 3.7.2.1 Wave Forms 126 3.7.2.2 Independent Amperage Control 127 3.7.2.3 Adjustable AC Output Frequency 127 3.7.2.4 Extended Balance Control 130 3.7.3 Diode 132 3.7.4 Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs) 132 3.7.5 Transistors 133 3.7.6 A Direct Current Power Source for GTAW 134 3.7.6.1 Generator 134 3.7.6.2 Alternator 136 3.7.6.3 The Output Current 137 3.7.6.4 Duty Cycle 137 3.7.7 The Inverter Machines 138 3.8 Shielding Gases 138 3.9 Gas Regulators and Flowmeters 139 3.10 GTAW Torches, Nozzles, Collets, and Gas Lenses 141 3.10.1 Gas Lens 142 3.11 Tungsten Electrodes 145 3.11.1 Grinding of Tungsten Electrode Tips 146 3.11.2 Tungsten Grind Angles and How They Affect Weld Penetration 148 3.11.2.1 The Impact of Tungsten Tip Angles on Weld 148 3.12 Joint Design 149 3.13 Power Source Remote Control 151 3.14 Installation of Welding Machines 151 3.15 Power Source Cooling System 151 3.16 Welding Connections – Welding Cable and Welding Torch Connections 152 3.17 Welding Power Source Classification by NEMA 154 3.18 Welding Personal Protecting Equipment 155 3.19 Other Essential Clothing for Welders 156 3.20 Filler Wires Used in GTAW Process 156 3.21 Classification and Identification of Welding Wires 157 3.21.1 Designation of Aluminum Welding Wires 157 3.21.2 Aluminum Alloys and Their Characteristics 158 3.22 The Aluminum Alloy Temper and Designation System 161 3.22.1 Wrought Alloy Designation System 161 3.22.2 Cast Alloy Designation 162 3.22.3 The Aluminum Temper Designation System 162 3.23 Welding Metals Other Than Carbon and Alloy Steels 164 3.24 GTAW Welding of Aluminum 165 3.25 GTAW Welding of Stainless Steel 176 3.25.1 Introduction to Stainless-Steels 176 3.25.1.1 Cutting Stainless Steel for Fabrication 177 3.25.1.2 Finishing 177 3.25.2 Fabrication of Stainless Steel 178 3.25.3 Why Stainless Steel 178 3.25.4 General Welding Characteristics 179 3.25.5 Protection Against Oxidation 179 3.25.6 Welding and Joining 180 3.25.7 Importance of Cleaning Before and After Welding 180 3.25.8 Filler Metals 182 3.25.9 Austenitic Stainless Steels 182 3.25.9.1 Metallurgical Concerns Associated with Welding Austenitic Stainless Steels 182 3.25.9.2 Mechanical Properties of Stainless Steels 183 3.25.9.3 Welding of Austenitic Stainless Steels 183 3.25.10 Welding Super-Austenitic Stainless Steels 185 3.25.10.1 Material Properties and Applications 185 3.25.10.2 Welding and Joining of Supper-Austenitic Stainless Steels 188 3.25.10.3 Difficulties Associated with Welding Stainless Steel 189 3.25.11 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels - Properties and Application 190 3.25.12 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels 191 3.25.13 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 192 3.25.13.1 Welding Ferritic Steel 193 3.25.14 Welding Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels 193 3.25.14.1 Welding Precipitation Hardened (PH) Steels 194 3.26 Mechanical Properties 195 3.26.1 Heat Treatment of Duplex Steels 195 3.26.2 How to Weld Duplex Stainless Steel 197 3.26.2.1 Filler Metal 197 3.26.2.2 Heat Input and Interpass Temperatures 198 3.26.2.3 Quality Checks 198 3.27 Welding Nickel Alloys 198 3.27.1 Welding of Precipitation Hardenable Nickel Alloy 200 3.27.2 Welding of Cast Nickel Alloy 200 3.27.3 Nickel – Chromium Alloys 200 3.27.4 Nickel – Copper (Cupro-Nickle Alloys) 201 3.27.5 Nickel – Iron – Chromium Alloys 202 3.27.6 Minimizing Discontinuities in Nickel and Alloys Welds 202 3.27.6.1 Porosity 203 3.27.6.2 Weld Cracking 203 3.27.6.3 Stress Corrosion Cracking 203 3.27.6.4 Effect of Inclusions on Weld Metal 204 3.28 Later Developments in GTAW Process 204 3.29 Plasma Arc Welding 204 3.30 Review Your Knowledge 207 4 Gas Metal Arc Welding 209 4.1 Synopsis 209 4.2 Keywords 209 4.3 Introduction to Gas Metal Arc Welding Process 209 4.3.1 Developmental History of GMAW Process 209 4.3.2 The Advantages of GMAW 213 4.3.2 Limitations of GMAW 213 4.4 Process Description 214 4.4.1 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) Process Introduction 214 4.4.1.1 Short Circuiting Transfer (GMAW-S) 217 4.4.1.2 Globular Transfer 221 4.4.1.3 Spray Transfer 223 4.4.1.4 Pulsed Spray Transfer Mode 224 4.4.2 Gas Metal Arc Welding: Newer Variants 229 4.5 Components of the Welding Arc 231 4.5.1 Shielding Gases for GMAW 232 4.5.1.1 Argon Gas 233 4.5.1.2 Helium Gas 234 4.5.2 Dissociation and Recombination 234 4.5.2.1 Dissociation and Recombination of CO2 Gas 234 4.5.2.2 Oxygen as Shielding Gas 234 4.5.2.3 Hydrogen Gas 235 4.5.3 Binary Shielding Gases 235 4.5.3.1 Argon + Helium 235 4.5.3.2 Argon + CO2 235 4.5.4 Shielding Gases by Transfer Mode 236 4.5.4.1 Common Short-Circuiting Transfer 236 4.5.4.2 Common Axial Spray Transfer 236 4.5.5 Ternary Gas Shielding Blends 237 4.5.5.1 Common Ternary Gas Shielding Blends 237 4.6 Effects of Variables on Welding 238 4.6.1 Current Density 241 4.6.2 Electrode Efficiencies 241 4.6.2.1 Calculation of Required Electrode Based on the Electrode Efficiency (EE) 242 4.6.3 Deposition Rate 242 4.6.4 Electrode Extension and Contact Tip to Work Distance 243 4.7 Advanced Welding Processes for GMAW 244 4.8 The Adaptive Loop 245 4.9 Advanced Waveform Control Technology 246 4.9.1 Surface Tension Transfer™ (STT™) 246 4.10 Equipment for GMAW Process 248 4.11 GMAW Power Sources 249 4.11.1 The Transformer Rectifiers 249 4.11.2 Inverters 250 4.12 Installation of Welding Machines 253 4.12.1 GMAW Torches 254 4.12.1.1 Welding Torches for Automation and Robotic GMAW 257 4.12.1.2 The Wire Drive and Accessories 257 4.12.1.3 Special Wire Feeding Considerations 258 4.12.1.4 Shielding Gas Regulation 259 4.12.1.5 Welding Cables and Other Accessories 259 4.12.1.6 Welding Personal Protecting Equipment 261 4.12.1.7 Other Essential Clothing for Welders 262 4.13 Welding Various Metals 262 4.13.1 Carbon Steel 263 4.13.2 Aluminum and Aluminum Welding 263 4.13.2.1 Understanding Aluminum 263 4.13.2.2 Designation of Aluminum Welding Wires 264 4.13.3 Aluminum Metallurgy and Grades 265 4.13.3.1 1xxx Series Alloys 265 4.13.3.2 2xxx Series Alloys 265 4.13.3.3 3xxx Series Alloys 266 4.13.3.4 4xxx Series Alloys 266 4.13.3.5 5xxx Series Alloys 266 4.13.3.6 6XXX Series Alloys 267 4.13.3.7 7XXX Series Alloys 267 4.13.4 The Aluminum Alloy Temper and Designation System 267 4.13.5 Wrought Alloy Designation System 268 4.13.6 Cast Alloy Designation 268 4.13.7 The Aluminum Temper Designation System 269 4.13.8 Welding Aluminum 271 4.13.8.1 Electrode Selection 271 4.13.9 Welding Stainless Steel with the Gas Metal Arc Process 271 4.13.10 Introduction to and Understanding Stainless Steel 274 4.13.11 Alloying Elements and Their Impact on Stainless Steel 275 4.13.11.1 The Elements that Promote Ferrite are 276 4.13.11.2 The Elements that Promote Austenite are 276 4.13.11.3 Neutral Effect Regarding Austenite & Ferrite 276 4.13.12 Weldability of Stainless Steels 276 4.13.12.1 Welding Austenitic Steels 276 4.13.12.2 Challenges of Welding Austenitic Steels 277 4.13.12.3 Sensitization 277 4.13.12.4 Intergranular Corrosion in the Heat Affected Zone Control of Carbide Precipitation 278 4.13.12.5 Hot Cracking 279 4.13.12.6 Design for Welding Stainless Steels 280 4.13.12.7 Determining and Measuring the Ferrite in Welds 281 4.13.12.8 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 282 4.13.12.9 Properties and Application 282 4.13.12.10 Welding Ferritic Steel 283 4.13.12.11 Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels 283 4.13.12.12 Welding Precipitation Hardened (PH) Steels 284 4.13.12.13 Martensitic Stainless Steels 285 4.13.12.14 Properties and Application 285 4.13.12.15 Welding Martensitic Stainless Steels 285 4.13.12.16 Duplex Stainless Steels 287 4.13.12.17 Mechanical Properties 287 4.13.12.18 Heat Treatment 288 4.14 Welding Nickel Alloys 289 4.14.1 Welding of Precipitation Hardenable Nickel Alloy 291 4.14.2 Welding of Cast Nickel Alloy 291 4.14.3 Nickel – Chromium Alloys 291 4.14.4 Nickel – Copper (Cupro-Nickle Alloys) 292 4.14.5 Nickel – Iron – Chromium Alloys 293 4.15 Minimizing Discontinuities in Nickel and Alloys Welds 293 4.15.1 Porosity 294 4.15.2 Weld Cracking 294 4.15.3 Stress Corrosion Cracking 295 4.15.4 Effect of Slag on Weld Metal 295 4.16 Calculating Heat Input in Pulsed Arc GMAW 295 4.17 Review Your Knowledge 296 5 Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) Process 299 5.1 Synopsis 299 5.2 Keywords 299 5.3 Introduction to Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) Process 299 5.4 Process Description 301 5.4.1 Self Shielding Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW-S) Process 302 5.4.2 Flux Core Arc Welding (FCAW-G) Gas Shielding Process 303 5.5 Welding Wires/Electrodes 304 5.5.1 Construction of FCAW Electrodes 306 5.5.2 Sheath Thickness Variations 307 5.5.3 Important FCAW Variables 307 5.5.4 Contact Tip to Work Distance (CTWD) 307 5.5.5 Travel Angle 307 5.5.6 Single Pass Limitations 308 5.5.7 Thickness Restrictions 308 5.5.8 Charpy V-Notch Toughness Properties 308 5.5.9 Electrode Care and Packaging 308 5.6 Power Sources 310 5.6.1 Arc Voltage (Constant Voltage) 310 5.6.2 CTWD, ESO and WFS 311 5.7 Other Accessories to Power Source 313 5.7.1 Welding Cable 313 5.7.2 Semiautomatic Wire Feeders 313 5.7.3 Welding Guns 313 5.7.4 Reverse Bend Gun Tubes 313 5.7.5 Gun Angles 314 5.7.6 Polarity 314 5.8 Shielding Gases 314 5.8.1 Attributes of Shielding Gases 315 5.8.2 How Shielding Gas Works? 315 5.8.3 Properties of Shielding Gases 315 5.8.4 Limits on the Use of Inert Gases 316 5.8.5 Argon and Carbon Dioxide Gas Blends 316 5.8.6 How the Shielding Gas and Blends Affect the Mechanical Properties of the Weld Metal? 317 5.8.7 Understanding the Performance of Various FCAW-G Gases 319 5.8.7.1 Shielding Gas Cost 319 5.8.7.2 Overall Operator Appeal and Impact on Productivity 319 5.8.7.3 Typical Use of Shielding Gas 321 5.9 Welding Various Metals 321 5.9.1 Applicable Base Metals 322 5.9.2 Types of Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) 323 5.9.3 FCAW Welding Austenitic, Ferritic Stainless Steels and Duplex Steels 323 5.9.3.1 Stainless Steel 323 5.9.3.2 Duplex Steels 324 5.9.3.3 Welding Ferritic Stainless Steels 324 5.9.3.4 Choice of Shielding Gases 324 5.9.4 FCAW Welding of Aluminum 324 5.9.5 Welding Nickel and Nickel Alloys by FCAW Process 325 5.10 Tips for Good Welding by FCAW Process 325 5.11 Test Your Knowledge 326 6 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) 329 6.1 Synopsis 329 6.2 Keywords 329 6.3 Introduction to Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) Process 329 6.4 Operating Characteristics 333 6.5 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) Process 334 6.5.1 Advantages and Limitations of Submerged Arc Welding 334 6.6 How the SAW Process Works 335 6.6.1 Depositing a Root Pass with SAW Process 335 6.6.2 Travel Mechanism 335 6.6.3 Variables of the SAW Process 336 6.7 SAW Process Variants 337 6.7.1 Variants Based on Use of Welding Wire 338 6.7.1.1 Multi-Wire Systems 338 6.7.1.2 Use of Hot-Wire 338 6.7.2 Adding Iron Powder to the Flux 339 6.7.3 The Utilization of a Strip Electrode for Surfacing 340 6.8 SAW Power Source and Equipment 340 6.9 Welding Heads (Gun) 340 6.10 Fluxes 341 6.10.1 Types of Granular Fluxes 341 6.10.2 Fused Fluxes versus Bonded Fluxes 342 6.10.3 Fused Fluxes 342 6.10.4 Bonded Fluxes 342 6.10.5 Neutral Fluxes 343 6.10.6 Acid Fluxes 343 6.10.7 Basic Fluxes 343 6.10.8 Selection of Specific Flux 345 6.11 Submerged Arc Welding Various Metals 345 6.12 Test Your Knowledge 347 7 Useful Data and Information Related to Welding and Fabrication 349 7.1 Common Weld Symbols and Their Meanings 349 7.2 Fillet Welds 351 7.3 Groove Welds 353 7.4 Pipe Schedule 359 7.5 Terms and Abbreviations 360 7.5.1 ASME Section IX QW 432 - F Number Table for Carbon and Alloy Steel 363 7.6 Procedure Qualification Range as Per the Material Group 364 7.7 Material Qualification Rage for Procedure Qualification Based on P-Numbers 364 7.8 Temperature Conversion 365 7.9 Useful Calculations 367 7.10 Effect of Temperature on Gas Cylinder Pressure 368 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisAI-Guided Design and Property Prediction for Zeolites and Nanoporous Materials A cohesive and insightful compilation of resources explaining the latest discoveries and methods in the field of nanoporous materials In Artificial Intelligence for Zeolites and Nanoporous Materials: Design, Synthesis and Properties Prediction a team of distinguished researchers delivers a robust compilation of the latest knowledge and most recent developments in computational chemistry, synthetic chemistry, and artificial intelligence as it applies to zeolites, porous molecular materials, covalent organic frameworks and metal-organic frameworks. The book presents a common language that unifies these fields of research and advances the discovery of new nanoporous materials. The editors have included resources that describe strategies to synthesize new nanoporous materials, construct databases of materials, structure directing agents, and synthesis conditions, and Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xvii About the Cover xxiii Acknowledgments xxv 1 The Confluence of Organo-Cations, Inorganic Species, and Molecular Modeling on the Discovery of New Zeolite Structures and Compositions 1 Christopher M. Lew, Dan Xie, Joel E. Schmidt, Saleh Elomari, Tracy M. Davis, and Stacey I. Zones 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Inorganic Studies 3 1.3 Organic Structure-Directing Agents (OSDAs) 9 1.3.1 Purpose and Important Properties 9 1.3.2 Classes of Ammonium-based OSDAs 10 1.3.3 Methods of Making 12 1.4 OSDA–Zeolite Energetics and Rational Synthesis 15 1.5 Role of High Throughput and Automation 22 1.6 Cataloguing, Archiving, Harvesting, and Mining Years of Historical Data 24 1.7 Concluding Remarks 25 References 25 2 De Novo Design of Organic Structure Directing Agents for the Synthesis of Zeolites 33 Frits Daeyaert and Michael Deem 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 De Novo Design 34 2.2.1 Molecular Structure Generator 35 2.2.2 Scoring Function 36 2.2.3 Optimization Algorithm 37 2.2.4 Practical Implementation 42 2.3 Scoring Functions for OSDAs 43 2.3.1 Stabilization Energy 43 2.3.2 Other Constraints 44 2.3.3 Multiple Objectives 45 2.4 Applications 48 2.4.1 From Drug Design to the Design of OSDAs for Zeolites 48 2.4.2 Experimental Confirmation: Pure Silica STW 49 2.4.3 Experimental Confirmation: Zeolite AEI 49 2.4.4 Practical Application: SSZ-52 (SFW) 49 2.4.5 Design of Chiral OSDAs to Direct the Synthesis of Chiral STW 49 2.4.6 Design of Selective OSDAs Directed Toward BEA vs. BEB 51 2.4.7 Design of OSDAs for Chiral Zeolite BEA 52 2.4.8 Application of a Machine-Learning Scoring Function in the De Novo Design of OSDAs for Zeolite Beta 52 2.4.9 Design of OSDAs for Zeolites for Gas Adsorption and Separation 52 2.4.9.1 Carbon Capture and Storage: WEI, JBW, GIS, SIV, DAC, 8124767, 8277563 52 2.4.9.2 Carbon Dioxide/Methane Separation: GIS, ABW, 8186909, 8198030 53 2.4.9.3 Separation of Ethylene-Ethane: DFT, ACO, NAT, JRY 53 2.4.10 Design of MOFs for Methane Storage and Delivery 54 2.4.11 Multi-Objective De Novo Design of OSDAs for Zeolites Using an Ant Colony Optimization Algorithm 55 2.5 Conclusions and Outlook 55 References 56 3 Machine Learning Search for Suitable Structure Directing Agents for the Synthesis of Beta (BEA) Zeolite Using Molecular Topology and Monte Carlo Techniques 61 María Gálvez-Llompart and German Sastre 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 Artificial Neural Networks for Modeling Zeolite-SDA van der Waals Energy Applied to BEA Zeolite 64 3.3 Virtual Screening: Identifying Novel SDA with Favorable E ZEO-SDA for the Synthesis of BEA Zeolite 69 3.4 Zeo-SDA Energy Calculation Using Atomic Models 71 3.5 Comparing Zeo-SDA Energy Calculation Using MLR, ANN, and Atomic Models 73 3.6 Conclusions 74 Acknowledgments 77 References 77 4 Generating, Managing, and Mining Big Data in Zeolite Simulations 81 Daniel Schwalbe-Koda and Rafael Gómez-Bombarelli 4.1 Introduction 81 4.1.1 Computational Materials Databases 82 4.1.2 Zeolite Databases 83 4.2 Database of OSDAs for Zeolites 85 4.2.1 Developing a Docking Algorithm 86 4.2.2 Calibrating Binding Energy Predictions 88 4.2.3 Performing and Analyzing High-Throughput Screening Calculations 91 4.2.4 Recalling Synthesis Outcomes from the Literature 94 4.2.5 Proposing OSDA Descriptors 96 4.2.6 Designing with Interactivity 99 4.3 Outlook 102 References 103 5 Co-templating in the Designed Synthesis of Small-pore Zeolite Catalysts 113 Ruxandra G. Chitac, Mervyn D. Shannon, Paul A. Cox, James Mattock, Paul A. Wright, and Alessandro Turrina 5.1 Introduction 113 5.1.1 Definitions: Templates and Structure Directing Agents; Co-templating; Dual Templating; Mixed Templating 114 5.2 SAPO Zeotypes: “Model” Systems for Co-templating 116 5.2.1 The CHA-AEI-SAV-KFI System 116 5.2.2 Development of a Retrosynthetic Co-templating Approach for ABC-6 Structure Types 118 5.3 Co-templating Aluminosilicate Zeolites 120 5.3.1 Inorganic/Organic Co-templates 121 5.3.1.1 Targeting new phases in the RHO family using divalent cations 121 5.3.1.2 Designed synthesis of the aluminosilicate SWY, STA-30 123 5.3.1.3 Co-templating and the charge density mismatch approach 124 5.3.2 Two Organic Templates in Zeolite Synthesis 125 5.3.2.1 Applications of Dual/Mixed Organic Templating 125 5.4 Intergrowth Zeolite Structures as Co-templated Materials 127 5.5 Discussion 134 5.6 Conclusions 138 Acknowledgments 138 References 138 6 Computer Generation of Hypothetical Zeolites 145 Estefania Argente, Soledad Valero, Alechania Misturini, Michael M.J. Treacy, Laurent Baumes, and German Sastre 6.1 Introduction 145 6.2 Genetic Algorithms 146 6.2.1 Codification of Genetic Algorithms 147 6.2.2 Selection Operators for Genetic Algorithms 147 6.2.3 Crossover Operators for Genetic Algorithms 149 6.2.4 Mutation Operators for Genetic Algorithms 150 6.3 Algorithms for Zeolite Structure Determination and Prediction 151 6.3.1 Zefsaii 152 6.3.2 FraGen (Framework Generator) 152 6.3.3 SCIBS (Symmetry-Constrained Intersite Bonding Search) 153 6.3.4 TTL GRINSP (Geometrically Restrained Inorganic Structure Prediction) 154 6.3.5 EZs (Exclusive Zones) 155 6.3.6 P-GHAZ (Parallel Genetic Hybrid Algorithm for Zeolites) 155 6.3.7 zeoGAsolver 156 6.4 zeoGAsolver: A Specific Example of Genetic Algorithm for ZSD 156 6.4.1 Setting Up and Coding Scheme 157 6.4.2 Initialization 157 6.4.3 Fitness Evaluation 157 6.4.4 Crossover 159 6.4.5 Population Reduction and Termination Criterion 160 6.5 Graphics Processing Units in Zeolite Structure Determination and Prediction 160 6.5.1 Quick Presentation of GPU Cards 160 6.5.2 Efficient Parallelization of Evolutionary Algorithms on GPUs 161 6.5.3 Genetic Algorithms on GPUs for Zeolite Structures Problem 162 6.5.4 GPUs in Island Model for Interrupted Zeolitic Frameworks 167 6.6 Conclusions 168 Acknowledgments 169 References 169 7 Numerical Representations of Chemical Data for Structure-Based Machine Learning 173 Gyoung S. Na 7.1 Machine Readable Data Formats 173 7.1.1 Feature Vectors 173 7.1.2 Matrices 174 7.1.3 Mathematical Graphs 175 7.2 Graph-based Molecular Representations 175 7.2.1 Chemical Representations of Molecular Structures 175 7.2.2 Molecular Graphs 176 7.2.3 XYZ File to Molecular Graph 177 7.2.4 SMILES to Molecular Graph 178 7.2.5 Multiple Molecular Graph 178 7.3 Machine Learning with Molecular Graphs 179 7.3.1 General Architecture of Graph Neural Networks 179 7.3.2 Graph Convolutional Network 181 7.3.3 Graph Attention Network 182 7.3.4 Continuous Kernel-based Convolutional Network 182 7.3.5 Crystal Graph Convolutional Neural Network 183 7.4 Graph-based Machine Learning for Molecular Interactions 183 7.4.1 Vector Concatenation Approach to Prediction Molecule-to-Molecule Interactions 184 7.4.2 Attention Map Approach for Interpretable Prediction of Molecule-to-Molecule Interactions 185 7.5 Representation Learning from Molecular Graphs 186 7.5.1 Unsupervised Representation Learning 187 7.5.2 Supervised Representation Learning 187 7.6 Python Implementations 189 7.6.1 Data Conversion: Molecular Structures to Molecular Graphs 190 7.6.2 Machine Learning: Deep Learning Frameworks for Graph Neural Networks 190 7.6.3 Pymatgen for Crystal Structures 192 7.7 Graph-based Machine Learning for Chemical Applications 193 7.7.1 Message Passing Neural Network to Predict Physical Properties of Molecules 193 7.7.2 Scale-Aware Prediction of Molecular Properties 193 7.7.3 Prediction of Optimal Properties From Chromophore-Solvent Interactions 194 7.7.4 Drug Discovery with Reinforcement Learning 195 7.7.5 Graph Neural Networks for Crystal Structures 195 7.8 Conclusion 196 References 196 8 Extracting Metal-Organic Frameworks Data from the Cambridge Structural Database 201 Aurelia Li, Rocio Bueno-Perez, and David Fairen-Jimenez 8.1 Introduction 201 8.2 Building the CSD MOF Subset 203 8.2.1 What Is a MOF? 203 8.2.2 ConQuest 204 8.3 The CSD MOF Subset 208 8.3.1 Removing Solvents With the CSD Python API 209 8.3.2 Adding Missing Hydrogens 209 8.4 Textural Properties of MOFs and Their Evolution 210 8.5 Classification of MOFs 211 8.5.1 Identification of Target MOF Families 212 8.5.2 Identification of Surface Functionalities in MOFs 217 8.5.3 Identification of Chiral MOFs 217 8.5.4 Porous Network Connectivity and Framework Dimensionality 218 8.5.5 An Insight into Crystal Quality of Different MOF Families 220 8.6 The CSD MOF Subset Among All the MOF Databases 223 8.7 Conclusions 225 Acknowledgments 226 References 226 9 Data-Driven Approach for Rational Synthesis of Zeolites and Other Nanoporous Materials 233 Watcharop Chaikittisilp 9.1 Introduction 233 9.2 Rationalization of the Synthesis–Structure Relationship in Zeolite Synthesis: Application Machine Learning and Graph Theory to Zeolite Synthesis 234 9.3 Extraction of the Structure–Property Relationship in Nanoporous Nitrogen-Doped Carbons: Dealing with the Missing Values in Literature Data 239 9.4 Acceleration of Experimental Exploration of Nanoporous Metal Alloys: An Active Learning Approach 243 9.5 Summary 247 Acknowledgments 248 References 248 10 Porous Molecular Materials: Exploring Structure and Property Space with Software and Artificial Intelligence 251 Steven Bennett and Kim E. Jelfs 10.1 Introduction 251 10.2 Computational Modeling of Porous Molecular Materials 255 10.2.1 Structure Prediction 256 10.2.2 Modeling Porosity 257 10.2.3 Amorphous and Liquid Phase Simulations 259 10.3 Data-Driven Discovery: Applying Artificial Intelligence Methods to Materials Discovery 260 10.3.1 Training Data Generation 262 10.3.1.1 Hypothetical Structure Datasets 262 10.3.1.2 Experimental Structure Datasets 263 10.3.1.3 Extraction of Data From Scientific Literature 263 10.3.1.4 Data Augmentation and Transfer Learning 263 10.3.2 Descriptor Construction and Selection 264 10.3.2.1 Local Environment Descriptors 264 10.3.2.2 Global Environment Descriptors 265 10.4 Efficient Traversal of the Chemical Space of Porous Materials 266 10.4.1 Evolutionary Algorithms 266 10.4.2 Reducing the Number of Experiments: Bayesian Optimization and Active Learning 267 10.4.3 Chemical Space Exploration with Deep Learning 268 10.5 Considering Synthetic Accessibility 269 10.6 Closing the Loop: How Can High-Throughput Experimentation Feed Back into Computation? 270 10.6.1 High-Throughput and Autonomous Experimentation 271 10.7 Conclusions 272 References 272 11 Machine Learning-Aided Discovery of Nanoporous Materials for Energy- and Environmental-Related Applications 283 Archit Datar, Qiang Lyu, and Li-Chiang Lin 11.1 Introduction 283 11.1.1 Nanoporous Materials 283 11.1.2 History and Development 283 11.1.3 Gas Separation and Storage Applications 284 11.1.4 Large-Scale Computational Screening for Gas Separation and Storage 284 11.2 Concepts and Background for Data-Driven Approaches 286 11.2.1 Dimensionality Reduction 286 11.2.2 Machine Learning Models 287 11.2.2.1 Linear Models 287 11.2.2.2 Decision Trees and Random Forests 288 11.2.2.3 Support Vector Machine 289 11.2.2.4 Neural Networks 289 11.2.2.5 Unsupervised Learning 290 11.3 Data-Driven Approaches 290 11.3.1 Nanoporous Structure Datasets 291 11.3.2 Identifying Feature Space of Materials to Screen 292 11.3.3 Methods to Search for Optimal Structures 295 11.3.4 Modeling Interatomic and Intermolecular Interactions 297 11.4 Case Studies 300 11.4.1 Post-Combustion CO2 Capture 300 11.4.2 Methane Storage 303 11.4.3 Hydrogen Storage 305 11.5 Summary and Outlook 309 References 311 12 Big Data Science in Nanoporous Materials: Datasets and Descriptors 319 Maciej Haranczyk and Giulia Lo Dico 12.1 Introduction 319 12.2 Repositories of Nanoporous Material Structures 321 12.2.1 Experimental Crystal Structures 321 12.2.2 Predicted Crystal Structures 322 12.3 Descriptors 325 12.3.1 Handcrafted Descriptors 325 12.3.2 Toward Automatically Generated and Multi-Scale Descriptors 328 12.4 Properties 329 12.5 Data Analysis 330 12.5.1 Material Similarity and Distance Measures 330 12.5.1.1 Diversity Selection 331 12.5.1.2 Cluster Analysis 332 12.6 Machine Learning Models of Structure–Property Relationships 333 12.7 Current and Future Applications 335 References 336 13 Efficient Data Utilization in Training Machine Learning Models for Nanoporous Materials Screening 343 Diego A. Gómez-Gualdrón, Cory M. Simon, and Yamil J. Colón 13.1 Descriptor Selection 344 13.1.1 Engineering of Advanced Features 344 13.1.2 Engineering of Simpler Features 347 13.2 Material Selection 349 13.3 Model Selection 351 13.3.1 Linear Regression 353 13.3.2 Supported Vector Regressors 354 13.3.3 Decision Tree-based Regressors 355 13.3.4 Artificial Neural Networks 357 13.4 Data Usage Strategies 360 13.4.1 Transfer Learning 361 13.4.2 Multipurpose Models 365 13.4.3 Material Recommendation Systems 368 13.4.4 Active Learning 370 13.4.5 Machine Learning to Speed Up Data Generation 371 13.5 Summary and Outlook 374 References 375 14 Machine Learning and Digital Manufacturing Approaches for Solid-State Materials Development 377 Lawson T. Glasby, Emily H. Whaites, and Peyman Z. Moghadam 14.1 Introduction 377 14.2 The Development of MOF Databases 379 14.3 Natural Language Processing 380 14.4 An Overview of Machine Learning Models 383 14.5 Machine Learning for Synthesis and Investigation of Solid State Materials 386 14.6 Machine Learning in Design and Discovery of MOFs 388 14.7 Current Limitations of Machine Learning for MOFs 392 14.8 Automated Synthesis and Digital Manufacturing 394 14.9 Digital Manufacturing of MOFs 401 14.10 The Future of Digital Manufacturing 403 References 404 15 Overview of AI in the Understanding and Design of Nanoporous Materials 411 Seyed Mohamad Moosavi, Frits Daeyaert, Michael W. Deem, and German Sastre 15.1 Introduction 411 15.2 Databases 411 15.2.1 Structural Databases 412 15.2.2 Databases of Material Properties 412 15.2.3 Databases of Synthesis Protocols 413 15.3 Big-Data Science for Nanoporous Materials Design and Discovery 413 15.3.1 Representations of Chemical Data 413 15.3.2 Learning Algorithms 414 15.4 Applications 415 15.5 Zeolite Synthesis and OSDAs 417 15.6 Conclusion 420 References 420 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 81st Conference on Glass Problems (GPC) was organized by the Kazuo Inamori School of Engineering, The New York State College of Ceramics, Alfred University, Alfred, NY 14802 and The Glass Manufacturing Industry Council (GMIC), Westerville, OH 43082. The Program Director was S. K. Sundaram, Inamori Professor of Materials Science and Engineering, Kazuo Inamori School of Engineering, The New York State College of Ceramics, Alfred University, Alfred, NY 14802. The Conference Director was Bob Lipetz, Executive Director, Glass Manufacturing Industry Council (GMIC), Westerville, OH 43082. The GPC Advisory Board (AB) included the Program Director, the Conference Director, and several industry representatives. The Board assembled the technical program. Donna Banks of the GMIC coordinated the events and provided support. Due to world-wide COVID-19 pandemic, the conference was a virtual event. It started with a full-day plenary session followed by technical sessions.Table of ContentsForeword Preface Acknowledgments PLENARY Surface Viscosity and the Melting of GlassDaniel R. Swiler CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR Supporting Hot and Cold Furnace RepairsNeil G Simpson, John Naughton, and Philippe Kerbois Infrastructure and Process Considerations when Increasing the Size of Your FurnaceChristopher Hetro, Michael Hannagan, and Thomas Maheady Analysis of Experiences in Recurring Furnace Construction ProjectsJalil Abraham Kuri MELTING Improved Glass Homogeneity and Higher Sustainability through Textured Expendables Tubes in Container Glass FurnacePatrice Fournier, Michel Gaubil, and Stephane Schaller Extending Campaign Life in an All-Electric Melter using High Levels of Commercial CulletPhillip Tucker and Donn Sederstrom Case Study: Comparison of an AC IGBT Controlled System and AC Phase Angle SCR Controlled System in a Resistance Heating ApplicationStanley F. Rutkowski III From Landfill to Raw Material: Obtaining High Quality Recycled Cullet to Avoid Glass Manufacturing ProblemsJacques van Putten QUALITY CONTROL AND SENSORS Glass Melt Quality Optimization by Mathematical Modeling of Redox and Bubbles in the Glass MeltAndries Habraken, Oscar Verheijen , Adriaan Lankhorst, Anne-Jans Faber, and Corinne Claireaux The Detection and Root Causes of Cord in GlassScott Cooper Float Glass Flatness: Process Consequences, and How to Improve ControlJoseph LaPlante ENVIRONMENTAL AND SUSTAINABILITY Waste Heat Recovery in Oxy-Fuel Glass Furnaces – A Path To Sustainability and Lower CO2 EmissionsShrikar Chakravarti, Jeff Alexander, and Hisashi Kobayashi

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xi Nomenclature xiii About the Companion Website xvii 1 Energy and Environment Perspectives 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Importance of Energy 3 1.3 Energy Issues 4 1.4 Environmental Issues 5 1.5 Smart Solutions 8 1.6 3S Concept 10 1.7 Role of Engineering 11 1.8 Life Cycle Assessment 12 1.9 Industrial Ecology 17 1.10 Energy Labeling 18 1.11 Closing Remarks 22 2 Energy Sources and Sustainability 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Three Key Points 27 2.3 Five Major Economic Drivers 28 2.4 Historical Perspectives 29 2.5 Exponential Growth in Energy Dynamics 30 2.6 Energy Intensity 36 2.7 Dimensions of Sustainability 39 2.8 Sustainable Development 45 2.9 Closing Remarks 51 3 System Analysis 55 3.1 Introduction 55 3.2 Zeroth and Third Laws of Thermodynamics 58 3.3 First Law of Thermodynamics 59 3.4 Second Law of Thermodynamics 59 3.5 Six-Step in System Analysis 60 3.6 Closed Systems 61 3.7 Open Systems 68 3.8 Performance Assessment 77 3.9 Closing Remarks 82 4 Fuels and Combustion 85 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Fossil Fuels 87 4.3 Impacts of Fossil Fuels 92 4.4 Combustion of Fuels 96 4.5 Thermodynamic Analysis of Combustion 103 4.6 Closing Remarks 112 5 Nuclear Energy 117 5.1 Introduction 117 5.2 Historical Perspectives 119 5.3 Types of Nuclear Energy 121 5.4 Types of Nuclear Radiation and Potential Effects 123 5.5 Nuclear Fuels and Production 124 5.6 Types of Nuclear Reactors 128 5.7 Nuclear Power Production 133 5.8 Small Modular Reactors and Their Utilization 142 5.9 Nuclear Cogeneration 143 5.10 Nuclear Hydrogen Production 147 5.11 Integrated Nuclear Energy Systems for Communities 153 5.12 Closing Remarks 160 6 Solar Energy 165 6.1 Introduction 165 6.2 Atmospheric and Direct Solar Radiation 168 6.3 Solar Energy Applications 176 6.4 Solar Thermal Systems 179 6.5 Solar PV Systems 194 6.6 Photovoltaic Thermal Hybrid Solar Panels (PVTs) 198 6.7 Closing Remarks 202 7 Wind Energy 209 7.1 Introduction 209 7.2 Historical Development of Wind Energy 212 7.3 Wind Effect and Global Wind Patterns 212 7.4 Wind Power 214 7.5 Classification of Wind Turbines 216 7.6 Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 217 7.7 Vertical-Axis Wind Turbines 227 7.8 Offshore and Onshore Types of Wind Energy 230 7.9 Case Studies 231 7.10 Energy and Exergy Maps for Wind Energy Systems 237 7.11 Closing Remarks 241 8 Geothermal Energy 245 8.1 Introduction 245 8.2 Geothermal Resources 248 8.3 Advantages and Disadvantageous of Geothermal Energy Systems 250 8.4 Geothermal Applications 250 8.5 Geothermal Power Generation 252 8.6 Geothermal Heat Pumps 277 8.7 Geothermal District Heating 281 8.8 Other Applications of Geothermal Energy 283 8.9 Closing Remarks 286 9 Biofuels and Biomass Energy 293 9.1 Introduction 293 9.2 CO2 Balance 295 9.3 Biomass 297 9.4 Combustion, Gasification and Pyrolysis 298 9.5 Biofuels 302 9.6 Biogas 304 9.7 Waste to Energy Power Generation Systems 305 9.8 Biodigestion and Biodigesters 312 9.9 Micro-Gas Turbines 317 9.10 Case Studies 323 9.11 Closing Remarks 328 10 Hydro and Ocean Energies 335 10.1 Introduction 335 10.2 Hydro Energy 336 10.3 Classification of Hydropower Plants 340 10.4 Analysis of Hydro Energy System 346 10.5 Ocean Energy 355 10.6 Closing Remarks 371 11 Energy Storage 377 11.1 Introduction 377 11.2 Historical Development of Energy Storage Operations 380 11.3 Energy Storage Methods 380 11.4 Working Principles of Energy Storage Systems 383 11.5 Analysis of Energy Storage Systems 384 11.6 Mechanical Energy Storage Methods 385 11.7 Thermal Energy Storage Methods 394 11.8 Chemical Energy Storage Methods 404 11.9 Electrochemical Energy Storage Systems 407 11.10 Other Energy Storage Techniques 409 11.11 Closing Remarks 413 12 Hydrogen Energy 417 12.1 Introduction 417 12.2 Historical Development of Hydrogen Energy Systems 419 12.3 Hydrogen Production 421 12.4 Electrolysis 435 12.5 Hydrogen Storage Methods 441 12.6 Sectoral Hydrogen Utilization 445 12.7 Closing Remarks 456 13 Integrated Energy Systems 461 13.1 Introduction 461 13.2 System Integration 463 13.3 Multigeneration 464 13.4 Closing Remarks 500 14 Life Cycle Assessment of Energy Systems 505 14.1 Introduction 505 14.2 Case Studies 509 14.3 Closing Remarks 531 References 531 Questions/Problems 532 Index 535

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Traditional Hierarchical Control Structure 2 1.1.1 Hierarchical Frequency Control 2 1.1.1.1 Primary Frequency Control 4 1.1.1.2 Secondary Frequency Control 5 1.1.1.3 Tertiary Frequency Control 5 1.1.2 Hierarchical Voltage Control 5 1.1.2.1 Primary Voltage Control 6 1.1.2.2 Secondary Voltage Control 7 1.1.2.3 Tertiary Voltage Control 7 1.2 Transitions and Challenges 7 1.3 Removing Central Coordinators: Distributed Coordination 8 1.3.1 Distributed Control 11 1.3.2 Distributed Optimization 12 1.4 Merging Optimization and Control 13 1.4.1 Optimization-Guided Control 14 1.4.2 Feedback-Based Optimization 16 1.5 Overview of the Book 17 Bibliography 19 2 Preliminaries 23 2.1 Norm 23 2.1.1 Vector Norm 23 2.1.2 Matrix Norm 24 2.2 Graph Theory 26 2.2.1 Basic Concepts 26 2.2.2 Laplacian Matrix 26 2.3 Convex Optimization 28 2.3.1 Convex Set 28 2.3.1.1 Basic Concepts 28 2.3.1.2 Cone 30 2.3.2 Convex Function 31 2.3.2.1 Basic Concepts 31 2.3.2.2 Jensen’s Inequality 35 2.3.3 Convex Programming 35 2.3.4 Duality 36 2.3.5 Saddle Point 39 2.3.6 KKT Conditions 39 2.4 Projection Operator 41 2.4.1 Basic Concepts 41 2.4.2 Projection Operator 42 2.5 Stability Theory 44 2.5.1 Lyapunov Stability 44 2.5.2 Invariance Principle 46 2.5.3 Input–Output Stability 47 2.6 Passivity and Dissipativity Theory 49 2.6.1 Passivity 49 2.6.2 Dissipativity 51 2.7 Power Flow Model 52 2.7.1 Nonlinear Power Flow 53 2.7.1.1 Bus Injection Model (BIM) 53 2.7.1.2 Branch Flow Model (BFM) 54 2.7.2 Linear Power Flow 55 2.7.2.1 DC Power Flow 55 2.7.2.2 Linearized Branch Flow 56 2.8 Power System Dynamics 56 2.8.1 Synchronous Generator Model 57 2.8.2 Inverter Model 58 Bibliography 60 3 Bridging Control and Optimization in Distributed Optimal Frequency Control 63 3.1 Background 64 3.1.1 Motivation 64 3.1.2 Summary 66 3.1.3 Organization 67 3.2 Power System Model 67 3.2.1 Generator Buses 68 3.2.2 Load Buses 69 3.2.3 Branch Flows 70 3.2.4 Dynamic Network Model 72 3.3 Design and Stability of Primary Frequency Control 74 3.3.1 Optimal Load Control 74 3.3.2 Main Results 75 3.3.3 Implications 79 3.4 Convergence Analysis 79 3.5 Case Studies 88 3.5.1 Test System 88 3.5.2 Simulation Results 89 3.6 Conclusion and Notes 92 Bibliography 93 4 Physical Restrictions: Input Saturation in Secondary Frequency Control 97 4.1 Background 98 4.2 Power System Model 100 4.3 Control Design for Per-Node Power Balance 101 4.3.1 Control Goals 102 4.3.2 Decentralized Optimal Controller 103 4.3.3 Design Rationale 105 4.3.3.1 Primal–Dual Algorithms 105 4.3.3.2 Design of Controller (4.6) 105 4.4 Optimality and Uniqueness of Equilibrium 108 4.5 Stability Analysis 112 4.6 Case Studies 120 4.6.1 Test System 120 4.6.2 Simulation Results 122 4.6.2.1 Stability and Optimality 122 4.6.2.2 Dynamic Performance 123 4.6.2.3 Comparison with AGC 124 4.6.2.4 Digital Implementation 124 4.7 Conclusion and Notes 128 Bibliography 131 5 Physical Restrictions: Line Flow Limits in Secondary Frequency Control 135 5.1 Background 136 5.2 Power System Model 137 5.3 Control Design for Network Power Balance 138 5.3.1 Control Goals 139 5.3.2 Distributed Optimal Controller 141 5.3.3 Design Rationale 142 5.3.3.1 Primal–Dual Gradient Algorithms 142 5.3.3.2 Controller Design 143 5.4 Optimality of Equilibrium 144 5.5 Asymptotic Stability 148 5.6 Case Studies 155 5.6.1 Test System 155 5.6.2 Simulation Results 156 5.6.2.1 Stability and Optimality 156 5.6.2.2 Dynamic Performance 158 5.6.2.3 Comparison with AGC 158 5.6.2.4 Congestion Analysis 158 5.6.2.5 Time Delay Analysis 161 5.7 Conclusion and Notes 165 Bibliography 165 6 Physical Restrictions: Nonsmoothness of Objective Functions in Load-Frequency Control 167 6.1 Background 167 6.2 Notations and Preliminaries 169 6.3 Power System Model 170 6.4 Control Design 171 6.4.1 Optimal Load Frequency Control Problem 172 6.4.2 Distributed Controller Design 173 6.5 Optimality and Convergence 176 6.5.1 Optimality 176 6.5.2 Convergence 178 6.6 Case Studies 183 6.6.1 Test System 183 6.6.2 Simulation Results 184 6.7 Conclusion and Notes 187 Bibliography 188 7 Cyber Restrictions: Imperfect Communication in Power Control of Microgrids 191 7.1 Background 192 7.2 Preliminaries and Model 193 7.2.1 Notations and Preliminaries 193 7.2.2 Economic Dispatch Model 194 7.3 Distributed Control Algorithms 195 7.3.1 Synchronous Algorithm 195 7.3.2 Asynchronous Algorithm 196 7.4 Optimality and Convergence Analysis 198 7.4.1 Virtual Global Clock 199 7.4.2 Algorithm Reformulation 200 7.4.3 Optimality of Equilibrium 203 7.4.4 Convergence Analysis 204 7.5 Real-Time Implementation 206 7.5.1 Motivation and Main Idea 206 7.5.2 Real-Time ASDPD 208 7.5.2.1 AC MGs 208 7.5.2.2 DC Microgrids 208 7.5.3 Control Configuration 210 7.5.4 Optimality of the Implementation 211 7.6 Numerical Results 213 7.6.1 Test System 213 7.6.2 Non-identical Sampling Rates 214 7.6.3 Random Time Delays 217 7.6.4 Comparison with the Synchronous Algorithm 217 7.7 Experimental Results 219 7.8 Conclusion and Notes 222 Bibliography 224 8 Cyber Restrictions: Imperfect Communication in Voltage Control of Active Distribution Networks 229 8.1 Background 230 8.2 Preliminaries and System Model 232 8.2.1 Note and Preliminaries 232 8.2.2 System Modeling 233 8.3 Problem Formulation 234 8.4 Asynchronous Voltage Control 235 8.5 Optimality and Convergence 237 8.5.1 Algorithm Reformulation 238 8.5.2 Optimality of Equilibrium 242 8.5.3 Convergence Analysis 243 8.6 Implementation 245 8.6.1 Communication Graph 245 8.6.2 Online Implementation 246 8.7 Case Studies 246 8.7.1 8-Bus Feeder System 247 8.7.2 IEEE 123-Bus Feeder System 250 8.8 Conclusion and Notes 253 Bibliography 254 9 Robustness and Adaptability: Unknown Disturbances in Load-Side Frequency Control 257 9.1 Background 258 9.2 Problem Formulation 259 9.2.1 Power Network 259 9.2.2 Power Imbalance 260 9.2.3 Equivalent Transformation of Power Imbalance 261 9.3 Controller Design 263 9.3.1 Controller for Known P _in j 263 9.3.2 Controller for Time-Varying Power Imbalance 264 9.3.3 Closed-Loop Dynamics 265 9.4 Equilibrium and Stability Analysis 266 9.4.1 Equilibrium 266 9.4.2 Asymptotic Stability 269 9.5 Robustness Analysis 274 9.5.1 Robustness Against Uncertain Parameters 274 9.5.2 Robustness Against Unknown Disturbances 275 9.6 Case Studies 277 9.6.1 System Configuration 277 9.6.2 Self-Generated Data 279 9.6.3 Performance Under Unknown Disturbances 282 9.6.4 Simulation with Real Data 282 9.6.5 Comparison with Existing Control Methods 284 9.7 Conclusion and Notes 286 Bibliography 287 10 Robustness and Adaptability: Partial Control Coverage in Transient Frequency Control 289 10.1 Background 289 10.2 Structure-Preserving Model of Nonlinear Power System Dynamics 291 10.2.1 Power Network 291 10.2.2 Synchronous Generators 292 10.2.3 Dynamics of Voltage Phase Angles 293 10.2.4 Communication Network 294 10.3 Formulation of Optimal Frequency Control 294 10.3.1 Optimal Power-Sharing Among Controllable Generators 294 10.3.2 Equivalent Model With Virtual Load 295 10.4 Control Design 296 10.4.1 Controller for Controllable Generators 296 10.4.2 Active Power Dynamics of Uncontrollable Generators 297 10.4.3 Excitation Voltage Dynamics of Generators 298 10.5 Optimality and Stability 298 10.5.1 Optimality 298 10.5.2 Stability 300 10.6 Implementation With Frequency Measurement 306 10.6.1 Estimating Μ I Using Frequency Feedback 306 10.6.2 Stability Analysis 307 10.7 Case Studies 310 10.7.1 Test System and Data 310 10.7.2 Performance Under Small Disturbances 312 10.7.2.1 Equilibrium and its Optimality 312 10.7.2.2 Performance of Frequency Dynamics 313 10.7.3 Performance Under Large Disturbances 316 10.7.3.1 Generator Tripping 317 10.7.3.2 Short-Circuit Fault 318 10.8 Conclusion and Notes 321 Bibliography 322 11 Robustness and Adaptability: Heterogeneity in Power Controls of DC Microgrids 325 11.1 Background 325 11.2 Network Model 328 11.3 Optimal Power Flow of DC Networks 329 11.3.1 OPF Model 329 11.3.2 Uniqueness of Optimal Solution 331 11.4 Control Design 334 11.4.1 Distributed Optimization Algorithm 334 11.4.2 Optimality of Equilibrium 335 11.4.3 Convergence Analysis 338 11.5 Implementation 344 11.6 Case Studies 346 11.6.1 Test System and Data 346 11.6.2 Accuracy Analysis 348 11.6.3 Dynamic Performance Verification 348 11.6.4 Performance in Plug-n-play Operations 352 11.7 Conclusion and Notes 353 Bibliography 354 Appendix A Typical Distributed Optimization Algorithms 357 A.1 Consensus-Based Algorithms 357 A.1.1 Consensus Algorithms 358 A.1.2 Cutting-Plane Consensus Algorithm 359 A.2 First-Order Gradient-Based Algorithms 362 A.2.1 Dual Decomposition 363 A.2.2 Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers 366 A.2.3 Primal–Dual Gradient Algorithm 368 A.2.4 Proximal Gradient Method 371 A.3 Second-Order Newton-Based Algorithms 374 A.3.1 Barrier Method 374 A.3.2 Primal–Dual Interior-Point Method 375 A.4 Zeroth-Order Online Algorithms 377 Bibliography 379 Appendix B Optimal Power Flow of Direct Current Networks 385 B. 1 Mathematical Model 385 B.. 1 Formulation 385 B.1. 2 Equivalent Transformation 387 B. 2 Exactness of SOC Relaxation 388 B.2. 1 SOC Relaxation of OPF in DC Networks 388 B.. 2 Assumptions 388 B.2. 3 Exactness of the SOC Relaxation 389 B.2. 4 Topological Independence 396 B.2. 5 Uniqueness of the Optimal Solution 396 B.2. 6 Branch Flow Model 397 B. 3 Case Studies 399 B.3. 1 16-Bus System 399 B.3. 2 Larger-Scale Systems 401 B. 4 Discussion on Line Constraints 402 B.4. 1 OPF with Line Constraints 402 B.4. 2 Exactness Conditions with Line Constraints 403 B.4. 3 Constructing Approximate Optimal Solutions 406 B.4.3. 1 Direct Construction Method 407 B.4.3. 2 Slack Variable Method 408 Bibliography 409 Index 411

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface to the Third Edition xv Part I 1 1 Formulation of Physicochemical Problems 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Illustration of the Formulation Process (Cooling of Fluids) 3 1.2.1 Model I: Plug Flow 3 1.2.2 Model II: Parabolic Velocity 6 1.3 Combining Rate and Equilibrium Concepts (Packed-Bed Adsorber) 7 1.4 Boundary Conditions and Sign Conventions 8 1.5 Summary of the Model Building Process 9 1.6 Model Hierarchy and its Importance in Analysis 10 1.6.1 Level 1 10 1.6.2 Level 2 11 1.6.3 Level 3 13 1.6.4 Level 4 13 Problems 15 References 20 2 Modeling with Linear Algebra and Matrices 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Basic Concepts of Systems of Linear Equations 21 2.3 Matrix Notation 22 2.3.1 Matrices 22 2.3.2 Vectors 22 2.3.3 Scalars 22 2.3.4 Matrices and Vectors with Special Structure 22 2.4 Matrix Algebra and Calculus Operations 24 2.4.1 Equality 24 2.4.2 Addition and Subtraction 24 2.4.3 Multiplication 24 2.4.4 Division 26 2.4.5 Further Algebraic Properties of Matrices 27 2.4.6 Basic Differential and Integral Relations for Matrices 28 2.5 Problem 1: Solution of N Equations in N Unknowns 29 2.5.1 Analytical Results 29 2.5.2 Computational Approach: Gauss Elimination 30 2.6 Problem 2: The Matrix Eigenvalue Problem 32 2.6.1 Problem Statement and Formal Solution 32 2.6.2 Computing Eigensystems: Basic Procedure 33 2.7 Singular Systems 34 2.7.1 Consistent and Inconsistent Systems 34 2.7.2 Solution Structure for Consistent Systems 35 2.7.3 Formulation and Characteristics of Non-Square Problems 36 2.7.4 Over-Determined Systems: Least-Squares Solution 37 2.7.5 Under-Determined Systems 38 2.8 Computational Linear Algebra 40 2.8.1 The LU Factorization 40 2.8.2 The QR Factorization 40 2.8.3 The SVD Factorization 40 2.8.4 Large-Scale Problems and Iterative Methods 41 Problems 42 References 47 3 Solution Techniques for Models Yielding Ordinary Differential Equations 49 3.1 Geometric Basis and Functionality 49 3.2 Classification of ODE 50 3.3 First-Order Equations 50 3.3.1 Exact Solutions 51 3.3.2 Equations Composed of Homogeneous Functions 52 3.3.3 Bernoulli’s Equation 52 3.3.4 Riccati’s Equation 52 3.3.5 Linear Coefficients 54 3.3.6 First-Order Equations of Second Degree 54 3.4 Solution Methods for Second-Order Nonlinear Equations 55 3.4.1 Derivative Substitution Method 55 3.4.2 Homogeneous Function Method 58 3.5 Linear Equations of Higher Order 59 3.5.1 Second-Order Unforced Equations: Complementary Solutions 60 3.5.2 Particular Solution Methods for Forced Equations 64 3.5.3 Summary of Particular Solution Methods 70 3.6 Coupled Simultaneous ODE 71 3.7 Eigenproblems 74 3.8 Coupled Linear Differential Equations 74 3.9 Summary of Solution Methods for ODE 75 Problems 75 References 87 4 Series Solution Methods and Special Functions 89 4.1 Introduction to Series Methods 89 4.2 Properties of Infinite Series 90 4.3 Method of Frobenius 91 4.3.1 Indicial Equation and Recurrence Relation 91 4.4 Summary of the Frobenius Method 98 4.5 Special Functions 98 4.5.1 Bessel’s Equation 99 4.5.2 Modified Bessel’s Equation 100 4.5.3 Generalized Bessel’s Equation 100 4.5.4 Properties of Bessel Functions 102 4.5.5 Differential, Integral, and Recurrence Relations 103 Problems 105 References 107 5 Integral Functions 109 5.1 Introduction 109 5.2 The Error Function 109 5.2.1 Properties of Error Function 110 5.3 The Gamma and Beta Functions 110 5.3.1 The Gamma Function 110 5.3.2 The Beta Function 111 5.4 The Elliptic Integrals 111 5.5 The Exponential and Trigonometric Integrals 113 Problems 113 References 116 6 Staged-Process Models: The Calculus of Finite Differences 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.1.1 Modeling Multiple Stages 117 6.2 Solution Methods for Linear Finite Difference Equations 118 6.2.1 Complementary Solutions 118 6.3 Particular Solution Methods 121 6.3.1 Method of Undetermined Coefficients 121 6.3.2 Inverse Operator Method 122 6.4 Nonlinear Equations (Riccati Equation) 122 Problems 124 References 126 7 Probability and Statistical Modeling 127 7.1 Concepts and Results From Probability Theory 127 7.1.1 Experiments and Random Variables 127 7.1.2 Probabilities and Distribution Functions 128 7.1.3 Characteristics of Distributions Functions 131 7.1.4 The Cumulative Distribution Function 132 7.2 Concepts and Results From Mathematical Statistics 134 7.2.1 Populations, Samples, and Sampling 134 7.2.2 Sample Statistics and Sampling Distributions 134 7.3 Statistical Analysis and Modeling 137 7.3.1 Confidence Interval for the Mean of a Population 137 7.3.2 Hypothesis Tests for the Population Mean 138 7.3.3 Hypothesis Tests: Comparing Multiple Means 140 7.3.4 Linear Models and Linear Regression 143 Problems 150 References 154 8 Approximate Solution Methods for ODE: Perturbation Methods 155 8.1 Perturbation Methods 155 8.1.1 Introduction 155 8.2 The Basic Concepts 157 8.2.1 Gauge Functions 157 8.2.2 Order Symbols 158 8.2.3 Asymptotic Expansions and Sequences 158 8.2.4 Sources of Nonuniformity 159 8.3 The Method of Matched Asymptotic Expansion 160 8.3.1 Outer Solutions 160 8.3.2 Inner Solutions 160 8.3.3 Matching 161 8.3.4 Composite Solutions 161 8.3.5 General Matching Principle 162 8.3.6 Composite Solution of Higher Order 162 8.4 Matched Asymptotic Expansions for Coupled Equations 163 8.4.1 Outer Expansion 163 8.4.2 Inner Expansion 164 8.4.3 Matching 164 Problems 165 References 173 Part II 175 9 Numerical Solution Methods (Initial Value Problems) 177 9.1 Introduction 177 9.2 Type of Method 179 9.3 Stability 180 9.4 Stiffness 185 9.5 Interpolation and Quadrature 186 9.6 Explicit Integration Methods 187 9.7 Implicit Integration Methods 188 9.8 Predictor–Corrector Methods and Runge–Kutta Methods 189 9.8.1 Predictor–Corrector Methods 189 9.9 Runge–Kutta Methods 189 9.10 Extrapolation 191 9.11 Step Size Control 192 9.12 Higher-Order Integration Methods 192 Problems 192 References 195 10 Approximate Methods for Boundary Value Problems: Weighted Residuals 197 10.1 The Method of Weighted Residuals 197 10.1.1 Variations on a Theme of Weighted Residuals 198 10.2 Jacobi Polynomials 205 10.2.1 Rodrigues Formula 205 10.2.2 Orthogonality Conditions 205 10.3 Lagrange Interpolation Polynomials 206 10.4 Orthogonal Collocation Method 206 10.4.1 Differentiation of a Lagrange Interpolation Polynomial 206 10.4.2 Gauss–Jacobi Quadrature 207 10.4.3 Radau and Lobatto Quadrature 208 10.5 Linear Boundary Value Problem: Dirichlet Boundary Condition 209 10.6 Linear Boundary Value Problem: Robin Boundary Condition 211 10.7 Nonlinear Boundary Value Problem: Dirichlet Boundary Condition 213 10.8 One-Point Collocation 215 10.9 Summary of Collocation Methods 215 10.10 Concluding Remarks 216 Problems 217 References 225 11 Introduction to Complex Variables and Laplace Transforms 227 11.1 Introduction 227 11.2 Elements of Complex Variables 227 11.3 Elementary Functions of Complex Variables 228 11.4 Multivalued Functions 229 11.5 Continuity Properties for Complex Variables: Analyticity 230 11.5.1 Exploiting Singularities 231 11.6 Integration: Cauchy’s Theorem 232 11.7 Cauchy’s Theory of Residues 233 11.7.1 Practical Evaluation of Residues 234 11.7.2 Residues at Multiple Poles 235 11.8 Inversion of Laplace Transforms by Contour Integration 235 11.8.1 Summary of Inversion Theorem for Pole Singularities 237 11.9 Laplace Transformations: Building Blocks 237 11.9.1 Taking the Transform 237 11.9.2 Transforms of Derivatives and Integrals 238 11.9.3 The Shifting Theorem 240 11.9.4 Transform of Distribution Functions 240 11.10 Practical Inversion Methods 242 11.10.1 Partial Fractions 242 11.10.2 Convolution Theorem 243 11.11 Applications of Laplace Transforms for Solutions of ODE 243 11.12 Inversion Theory for Multivalued Functions: The Second Bromwich Path 248 11.12.1 Inversion When Poles and Branch Points Exist 250 11.13 Numerical Inversion Techniques 250 11.13.1 The Zakian Method 250 11.13.2 The Fourier Series Approximation 252 Problems 253 References 257 12 Solution Techniques for Models Producing PDEs 259 12.1 Introduction 259 12.1.1 Classification and Characteristics of Linear Equations 261 12.2 Particular Solutions for PDEs 263 12.2.1 Boundary and Initial Conditions 263 12.3 Combination of Variables Method 264 12.4 Separation of Variables Method 269 12.4.1 Coated Wall Reactor 269 12.5 Orthogonal Functions and Sturm–Liouville Conditions 272 12.5.1 The Sturm–Liouville Equation 272 12.6 Inhomogeneous Equations 275 12.7 Applications of Laplace Transforms for Solutions of PDEs 279 Problems 285 References 302 13 Transform Methods for Linear PDEs 305 13.1 Introduction 305 13.2 Transforms in Finite Domain: Sturm–Liouville Transforms 305 13.2.1 Development of Integral Transform Pairs 306 13.2.2 The Eigenvalue Problem and the Orthogonality Condition 309 13.2.3 Inhomogeneous Boundary Conditions 313 13.2.4 Inhomogeneous Equations 316 13.2.5 Time-Dependent Boundary Conditions 317 13.2.6 Elliptic Partial Differential Equations 317 13.3 Generalized Sturm–Liouville Integral Transform 320 13.3.1 Introduction 320 13.3.2 The Batch Adsorber Problem 320 Problems 327 References 331 14 Approximate and Numerical Solution Methods for PDEs 333 14.1 Polynomial Approximation 333 14.2 Singular Perturbation 338 14.3 Finite Difference 343 14.3.1 Notations 343 14.3.2 Essence of the Method 344 14.3.3 Tridiagonal Matrix and the Thomas Algorithm 345 14.3.4 Linear Parabolic Partial Differential Equations 345 14.3.5 Nonlinear Parabolic Partial Differential Equations 349 14.4 Orthogonal Collocation for Solving PDEs 350 14.4.1 Elliptic PDE 350 14.4.2 Parabolic PDE: Example 1 353 14.4.3 Coupled Parabolic PDE: Example 2 354 Problems 355 References 362 Appendix A: Review of Methods for Nonlinear Algebraic Equations 363 A.1 The Bisection Algorithm 363 A.2 The Successive Substitution Method 364 A.3 The Newton–Raphson Method 366 A.4 Rate of Convergence 367 A.4.1 Definition of Speed of Convergence 367 A.5 Multiplicity 368 A.5.1 Multiplicity 368 A.6 Accelerating Convergence 369 References 369 Appendix B: Derivation of the Fourier–Mellin Inversion Theorem 371 References 374 Appendix C: Table of Laplace Transforms 375 Appendix D: Numerical Integration 381 D.1 Basic Idea of Numerical Integration 381 D.2 Newton Forward Difference Polynomial 381 D.3 Basic Integration Procedure 382 D.3.1 Trapezoid Rule 382 D.3.2 Simpson’s Rule 383 D.4 Error Control and Extrapolation 384 D.5 Gaussian Quadrature 384 D.6 Radau Quadrature 386 D.7 Lobatto Quadrature 388 D.8 Concluding Remarks 389 References 389 Appendix E: Nomenclature 391 Appendix F: Statistical Tables 395 Postface 399 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsList of Figures xv List of Tables xix Foreword xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxv Acronyms xxvii 1 5G Technologies, Architecture and Protocols 1 Shweta Bondre, Ashish Sharma, Vipin Bondre 1.1 Evolution of Wireless Technologies 2 1.2 5G Cellular Network Architecture 4 1.2.1 5G E2E Network Architecture 6 1.2.2 Network Slicing Architecture 6 1.2.3 NFV Management and Orchestration 7 1.2.4 NGMN Envisioned 5G Design 9 1.3 5G Energy Efficiency 10 1.3.1 Full Duplex 10 1.3.2 High Network Data Rate 11 1.3.3 Dense Small Cell Deployment 11 1.3.4 Massive MIMO Antennas 11 1.4 Security in 5G 12 1.5 5G Applications 13 1.5.1 Rapid Data Transmission 13 1.5.2 5G Flexibility for Smart Mobility 13 1.5.3 5G in Smart Cities 14 1.5.4 5G Augmented Reality 14 1.6 Conclusion 14 References 15 2 Scope and Challenges of IoT and Blockchain Integration 21 Sara Shree, Monika Sharma 2.1 Introduction 22 2.2 Literature Review 22 2.3 Internet of Things and Its Centralized System 23 2.3.1 Application Layer 24 2.3.2 Network Layer 24 2.3.3 Device Layer 25 2.4 Blockchain Technology 25 2.4.1 Characteristics of Blockchain 25 2.4.2 Working Mechanisms of Blockchain 26 2.4.3 Example of Blockchain Transactions 27 2.4.4 Need for Blockchain Technology 27 2.5 Integration of Blockchain and IoT Technology 28 2.5.1 Interactions of IoT and Blockchain Integrations 29 2.5.2 Blockchain Platforms for IoT 30 2.5.3 Advantages of Integrating IoT with Blockchain 31 2.5.4 Challenges of Blockchain and IoT Integration 33 2.5.5 Applications of IoT-Blockchain Integration 34 2.6 Conclusion 36 References 37 3 Data Communication and Information Exchange in Distributed IoT Environment 41 Rachna Jain, Kanta Prasad Sharma, Rana Majumdar, Dac-Nhuong Le 3.1 Introduction 42 3.2 IoT Technologies and Their Uses 43 3.2.1 How WSN Works 43 3.2.2 Communication with RIFD-Enabled Devices 43 3.2.3 WWW - Things on the Web 44 3.3 Centralized vs. Distributed Approach 44 3.3.1 Centralized System and Its Physiognomies 45 3.3.2 Advantages 45 3.3.3 Disadvantages of Centralized System 45 3.4 Distributed System Architecture 46 3.4.1 Advantages of Distributed System Architecture 46 3.4.2 Drawbacks of Distributed System Architecture 47 3.5 Data Communication Taking Place in Distributed IoT Environment 48 3.5.1 Internet of Things (IoT) Protocol 48 3.5.2 Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP) 48 3.5.3 Message Queuing Telemetry Transport (MQTT) 48 3.5.4 Wi-Fi 49 3.5.5 Zigbee 49 3.5.6 Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol (XMPP) 49 3.5.7 Data Distribution Service (DDS) 49 3.5.8 Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP) 49 3.5.9 Smart Home and IoT Applications: An Example 50 3.5.10 IoT Services, Machines and Applications 50 3.5.11 Sensor-Based IoT Services 50 3.5.12 Application in IoT Environment 50 3.5.13 Future of IoT in a COVID-19 Pandemic 51 3.6 Conclusion 51 References 52 4 Contribution of Cloud-Based Services in Post-Pandemic Technology Sustainability and Challenges: A Future Direction 55 Neeraj Kumar Pandey, Sampoorna Kashyap, Ashish Sharma, Manoj Diwakar 4.1 Introduction 56 4.2 Cloud-Based Solutions 59 4.2.1 Information and Communications Technology 59 4.2.2 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 59 4.2.3 Data Analytics and Business Intelligence 62 4.3 Impact of Industry 4.0 in the Cloud Computing Industry 63 4.3.1 Agriculture and Forestry 64 4.3.2 Entertainment, Media, and Hospitality 65 4.3.3 Robotics and Automation, Manufacturing and Maintenance 65 4.4 Significance and Impact of Cloud in the Pandemic Outbreak 66 4.5 Conclusion and Future Directions 66 References 67 5 Network Security in Evolving Networking Technologies: Developments and Future Directions 75 Uma Yadav, Ashish Sharma 5.1 Introduction 76 5.2 Background on Attacks, Security Services and Challenges 77 5.2.1 Types of Attacks Possible on Network 77 5.2.2 Security Services 79 5.2.3 Challenges 80 5.3 Evolution of Network Security Strategies 81 5.4 Different Evolving Security Approaches 82 5.4.1 Conventional Approaches 83 5.4.2 Confidentiality Approaches 84 5.4.3 Privacy Approaches 86 5.4.4 Availability Approaches 87 5.4.5 Modern Approaches 88 5.5 Discussion 91 5.6 Conclusion 92 References 92 6 The State of CDNs Today and What AI-Assisted CDN Means for the Future 97 Darothi Sarkar, Rana Majumdar, Dac-Nhuong Le 6.1 Introduction 98 6.2 CDN and Its Challenges 99 6.2.1 Replica Server Placement 99 6.2.2 Content Replication 100 6.2.3 Request Routing 101 6.2.4 Load Balancing 102 6.3 Importance of AI in CDN 103 6.4 Pandemic and CDN 104 6.5 Security Threats in CDN 105 6.6 Conclusion 106 References 107 7 Challenges and Opportunities in Smart City Network Management Through Blockchain and Cloud Computing 111 Jayden Pires, Vinod Kumar Shukla, Leena Wanganoo, Sonali Vyas 7.1 Introduction 112 7.2 Literature Review 112 7.2.1 Smart City and Network Management 113 7.2.2 Blockchain and Network 116 7.3 Blockchain and Smart City 118 7.3.1 Smart Healthcare 118 7.3.2 Smart E-Voting 118 7.3.3 Smart Logistics and Supply Chains 119 7.4 Cloud Computing and Challenges 119 7.4.1 Cloud Computing 119 7.5 Research Methodology 122 7.6 Conclusion 124 References 125 8 Role of IoT in Smart Homes and Offices 129 Shaurya Gupta, Sonali Vyas, Kanta Prasad Sharma 8.1 Introduction 130 8.2 Smart Building Constituents 130 8.3 Concept of Smart Office Service Devices 132 8.4 IoT in Smart Homes and Offices 133 8.4.1 Smart Environment Models 135 8.4.2 IoT Control Systems for Smart Home Devices 136 8.4.3 Prevailing Designs in Smart Homes 138 8.4.4 Smart Home Constituents 139 8.4.5 Cloud Topological Structure 140 8.4.6 Smart Home-Based Cloud Architectural Design 140 8.5 Future Research Directions and Limitations of Smart Home-Based Technology 141 8.6 Conclusion 141 References 141 9 Role of IoT in the Prevention of COVID- 19 145 Ankit Saxena, Akash Sanghi, Swapnesh Taterh, Neeraj Bhargava 9.1 Introduction 146 9.2 A Modern Era Problem 146 9.2.1 Current Risk 147 9.2.2 Awareness by Social Media 149 9.2.3 Review of Current Solutions 151 9.2.4 Current Treatment 151 9.3 Technology 152 9.3.1 Touchless User Interface 152 9.3.2 IR Sensor Working Principle 152 9.4 IoT Sensors and Board 154 9.4.1 Arduino UNO Board 154 9.4.2 Arduino USB Cable 155 9.4.3 Pulse Rate Sensor 155 9.4.4 IR Sensor 156 9.4.5 Temperature Sensors 157 9.4.6 Proximity Sensors 157 9.4.7 Pressure Sensors 157 9.4.8 LCD Display 158 9.4.9 Relay 158 9.4.10 Power Supply 159 9.4.11 Jumping Wires 159 9.5 Use of IoT in COVID-19 Prevention 160 9.6 Conclusion 161 References 162 10 Role of Satellites in Agriculture 165 Prashant Johri, Kanta Prasad Sharma, Aadrit Chauhan, Sunilkkhatri 10.1 Introduction 166 10.2 Processing Satellite Images 167 10.3 Product Levels of Satellite Remote Sensing Data 168 10.3.1 A Brief Discussion and Review of Analysis Techniques 168 10.3.2 Machine Learning 169 10.3.3 Deep Learning 170 10.4 Future Challenges 173 10.5 Conclusion 174 References 174 11 Search Engine Evaluation Methodology 177 JN Singh, Prashant Johri, Gaurav Dhuriya, Kanta Prasad Sharma 11.1 Introduction 178 11.2 Performance Evaluation Forum 178 11.2.1 Text Retrieval Conference 178 11.2.2 Text Retrieval Conference Tracks 178 11.3 Search Engine Evaluation Parameters 179 11.3.1 Precision 179 11.3.2 Recall 180 11.3.3 Problems with Precision and Recall 180 11.3.4 Discounted Cumulative Gain 181 11.3.5 Normalized DCG 181 11.3.6 Click-Through 182 11.3.7 Eye Tracking 182 11.3.8 Coverage 183 11.3.9 Response Time 183 11.4 Factors Affecting Search Engines 183 11.4.1 Evaluation 183 11.4.2 Query Formulation 184 11.4.3 User Feedback to a Web Page 184 11.4.4 W3 Rules 185 11.4.5 Web Developers’ Fake Techniques 186 11.5 Conclusion 186 References 187 12 Synthesis and Analysis of Digital IIR Filters for Denoising ECG Signal on FPGA 189 Seema Nayak, Manoj Nayak, Shamla Matri, Kanta Prasad Sharma 12.1 Introduction 190 12.2 Literature Survey 190 12.3 Methods and Materials 192 12.3.1 Conversion of MATLAB Code into Verilog HDL 192 12.3.2 Synthesis of Digital Filters on FPGA 193 12.4 Results and Discussion 194 12.4.1 Butterworth Filter 195 12.4.2 Chebyshev-I Filter 198 12.4.3 Chebyshev-II Filter 201 12.4.4 Elliptic Filter 204 12.5 Conclusion and Future Scope 207 References 208 13 Neural Networks and Their Applications 211 Shivani Joshi, Anju Gera, Sweta Bhadra 13.1 Introduction 212 13.2 Main Work of Neuron 212 13.3 Comparison Between Artificial Neural Network (ANN) and Biological Neural Network (BNN) 212 13.4 How Artificial Neural Network Works 213 13.4.1 Processing of ANN Building Blocks 214 13.4.2 Neural Network Learning Rules 217 13.5 Neural Networks and Their Applications 220 13.5.1 Image Processing and Character Recognition 221 13.5.2 Business Forecasting 221 13.5.3 Financial Prediction 221 13.5.4 Additional Neural Network Uses in the Economic World 221 13.5.5 The Traveling Salesman Problem 222 13.5.6 Medicine 223 13.5.7 Electronic Nose 223 13.5.8 Security 224 13.5.9 Loans and Credit Cards 224 13.5.10 Other Applications of Neural Networks 224 13.6 Conclusion and Future Scope 225 References 225 Editors 229

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical and straightforward exploration of the basic tools for the modeling, analysis, and design of control systems In An Introduction to System Modeling and Control, Dr. Chiasson delivers an accessible and intuitive guide to understanding modeling and control for students in electrical, mechanical, and aerospace/aeronautical engineering. The book begins with an introduction to the need for control by describing how an aircraft flies complete with figures illustrating roll, pitch, and yaw control using its ailerons, elevators, and rudder, respectively. The book moves on to rigid body dynamics about a single axis (gears, cart rolling down an incline) and then to modeling DC motors, DC tachometers, and optical encoders. Using the transfer function representation of these dynamic models, PID controllers are introduced as an effective way to track step inputs and reject constant disturbances. It is further shown how any transfer function model can be stabilized using output pole placement and on how two-degree of freedom controllers can be used to eliminate overshoot in step responses. Bode and Nyquist theory are then presented with an emphasis on how they give a quantitative insight into a control system's robustness and sensitivity. An Introduction to System Modeling and Control closes with chapters on modeling an inverted pendulum and a magnetic levitation system, trajectory tracking control using state feedback, and state estimation. In addition the book offers: A complete set of MATLAB/SIMULINK files for examples and problems included in the book. A set of lecture slides for each chapter. A solutions manual with recommended problems to assign. An analysis of the robustness and sensitivity of four different controller designs for an inverted pendulum (cart-pole). Perfect for electrical, mechanical, and aerospace/aeronautical engineering students, An Introduction to System Modeling and Control will also be an invaluable addition to the libraries of practicing engineers.Table of Contents1 Introduction 1 1.1 Aircraft 1 1.2 Quadrotors 7 1.3 Inverted Pendulum 11 1.4 Magnetic Levitation 12 1.5 General Control Problem 14 2 Laplace Transforms 15 2.1 Laplace TransformProperties 17 2.2 Partial Fraction Expansion 21 2.3 Poles and Zeros 31 2.4 Poles and Partial Fractions 32 Appendix: Exponential Function 35 Problems 38 3 Differential Equations and Stability 45 3.1 Differential Equations 45 3.2 PhasorMethod of Solution 48 3.3 Final Value Theorem 52 3.4 Stable Transfer Functions 56 3.5 Routh-Hurwitz Stability Test 59 3.5.1 Special Case - A Row of the Routh Array has all Zeros* 65 3.5.2 Special Case - Zero in First Column, but the Row is Not Identically Zero* 68 Problems 71 4 Mass-Spring-Damper Systems 81 4.1 Mechanical Work 81 4.2 Modeling Mass-Spring-Damper Systems 82 4.3 Simulation 88 Problems 92 5 Rigid Body Rotational Dynamics 103 5.1 Moment of Inertia 103 5.2 Newton’s Law of Rotational Motion 104 5.3 Gears 111 5.3.1 Algebraic Relationships Between Two Gears 112 5.3.2 Dynamic Relationships Between Two Gears 112 5.4 Rolling Cylinder* 117 Problems 125 6 The Physics of the DC Motor 139 6.1 Magnetic Force 139 6.2 Single-Loop Motor 141 6.2.1 Torque Production 141 6.2.2 Wound Field DC Motor 143 6.2.3 Commutation of the Single-Loop Motor 143 6.3 Faraday’s Law 145 6.3.1 The Surface Element Vector S 146 6.3.2 Interpreting the Sign of 147 6.3.3 Back Emf in a Linear DC Machine 147 6.3.4 Back Emf in the Single-Loop Motor 149 6.3.5 Self-Induced Emf in the Single-Loop Motor 150 6.4 Dynamic Equations of the DC Motor 152 6.5 Optical Encoder Model 154 6.6 Tachometer for a DC Machine* 157 6.6.1 Tachometer for the Linear DC Machine 157 6.6.2 Tachometer for the Single-Loop DC Motor 157 6.7 TheMultiloop DC Motor* 159 6.7.1 Increased Torque Production 159 6.7.2 Commutation of the Armature Current 159 Problems 163 7 Block Diagrams 173 7.1 Block Diagramfor a DC Motor 173 7.2 Block Diagram Reduction 175 Problems 185 8 System Responses 191 8.1 First-Order System Response 191 8.2 Second-Order System Response 193 8.2.1 Transient Response and Closed-Loop Poles 194 8.2.2 Peak Time and Percent Overshoot 198 8.2.3 Settling Time 200 8.2.4 Rise Time 202 8.2.5 Summary of 202 8.2.6 Choosing the Gain of a Proportional Controller 202 8.3 Second-Order Systems with Zeros 205 8.4 Third-Order Systems 210 Appendix - Root Locus Matlab File 211 Problems 212 9 Tracking and Disturbance Rejection 221 9.1 Servomechanism 221 9.2 Control of a DC Servo Motor 226 9.2.1 Tracking 226 9.2.2 Disturbance Rejection 231 9.2.3 Summary of the PI Controller for a DC Servo 234 9.2.4 Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative Control 234 9.3 Theory of Tracking and Disturbance Rejection 238 9.4 Internal Model Principle 242 9.5 Design Example: PI-D Control of Aircraft Pitch 244 9.6 Model Uncertainty and Feedback* 250 Problems 258 10 Pole Placement, 2 DOF Controllers, and Internal Stability 271 10.1 Output Pole Placement 271 10.1.1 Disturbance Model 276 10.1.2 Effect of the Initial Conditions on the Control Design 278 10.2 Two Degrees of Freedom Controllers 283 10.3 Internal Stability 292 10.3.1 Unstable Pole-Zero Cancellation Inside the Loop (Bad) 295 10.3.2 Unstable Pole-Zero Cancellation Outside the Loop (Good) 298 10.4 Design Example: 2 DOF Control of Aircraft Pitch 300 10.5 Design Example: Satellite with Solar Panels (Collocated Case) 303 Appendix: Output Pole Placement 306 Appendix:Multinomial Expansions 310 Appendix: Overshoot 311 Appendix: Unstable Pole-Zero Cancellation 315 Appendix: Undershoot 317 Problems 320 11 Frequency Response Methods 339 11.1 Bode Diagrams 339 11.1.1 Simple Examples 343 11.1.2 More Bode Diagram Examples 345 11.2 Nyquist Theory 359 11.2.1 Principle of the Argument 359 11.2.2 Nyquist Test for Stability 368 11.3 Relative Stability: Gain and Phase Margins 377 11.4 Closed-Loop Bandwidth 383 11.5 Lead and Lag Compensation 387 11.6 Double Integrator Control via Lead-Lag Compensation 392 11.7 Inverted Pendulum with Output 399 Appendix: Bode and Nyquist Plots in Matlab 401 Problems 402 12 Root Locus 419 12.1 Angle Condition and Root Locus Rules 420 12.2 Asymptotes and Their Intercept 427 12.3 Angles of Departure 434 12.4 Effect of Open-Loop Poles on the Root Locus 450 12.5 Effect of Open-Loop Zeros on the Root Locus 451 12.6 Breakaway Points and the Root Locus 452 12.7 Design Example: Satellite with Solar Panels (Noncollocated) 453 Problems 458 13 Inverted Pendulum, Magnetic Levitation, and Cart on a Track 467 13.1 Inverted Pendulum 467 13.1.1 Mathematical Model of the Inverted Pendulum 467 13.1.2 Linear Approximate Model 470 13.1.3 Transfer Function Model 470 13.1.4 Inverted Pendulum Control Using Nested Feedback Loops 472 13.2 Linearization of Nonlinear Models 475 13.3 Magnetic Levitation 478 13.3.1 Conservation of Energy 479 13.3.2 StatespaceModel 480 13.3.3 Linearization About an Equilibrium Point 481 13.3.4 Transfer Function Model 483 13.4 Cart on a Track System 483 13.4.1 Mechanical Equations 484 13.4.2 Electrical Equations 485 13.4.3 Equations of Motion and Block Diagram 486 Problems 488 14 State Variables 501 14.1 Statespace Form 501 14.2 Transfer Function to Statespace 503 14.2.1 Control Canonical Form 505 14.3 Laplace Transform of the Statespace Equations 513 14.4 Fundamental Matrix Φ 516 14.4.1 Exponential Matrix e^At 517 14.5 Solution of the Statespace Equation* 520 14.5.1 Scalar Case 521 14.5.2 Matrix Case 522 14.6 Discretization of a Statespace Model* 523 Problems 525 15 State Feedback 529 15.1 Two Examples 529 15.2 General State Feedback Trajectory Tracking 537 15.3 Matrix Inverses and the Cayley-Hamilton Theorem 538 15.3.1 Matrix Inverse 538 15.3.2 Cayley-Hamilton Theorem 541 15.4 Stabilization and State Feedback 543 15.5 State Feedback and Disturbance Rejection 547 15.6 Similarity Transformations 551 15.7 Pole Placement 555 15.7.1 State Feedback Does Not Change the System Zeros 559 15.8 Asymptotic Tracking of Equilibrium Points 560 15.9 Tracking Step Inputs via State Feedback 562 15.10 Inverted Pendulum on an Inclined Track* 569 15.11 Feedback Linearization Control* 574 Appendix: Disturbance Rejection in the Statespace 579 Problems 581 16 State Estimators and Parameter Identification 595 16.1 State Estimators 595 16.1.1 General Procedure for State Estimation 600 16.1.2 Separation Principle 608 16.2 State Feedback and State Estimation in the Laplace Domain* 610 16.3 Multi-Output Observer Design for the Inverted Pendulum* 613 16.4 Properties of Matrix Transpose and Inverse 615 16.5 Duality* 617 16.6 Parameter Identification 619 Problems 626 17 Robustness and Sensitivity of Feedback 641 17.1 Inverted Pendulum with Output 641 17.2 Inverted Pendulum with Output 655 17.3 Inverted Pendulum with State Feedback 657 17.4 Inverted Pendulum with an Integrator and State Feedback 661 17.5 Inverted Pendulum with State Feedback via State Estimation 663 Problems 666 References 671 Index 675

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisHybrid Project Management A how-to guide for leaders of hybrid projects that covers technical and leadership principles across the project delivery spectrum. Hybrid Project Management offers practical guidance for combining waterfall and adaptive (Agile) project management approaches. This helpful guide includes advice on when to use each approach and how various methods can be combined and customized to meet the needs of projects and stakeholders. A sample case study demonstrates how to apply the concepts described throughout the text. An exciting new title from bestselling author Cyndi Snyder Dionisio on a top trending topic in the field, sample topics covered in Hybrid Project Management include: Variables to consider when choosing a development approach Project roles such as sponsors, product owners, project managers, scrum masters, and the project team Launching a hybrid project (vision statements and charters) and structuring the project (development approach, delivery cadence, lTable of ContentsAcknowledgmentsxii Introduction xiii 1 Introducing Project Management 1 The Spectrum of Development Approaches 2 Waterfall 3 Iterative 4 Incremental 6 Agile 8 Hybrid Project Management and Development Approaches 9 Summary 11 Key Terms 11 2 Choosing a Development Approach 12 Product Variables 12 Innovation 13 Scope Stability 13 Requirements Certainty 14 Ease of Change 14 Risk 15 Criticality 15 Safety 16 Regulatory 16 Project Variables 16 Stakeholders 17 Delivery Options 17 Funding Availability 18 Organization Variables 18 Structure 18 Culture 19 Project Team 19 Experience and Commitment 20 Development Approach Evaluation Tool 21 Product Variables 21 Project Variables 22 Organizational Variables 23 Creating a Visual Display of The Variables 24 Summary 25 Key Terms 25 3 Project Roles 26 Project Sponsor 26 Initiating Projects 27 Up- Front Planning 27 Monitoring Progress 28 Supporting the Project Manager 28 Project Manager 29 Leadership Skills 29 Management Skills 30 Product Owner 31 Product Functions 31 People Activities 32 Scrum Master 32 Facilitation 32 Support 33 The Team 33 Generalizing Specialists 34 Hybrid Options 35 Summary 36 Key Terms 36 4 Launching a Hybrid Project 37 Vision Statements 38 Organizations’ Vision Statements 38 Project Vision Statements 39 Project Charter 40 Case Study 42 Background 42 Case Study Vision Statement 42 Case Study Charter 43 Assumptions and Constraints 46 Summary 47 Key Terms 47 5 Hybrid Project Planning and Structure 48 Planning Fundamentals 49 Progressive Elaboration and Rolling Wave Planning 49 Competing Demands 50 The Project Management Plan 51 Subsidiary Plans 51 Tailoring the Project Management Plan for Hybrid Projects 53 Project Life Cycles 54 Key Reviews 57 Project Management Plan for a Hybrid Project 58 Development Approach 58 Life Cycle 60 Subsidiary Plans 62 Key Reviews 63 Roadmap 63 Summary 64 Key Terms 65 6 Defining Scope in Hybrid Projects 66 Planning for Scope with a Scope Management Plan 66 Elaborating Scope with a Scope Statement 69 Narrative Description 69 Deliverables 70 Out of Scope 72 Organizing Scope with a Work Breakdown Structure 72 WBS Levels 72 Work Packages, Planning Packages, and Control Accounts 74 Steps to Create a WBS 76 Getting into the Detail with A WBS Dictionary 76 Working with Requirements 76 Elicitation 78 Prioritization 79 Documenting Requirements 81 Prioritizing Scope with a Backlog 83 Summary 84 Key Terms 84 7 Building a Predictive Schedule 85 Organizing with a Schedule Management Plan 85 Predictive Scheduling 88 Identify Tasks 88 Sequence Tasks 89 Assign Team Members 92 Estimate Durations 97 Summary 98 Key Terms 98 8 Analyzing and Finalizing a Predictive Schedule 100 Analyzing the Schedule 100 Convergence and Divergence 101 Resource Allocation 102 The Critical Path 104 Float 104 Finalizing the Schedule 106 Schedule Compression 106 Schedule Buffer 108 Baselining the Schedule 109 Summary 110 Key Terms 110 9 Adaptive and Hybrid Scheduling 111 Adaptive Scheduling 111 Release Planning 112 Task Boards 114 Hybrid Scheduling 115 Predictive with Releases and Iterations 115 Predictive with Iterations Inserted 116 Adaptive then Predictive 116 Dependencies in Hybrid Schedules 116 Summary 117 Key Terms 118 10 Estimating 119 Estimating Ranges 119 Estimating Methods 120 Analogous Estimating 121 Parametric Estimating 123 Multipoint Estimating 123 Uses and Benefits 124 Affinity Grouping 125 Wideband Delphi 127 Bottom- Up Estimating 128 Basis of Estimates 128 Estimating The Budget 129 Summary 131 Key Terms 132 11 Stakeholder Engagement 133 Identifying your Stakeholders 133 Analyzing Stakeholders 134 Grids and Matrixes 135 Analyzing Stakeholders by Role 137 Direction of Influence 137 Awareness and Support 137 Stakeholder Register 138 Planning for Successful Engagement 139 Planning Project Communication 140 Communication Methods 141 Communication Technology 141 Stakeholder Communication Plan 142 Summary 144 Key Terms 144 12 Maintaining Stakeholder Engagement 145 Engaging Stakeholders 145 Communication Competence 146 When Someone Is Speaking 147 When You Are Speaking 148 When You Are Writing 148 Feedback 149 Communication Blockers 150 Project Meetings 151 Adaptive Meetings 152 Predictive Meetings 156 Summary 157 Key Terms 157 13 Leadership in a Hybrid Environment 158 Emotional Intelligence 159 Self- Awareness 159 Self- Regulation 159 Social Awareness 160 Social Skills 160 Motivation 160 Motivators 161 Motivating Your Team 161 Example of Motivation in the Workplace 162 Agile Leadership Practices 162 Servant Leadership 162 Self- Managing Teams 163 Tailoring for a Hybrid Environment 166 Developing a High- Performing Team 166 Traits of High- Performing Teams 167 Building Relationships 167 Summary 168 Key Terms 168 14 Planning for Risk 169 Introduction to Risk Management 169 Risk Tolerance and Thresholds 171 Risk Management Plan 171 Elements in a Risk Management Plan 172 Sample Risk Management Plan 174 Risk Management Plan 174 Funding 175 Timing 175 Risk Categories 176 Definitions of Probability 176 Definitions of Impact 176 Probability and Impact Matrix 176 Summary 177 Key Terms 177 15 Identifying and Prioritizing Risk 178 Identifying Risks 178 Identification Methods 179 Documenting Risks 181 Analyzing and Prioritizing Risks 183 Filling out the Probability and Impact Matrix 183 Assessing Additional Risk Parameters 184 Simple Quantitative Analysis Methods 186 Expected Monetary Value 186 Decision Trees 187 Summary 188 Key Terms 188 16 Reducing Risk 189 Risk Responses 189 Risk Avoidance 190 Risk Mitigation 190 Risk Transference 190 Risk Escalation 191 Risk Acceptance 191 Implementing Responses 192 Risk- Adjusted Backlog 193 Reserve 195 Contingency Reserve 195 Management Reserve 199 Summary 199 Key Terms 200 17 Leading the Team 201 Establishing a Healthy Environment 201 Psychological Safety 202 Creating a Safe Environment 202 Cultivating Adaptability 203 Fostering Resilience 205 Ways of Thinking 205 Critical Thinking 206 Working with Bias 208 System Thinking 209 Supporting the Team 209 Solving Problems 210 Making Decisions 210 Resolving Conflicts 211 Considerations for Virtual Teams 213 Engagement 213 Structure 214 Virtual Meetings 215 Summary 216 Key Terms 216 18 Maintaining Momentum 217 Working with Change 217 Change Management Plan 218 Change Requests 219 Change Log 220 Requirements Traceability Matrix 221 Managing Change in a Hybrid Environment 221 Change for Predictive Deliverables 222 Change for Adaptive Deliverables 222 Helpful Tools 222 Decision Log 223 Issue Log 223 Impediment Log 224 Summary 224 Key Terms 224 19 Metrics for Predictive Deliverables 225 Predictive Measures 225 Schedule Measures 226 Cost Measures 228 Earned Value Management 231 Planning for Earned Value 231 Determining Earned Value and Actual Cost 236 Calculating Schedule and Cost Variances 237 Calculating Schedule and Cost Indexes 238 Forecasts 239 Estimate to Complete 240 Estimate at Completion 240 Summary 241 Key Terms 242 20 Metrics for Adaptive Deliverables 243 Adaptive Measures 243 Burndown Charts 244 Burnup Charts 246 Estimating Velocity 247 Cumulative Flow Diagrams 248 Creating a Cumulative Flow Diagram 250 Stakeholder Measures 253 Net Promoter Score ® 253 Mood Chart 254 Summary 255 Key Terms 255 21 Reporting for Hybrid Projects 256 Reporting 256 Narrative Reports 257 Visual Reports 260 Dashboards 260 Information Radiators 270 Hybrid Dashboards 270 Tips 272 Benefits 272 Summary 272 Key Terms 272 22 Corrective Actions and Closure 273 Preventive and Corrective Actions 273 Potential Causes and Responses for Performance Issues 274 Updating the Baseline 276 Project Closure 276 Transition 277 Administrative Closure 277 Acknowledgment 277 Evaluating Success 278 Close- Out Reports 278 Summary 280 Key Terms 280 23 Making the Move to a Hybrid Environment 281 Establish Criteria 281 Establish the Right Environment 282 Process First 282 Glossary 284 Index 292

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a student-friendly approach for building the skills required to perform mechanical design calculations Design of Mechanical Elements offers an accessible introduction to mechanical design calculations. Written for students encountering the subject for the first time, this concise textbook focuses on fundamental concepts, problem solving, and methodical calculations of common mechanical components, rather than providing a comprehensive treatment of a wide range of components. Each chapter contains a brief overview of key terminology, a clear explanation of the physics underlying the topic, and solution procedures for typical mechanical design and verification problems. The textbook is divided into three sections, beginning with an overview of the mechanical design process and coverage of basic design concepts including material selection, statistical considerations, tolerances, and safety factors. The next section discusses strength of materials in the cTable of ContentsAbout the author xi Preface xiii About the Companion Site xv 1 Mechanical Design 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Mechanical Design Process 1 1.3 Mechanical Elements 4 1.4 Standards and Codes 4 1.5 Uncertainty in Mechanical Design 5 1.6 Design for Safety 9 1.7 Key Takeaways 9 1.8 Problems 10 2 Material Selection 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Material Classification 13 2.3 Mechanical Properties 14 2.3.1 Strength and Stiffness 14 2.3.2 Elastic Versus Plastic Strain 16 2.3.3 Resilience 17 2.3.4 Toughness 18 2.3.5 Engineering Stress–Strain Diagram Summary 19 2.3.6 True Stress–Strain Diagram 19 2.4 Materials Processing 20 2.4.1 Hot Versus Cold Processing 20 2.4.2 HotWorking 21 2.4.3 ColdWorking 21 2.4.3.1 Process 21 2.4.3.2 Reduction in Area 22 2.4.3.3 ColdWork Factor 23 2.4.3.4 Modifying Material Properties Using ColdWork 23 2.5 Alloys 26 2.5.1 Numbering Systems 26 2.5.2 Plain Carbon Steels 27 2.5.3 Alloy Steels 28 2.6 Key Takeaways 28 2.7 Problems 29 3 Statistical Considerations 33 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Random Variables and Distributions 33 3.3 Density Functions 34 3.3.1 Probability Density Function 34 3.3.2 Cumulative Density Function 34 3.4 Metrics to Describe a Distribution 35 3.5 Linear Combination of Random Variables 37 3.6 Types of Distributions 39 3.6.1 Uniform Distribution 39 3.6.2 Normal Distribution 41 3.6.3 Weibull Distribution 45 3.7 Key Takeaways 48 3.8 Problems 48 4 Tolerances 53 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Terminology 53 4.3 Preferred Fits and Tolerances 55 4.3.1 ISO 286 Method 55 4.3.2 Unit Shaft and Unit Hole System 59 4.4 Tolerance Stacks 60 4.5 Key Takeaways 63 4.6 Problems 64 5 Design for Static Strength 69 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Simple Loading 70 5.2.1 Axial Loading 70 5.2.2 Bending 71 5.2.3 Torsion 72 5.3 Stress Concentrations 73 5.4 Failure Criteria 79 5.4.1 Failure Criteria for Ductile Materials 79 5.4.1.1 Maximum Normal Stress Theory (Rankine) 79 5.4.1.2 Maximum Shear Stress Theory (Tresca) 79 5.4.1.3 Distortion Energy Theory (Von Mises) 80 5.4.1.4 Comparison Between Different Failure Criteria 81 5.4.2 Failure Criteria for Brittle Materials 82 5.4.2.1 Maximum Normal Stress Theory (Rankine) 82 5.4.2.2 Coulomb–Mohr Theory 83 5.4.2.3 Comparison Between Different Failure Criteria 83 5.5 Key Takeaways 85 5.6 Problems 85 6 Design for Fatigue Strength 91 6.1 Introduction 91 6.1.1 Types of Dynamic Loads 91 6.1.2 Fatigue Failure Mechanism 92 6.2 Fatigue-life Methods 93 6.3 Fatigue Strength 95 6.4 Endurance-limit Modifying Factors 96 6.4.1 ka: Surface Factor 97 6.4.2 kb: Size Factor 97 6.4.3 kc: Load Factor 98 6.4.4 kd: Temperature Factor 99 6.4.5 ke: Reliability Factor 99 6.4.6 kf : Miscellaneous Effects Factor 100 6.5 Fluctuating Stresses 101 6.6 Stress Concentrations 105 6.7 Key Takeaways 106 6.8 Problems 106 7 Shafts 111 7.1 Introduction 111 7.1.1 Practical Considerations Related to Shaft Design 111 7.1.2 Torque Transmission 112 7.1.2.1 Relationship Between Torque, Power, and RPM 112 7.1.2.2 Belt–Pulley Torque Transmission 113 7.2 Recipe for Shaft Calculations 113 7.2.1 Design Calculation 114 7.2.2 Verification Calculation 114 7.3 Example Calculations 115 7.4 Critical Rotation Frequency of a Shaft 122 7.5 Key Takeaways 126 7.6 Problems 126 8 Bolted Joints 131 8.1 Introduction 131 8.2 Power Screws 131 8.2.1 Screw Thread Nomenclature and Geometry 131 8.2.2 Power Screw Torque 132 8.2.3 Self-locking 135 8.2.4 Efficiency of a Power Screw 135 8.2.5 Collar Friction 136 8.3 Fasteners 139 8.3.1 Screw Thread Nomenclature and Geometry 139 8.3.2 Fastener Strength Category 141 8.3.3 Bolt Preload 141 8.3.4 Hexagonal Nuts 142 8.3.5 Washers 142 8.3.6 Torque Requirement 142 8.3.7 Bolted Joints in Tension (Static) 143 8.3.7.1 Determining the Preload Fi 145 8.3.7.2 Stiffness of the Bolt 146 8.3.7.3 Stiffness of the Members 148 8.3.7.4 Stiffness of Members with a Gasket 149 8.3.8 Bolted Joints in Tension (Dynamic) 154 8.3.9 Bolted Joints in Shear 157 8.4 Key Takeaways 159 8.5 Problems 160 9 Welded Joints 165 9.1 Introduction 165 9.1.1 Welding Versus Brazing 165 9.1.2 Techniques and Materials 165 9.2 Welded Joint Geometry 168 9.3 Calculation ofWelded Joints 169 9.3.1 Butt Welded Joints 170 9.3.2 Simple Loading of Unidirectional FilletWelded Joints 170 9.3.2.1 Case 1: Axial Load 170 9.3.2.2 Case 2: Longitudinal Load 172 9.3.2.3 Case 3: Transverse Load 173 9.3.2.4 Case 4: In-plane Bending Moment 175 9.3.2.5 Case 5: Out-of-plane Bending Moment 177 9.3.2.6 Case 6: Torque Moment 178 9.3.3 Combined Loading of Unidirectional FilletWelded Joints 180 9.3.4 Multidirectional FilletWelded Joints 182 9.3.4.1 Multidirectional FilletWelded Joints with In-plane Load, No Bending 182 9.3.4.2 Multidirectional FilletWelded Joints with In-plane Load and Bending 182 9.3.4.3 Multidirectional FilletWelded Joints with Torque Moment 183 9.4 Key Takeaways 187 9.5 Problems 187 10 Rolling Element Bearings 191 10.1 Introduction 191 10.1.1 Definition 191 10.1.2 Terminology and Geometry 191 10.1.3 Design Parameters 191 10.2 Types of Rolling Element Bearings 192 10.3 Hertz Contact Stress 193 10.3.1 Hertz Contact Stress Between Spherical Bodies 195 10.3.2 Hertz Contact Stress Between Cylindrical Bodies 196 10.4 Bearing Calculations 198 10.4.1 Bearing Life 198 10.4.2 Bearing Load 198 10.4.3 Bearing Reliability 200 10.4.4 Combined Radial and Axial Loading 203 10.5 Key Takeaways 205 10.6 Problems 205 11 Gears 209 11.1 Introduction 209 11.1.1 Types of Gears 209 11.1.2 Terminology 211 11.2 Conjugate Gear Tooth Action 213 11.3 Kinematics 214 11.3.1 Involute 214 11.3.2 Contact Ratio 216 11.3.3 Gear Tooth System 217 11.3.4 Interference 217 11.4 Gear Force Analysis 219 11.5 Gear Manufacturing 222 11.5.1 Forming 222 11.5.2 Machining 222 11.6 Key Takeaways 223 11.7 Problems 223 A Area Moment of Inertia 225 A.1 Introduction 225 A.2 Terminology 225 A.3 Parallel Axis Theorem 226 A.4 Rotation About the Origin 227 B Internal Force Diagrams 231 B.1 Cantilever Beam with End Load 231 B.2 Cantilever Beam with Intermediate Load 231 B.3 Simple Supported Beam with Center Load 232 B.4 Simple Supported Beam with Intermediate Load 233 C Elementary Stress Element 235 C.1 Introduction 235 C.2 Principal Stresses 235 C.3 Maximum Shear Stress 235 Index 237

Read more less

Book SynopsisParticle Strengths A holistic and straightforward analysis framework for understanding particle strength distributions In Particle Strengths: Extreme Value Distributions in Fracture, distinguished researcher Dr. Robert F. Cook delivers a thorough exploration of the science and related engineering of fracture strength distributions of single particles tested in diametral compression. In the book, the author explains particle strengths in the broader context of material strengths to permit readers to design with particles in systems in which mechanical properties are crucial to application, manufacturing, and handling. Particle Strengths compiles published data on particle strengths into a common format that includes over 140 materials systems and over 270 published strength distributions derived from over 13000 individual particle strength measurements. It offers physically consistent descriptions of strength behavior, including the strength thresholTable of ContentsPreface xi Abbreviations and Symbols xiii 1 Introduction to Particles and Particle Loading 1 1.1 Particle Failure and Human Activity 1 1.1.1 Particles as Structural Components 1 1.1.2 Particle Loading 4 1.1.3 Particles in Application 12 1.2 Particle Shapes and Sizes 14 1.3 Summary: Particle Loading and Shape 23 References 24 2 Particles in Diametral Compression 29 2.1 Extensive and Intensive Mechanical Properties 29 2.2 Particle Behavior in Diametral Compression 33 2.2.1 Force-Displacement Observations 33 2.2.2 Force-Displacement Models 38 2.3 Stress Analyses of Diametral Compression 48 2.4 Impact Loading 60 2.5 Strength Observations 63 2.6 Strength Empirical Distribution Function 65 2.7 Outline of Particle Strengths 68 2.7.1 Individual Topics 68 2.7.2 Overall Themes 70 References 72 3 Flaw Populations 81 3.1 Flaw Sizes and Strengths 81 3.2 Populations of Flaws and Strengths 84 3.2.1 Population Definitions 84 3.2.2 Population Examples 86 3.3 Samples of Flaws and Strengths 92 3.3.1 Sample Definitions 92 3.3.2 Sample Examples 96 3.4 Heavy-Tailed and Light-Tailed Populations 103 3.5 Discussion and Summary 106 References 110 4 Strength Distributions 113 4.1 Brittle Fracture Strengths 113 4.1.1 Samples of Components 113 4.1.2 Analysis of Sample Strength Distributions 114 4.2 Sample Strength Distributions 116 4.2.1 Sample Analysis Verification 116 4.2.2 Sample Examples 119 4.3 Discussion and Summary 125 References 130 5 Survey of Extended Component Strength Distributions 133 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Materials and Loading Survey 134 5.2.1 Glass, Bending and Pressure Loading 134 5.2.2 Alumina, Bending Loading 135 5.2.3 Silicon Nitride, Bending Loading 136 5.2.4 Porcelain, Bending Loading 138 5.2.5 Silicon, Bending and Tension Loading 140 5.2.6 Fibers, Tensile Loading 141 5.2.7 Shells, Flexure Loading 142 5.2.8 Columns, Compressive Loading 144 5.2.9 Materials Survey Summary 144 5.3 Size Effects 148 5.3.1 Stochastic 148 5.3.2 Deterministic 153 5.3.3 Size Effect Summary 159 5.4 Discussion and Summary 159 References 163 6 Survey of Particle Strength Distributions 167 6.1 Introduction 167 6.2 Materials Comparisons 169 6.2.1 Alumina 169 6.2.2 Quartz 171 6.2.3 Limestone 173 6.2.4 Rock 174 6.2.5 Threshold perturbations 175 6.3 Size Comparisons 177 6.3.1 Small Particles 177 6.3.2 Medium Particles 180 6.3.3 Large Particles 181 6.4 Summary and Discussion 182 References 186 7 Stochastic Scaling of Particle Strength Distributions 189 7.1 Introduction 189 7.2 Concave Stochastic Distributions 193 7.2.1 Alumina 193 7.2.2 Limestone 194 7.2.3 Coral 197 7.2.4 Quartz and Quartzite 198 7.2.5 Basalt 201 7.3 Sigmoidal Stochastic Distributions 202 7.3.1 Fertilizer 202 7.3.2 Glass 207 7.4 Summary and Discussion 208 References 213 8 Case Study: Strength Evolution in Ceramic Particles 215 8.1 Introduction 215 8.2 Strength and Flaw Size Observations 217 8.3 Strength and Flaw Size Analysis 220 8.4 Summary and Discussion 222 References 230 9 Deterministic Scaling of Particle Strength Distributions 233 9.1 Introduction 233 9.2 Concave Deterministic Distributions 237 9.2.1 Alumina 237 9.2.2 Quartz 238 9.2.3 Salt 241 9.2.4 Rock 242 9.2.5 Coal 245 9.2.6 Coral 246 9.3 Sigmoidal Deterministic Distributions 248 9.3.1 Glass 248 9.3.2 Rock 252 9.4 Linear Deterministic Distributions 253 9.4.1 Cement 254 9.4.2 Ice 257 9.5 Deterministic Strength and Flaw Size Analyses 258 9.5.1 Linear Strength Distributions 259 9.5.2 Concave Strength Distributions 263 9.6 Summary and Discussion 265 References 270 10 Agglomerate Particle Strengths 273 10.1 Introduction 273 10.2 Pharmaceuticals 276 10.2.1 Porosity 277 10.2.2 Shape 280 10.2.3 Distributions 287 10.3 Foods 290 10.4 Catalysts 292 10.5 Discussion and Summary 294 References 297 11 Compliant Particles 303 11.1 Introduction–Hydrogel Particles 303 11.2 Deformation 308 11.2.1 Axial 308 11.2.2 Transverse 310 11.3 Strength 315 11.4 Summary and Discussion 317 References 322 12 Fracture Mechanics of Particle Strengths 325 12.1 Introduction 325 12.2 Uniform Loading 327 12.2.1 Work and Elastic Energy 327 12.2.2 Mechanical Energy and Surface Energy 328 12.2.3 The Griffith Equation 329 12.2.4 Configurational Forces: G and R 331 12.3 Localized Loading 332 12.3.1 Analysis 332 12.3.2 Examples 334 12.4 Spatially Varying Loading 337 12.4.1 Stress-Intensity Factor and Toughness 337 12.4.2 Crack at a Stressed Pore 339 12.4.3 Crack at a Misfitting Inclusion 341 12.4.4 Crack at an Anisotropic Grain or Sharp Contact 347 12.5 Combined Loading 350 12.5.1 Strength of Post-Threshold Flaws 350 12.5.2 Strength of Sub-Threshold Flaws 353 12.6 Long Cracks in Particles 354 12.6.1 Polymer Discs 354 12.6.2 Microcellulose Tablets 358 12.6.3 Ductile-Brittle Transitions 359 12.6.4 Agglomerate Compaction 361 12.7 Discussion and Summary 363 References 366 13 Applications and Scaling of Particle Strengths 369 13.1 Introduction 369 13.2 Particle Crushing Energy 369 13.3 Grinding Particle Reliability 373 13.4 Mass Effects on Particle Strength 376 13.5 Microstructural Effects on Particle Strength 380 13.6 Discussion 388 References 390 Index 393

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsTable of Contents v List of Figures xi List of Tables xiii List of Example Incidents xv Acronyms and Abbreviations xvii Glossary xxi Acknowledgments xxxi Preface xxxv Dedication xxxvi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Purpose and Scope of the Book 1 1.2 What Are Abnormal Situations? 2 1.3 The Business Case for Managing Abnormal Situations 4 1.4 Content and Organization of the Book 5 2 Process Safety and Management of Abnormal Situations 9 2.1 Impact on Process Safety 9 2.2 The Case for Positive Management of Abnormal Situations 11 2.3 Adverse Outcomes of Abnormal Situations 13 2.4 Importance of Training for Abnormal Situations 22 2.5 Safety Culture and the Management of Abnormal Situations 23 3 Abnormal Situations and Key Relevance to Process Plant Operations 27 3.1 Focus Areas for Abnormal Situation Management 27 3.1.1 ASM Research Areas 27 3.1.2 Additional Focus Areas 30 3.2 Abnormal Situations Affecting Process Plant Operations 32 3.2.1 Process Control Systems –the First Line of Defense 40 3.2.2 Frontline Operators 44 3.3 Management of Abnormal Situations and Links to Risk Based Process Safety 48 3.3.1 Commitment to Process Safety 50 3.3.2 Understand Hazards and Risk 50 3.3.3 Manage Risk 50 3.3.4 Learn from Experience 51 3.3.5 Additional RBPS Elements Related to Management of Abnormal Situations 52 3.4 Procedures and Operating Modes for Managing Abnormal Situations 53 3.4.1 General Principles for Procedure Development 53 3.4.2 Operating Modes 58 3.4.3 Types of Material Being Processed 78 4 Education for Managing Abnormal Situations 85 4.1 Educating the Trainer 85 4.2 Primary Target Populations for Training 86 4.2.1 Front-line Operators 87 4.2.2 Operations Management 89 4.2.3 Plant Engineers/Technicians 90 4.2.4 Process Safety Engineers 91 4.2.5 Design Engineers 91 4.2.6 Environmental Health, Safety and Security (EHSS) Personnel 100 4.2.7 Technical Experts 100 4.2.8 Other Parties 102 4.3 Guidance for Organizing and Structuring Training 102 4.3.1 Organization of Training 102 4.3.2 Structure of Training Topics 103 4.3.3 Skills and Competencies of Trainers 106 4.4 Summary 106 5 Tools and Methods for Managing Abnormal Situations 107 5.1 Tools and Methods for Control of Abnormal Situations 108 5.2 Predictive Hazard Identification 112 5.2.1 Hazard Recognition for Abnormal Situations 113 5.2.2 HIRA Approach to Hazard Prediction 113 5.3 Process Control Systems 115 5.3.1 Process Trend Monitoring 117 5.3.2 Alarm Management 119 5.3.3 Big Data 122 5.3.4 Advanced Diagnostics and Artificial Intelligence 123 5.4 Policies and Administrative Procedures 124 5.4.1 Expectations of Policies and Administrative Procedures 126 5.4.2 The Relationship of Policies to Abnormal Situation Management 126 5.4.3 Process Metrics 129 5.5 Operating Procedures 130 5.5.1 Standard Operating Procedures 131 5.5.2 Emergency Procedures 132 5.5.3 Transient Operation Procedures 133 5.5.4 Preparing Written Procedures 134 5.6 Training and Drills 135 5.7 Ergonomics and Other Human Factors 139 5.7.1 HMI (Human Machine Interface) System 140 5.7.2 Control Room Ergonomics/ Human Factor Assessment 142 5.7.3 Crew Resource Management 143 5.8 Learning from Abnormal Situation Incidents 147 5.9 Change Management 149 5.9.1 Management of Change Guideline Tools 150 5.9.2 Management of Organizational Change 153 5.9.3 Pre-Startup Safety Review 154 6 Continuous Improvement for Managing Abnormal Situations 155 6.1 General 155 6.2 Landscape of Available Metrics for Improvement 156 6.3 Abnormal Situations and Incident Investigations 158 6.4 Auditing 159 6.5 Management Review and Continuous Improvement 162 6.6 Summary 163 7 Case Studies/lessons Learned 165 7.1 Case Study 7.1 – Air France, 2009 166 7.1.1 Background 166 7.1.2 Incident Overview – Air France AF 447 169 7.1.3 Speed Measurement on A330 Aircraft 169 7.1.4 A330 Flight Control Systems 171 7.1.5 Airbus Pitot Tube History 173 7.1.6 The Incident - Air France AF 447 173 7.1.7 Lessons Learned Relevant to Abnormal Situation Management 178 7.1.8 Epilogue 182 7.2 Case Study 7.2 – Texaco Refinery, Milford Haven, Wales, July 1994 184 7.2.1 Background 184 7.2.2 Incident Overview – Texaco Milford Haven 185 7.2.3 Outline Process Description of Milford Haven Refinery 186 7.2.4 Controls and Instrumentation 188 7.2.5 Some Relevant History at the Refinery 189 7.2.6 The Incident 190 7.2.7 Immediate Cause 193 7.2.8 Lessons Learned Relevant to Abnormal Situation Management 193 7.2.9 Epilogue 198 7.3 Case Study 7.3 – The Hickson And Welch Fire, 1992, Castleford, UK 199 7.3.1 Background 199 7.3.2 Incident Overview – Hickson and Welch fire 200 7.3.3 Outline Process Description of Meissner Plant 201 7.3.4 History of Meissner Plant Prior to Incident 203 7.3.5 The Incident 205 7.3.6 Immediate Causes 206 7.3.7 Lessons Learned Relevant to Abnormal Situation Management 207 7.3.8 Epilogue 210 Appendix A Managing Abnormal Situations – Training Materials 211 Appendix B ASM Joint Research and Development Consortium: Background 213 References 215 Index 225

Read more less

Book SynopsisA PROJECT MANAGER'S BOOK OF TEMPLATES A helpful compendium of ready-made templates for managing every project in alignment with the latest PMBOK Guide, 7th ed. Project Management is a growing discipline that has seen considerable recent development. Project managers are now expected to deploy predictive and adaptive methods, and to draw upon a considerable base of knowledge in developing and formalizing project plans. The Project Management Institute (PMI) publishes the authoritative Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK Guide), which contains the global standard for the Project Management profession. A Project Manager's Book of Templates is a vital companion to the PMBOK Guide, providing a comprehensive set of templates and reports that helps project managers translate the content of the Guide into practical applications. It promises to be an indispensable resource for professionals in this fast-moving field. A Project Manager's Book of Templates readers will also find: Templates covering all types of work, such as starting, planning, project documents, logs and registers, and reports and audits. Templates representing all updated features of the PMBOK Guide, including hybrid, adaptive and iterative practices, including AgileEasy, readable structure that moves project managers through the different types of work that is performed in project A Project Manager's Book of Templates isan essential companion for those preparing for the PMP Certification Exam, as well as practitioners and consultants to a range of global industries.Table of ContentsAcknowledgments vii About the Companion Website viii Introduction ix Audience ix Organization ix 1 Starting the Project 1 1.1 Project Proposal 2 1.2 Business Case 5 1.3 Project Startup Canvas 9 1.4 Project Vision Statement 12 1.5 Project Charter 15 1.6 Project Brief 21 1.7 Project Roadmap 25 2 Project Plans 27 2.1 Scope Management Plan 28 2.2 Requirements Management Plan 32 2.3 Schedule Management Plan 36 2.4 Release Plan 40 2.5 Cost Management Plan 42 2.6 Quality Management Plan 45 2.7 Resource Management Plan 49 2.8 Communication Plan 53 2.9 Risk Management Plan 56 2.10 Procurement Management Plan 62 2.11 Stakeholder Engagement Plan 67 2.12 Change Management Plan 70 2.13 Project Management Plan 74 3 Project Documents 81 3.1 Change Request 82 3.2 Requirements Documentation 86 3.3 Requirements Traceability Matrix 89 3.4 Project Scope Statement 94 3.5 WBS Dictionary 97 3.6 Effort/Duration Estimates 100 3.7 Effort--Duration Estimating Worksheet 103 3.8 Cost Estimates 107 3.9 Cost Estimating Worksheet 109 3.10 Responsibility Assignment Matrix 114 3.11 Team Charter 117 3.12 Probability and Impact Assessment 121 3.13 Risk Data Sheet 127 3.14 Procurement Strategy 130 3.15 Source Selection Criteria 133 3.16 Stakeholder Analysis 136 3.17 User Story 138 3.18 Retrospective 140 4 Logs and Registers 143 4.1 Assumption Log 144 4.2 Backlog 147 4.3 Change Log 149 4.4 Decision Log 152 4.5 Issue Log 154 4.6 Stakeholder Register 157 4.7 Risk Register 160 4.8 Lessons Learned Register 163 5 Reports and Audits 167 5.1 Team Member Progress Report 167 5.2 Project Status Report 173 5.3 Variance Analysis Report 179 5.4 Earned Value Analysis 183 5.5 Risk Report 187 5.6 Contractor Status Report 193 5.7 Contract Closeout Report 197 5.8 Lessons Learned Report 201 5.9 Project Closeout Report 206 5.10 Quality Audit 210 5.11 Risk Audit 213 5.12 Procurement Audit 217 Appendix: Combination Templates 221 Index 231

Read more less

Book SynopsisFACTORIES OF THE FUTURE The book provides insight into various technologies adopted and to be adopted in the future by industries and measures the impact of these technologies on manufacturing performance and their sustainability. Businesses and manufacturers face a slew of demands beyond the usual issues of staying agile and surviving in a competitive landscape within a rapidly changing world. Factories of the Future deftly takes the reader through the continuous technology changes and looks ten years down the road at what manufacturing will mostly look like. The book is divided into two parts: Emerging technologies and advancements in existing technologies. Emerging technologies consist of Industry 4.0 and 5.0 themes, machine learning, intelligent machining, advanced maintenance, reliability, and green manufacturing. The advances of existing technologies consist of digital manufacturing, artificial intelligence in machine learning, Internet of Things, pTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Factories of the Future 1 Talwinder Singh and Davinder Singh 1.0 Introduction 2 1.1 Factory of the Future 3 1.1.1 Plant Structure 3 1.1.2 Plant Digitization 4 1.1.3 Plant Processes 4 1.1.4 Industry of the Future: A Fully Integrated Industry 5 1.2 Current Manufacturing Environment 6 1.3 Driving Technologies and Market Readiness 8 1.4 Connected Factory, Smart Factory, and Smart Manufacturing 11 1.4.1 Potential Benefits of a Connected Factory 13 1.5 Digital and Virtual Factory 13 1.5.1 Digital Factory 13 1.5.2 Virtual Factory 14 1.6 Advanced Manufacturing Technologies 14 1.6.1 Advantages of Advanced Manufacturing Technologies 16 1.7 Role of Factories of the Future (FoF) in Manufacturing Performance 17 1.8 Socio-Econo-Techno Justification of Factories of the Future 17 References 18 2 Industry 5.0 21 Talwinder Singh, Davinder Singh, Chandan Deep Singh and Kanwaljit Singh 2.1 Introduction 22 2.1.1 Industry 5.0 for Manufacturing 22 2.1.1.1 Industrial Revolutions 23 2.1.2 Real Personalization in Industry 5.0 25 2.1.3 Industry 5.0 for Human Workers 28 2.2 Individualized Human-Machine-Interaction 29 2.3 Industry 5.0 is Designed to Empower Humans, Not to Replace Them 31 2.4 Concerns in Industry 5.0 32 2.5 Humans Closer to the Design Process of Manufacturing 35 2.5.1 Enablers of Industry 5.0 36 2.6 Challenges and Enablers (Socio-Econo-Techno Justification) 37 2.6.1 Social Dimension 37 2.6.2 Governmental and Political Dimension 38 2.6.3 Interdisciplinarity 40 2.6.4 Economic Dimension 40 2.6.5 Scalability 41 2.7 Concluding Remarks 42 References 43 3 Machine Learning – A Survey 47 Navdeep Singh and Aanchal Goyal 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Machine Learning 49 3.2.1 Unsupervised Machine Learning 50 3.2.2 Variety of Unsupervised Learning 51 3.2.3 Supervised Machine Learning 52 3.2.4 Categories of Supervised Learning 54 3.3 Reinforcement Machine Learning 54 3.3.1 Applications of Reinforcement Learning 56 3.3.2 Dimensionality Reduction 57 3.4 Importance of Dimensionality Reduction in Machine Learning 58 3.4.1 Methods of Dimensionality Reduction 58 3.4.1.1 Principal Component Analysis (PCA) 58 3.4.1.2 Linear Discriminant Analysis (LDA) 59 3.4.1.3 Generalized Discriminant Analysis (GDA) 61 3.5 Distance Measures 61 3.6 Clustering 65 3.6.1 Algorithms in Clustering 67 3.6.2 Applications of Clustering 68 3.6.3 Iterative Distance-Based Clustering 69 3.7 Hierarchical Model 70 3.8 Density-Based Clustering 72 3.8.1 Dbscan 72 3.8.2 Optics 73 3.9 Role of Machine Learning in Factories of the Future 74 3.10 Identification of the Probable Customers 75 3.11 Conclusion 78 References 79 4 Understanding Neural Networks 83 Er. Lal Chand, Sikander Singh Cheema and Manpreet Kaur 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Components of Neural Networks 84 4.2.1 Neurons 85 4.2.2 Synapses and Weights 86 4.2.3 Bias 86 4.2.4 Architecture of Neural Networks 86 4.2.5 How Do Neural Networks Work? 87 4.2.6 Types of Neural Networks 88 4.2.6.1 Artificial Neural Network (ANN) 88 4.2.6.2 Recurrent Neural Network (RNN) 89 4.2.6.3 Convolutional Neural Network (CNN) 89 4.2.7 Learning Techniques in Neural Network 90 4.2.8 Applications of Neural Network 90 4.2.9 Advantages of Neural Networks 91 4.2.10 Disadvantages of Neural Network 91 4.2.11 Limitations of Neural Networks 92 4.3 Back-Propagation 92 4.3.1 Working of Back-Propagation 92 4.3.2 Types of Back-Propagation 93 4.3.2.1 Static Back-Propagation 93 4.3.2.2 Recurrent Back-Propagation 93 4.3.2.3 Advantages of Back-Propagation 94 4.3.2.4 Disadvantages of Back-Propagation 94 4.4 Activation Function (AF) 94 4.4.1 Sigmoid Active Function 94 4.4.1.1 Advantages 95 4.4.1.2 Disadvantages 95 4.4.2 RELU Activation Function 95 4.4.2.1 Advantages 96 4.4.2.2 Disadvantages 96 4.4.3 TANH Active Function 96 4.4.3.1 Advantages 97 4.4.3.2 Disadvantages 97 4.4.4 Linear Function 97 4.4.5 Advantages 98 4.4.6 Disadvantages 98 4.4.7 Softmax Function 98 4.4.8 Advantages 98 4.5 Comparison of Activation Functions 98 4.6 Machine Learning 99 4.6.1 Applications of Machine Learning 100 4.7 Conclusion 100 References 101 5 Intelligent Machining 103 Jasvinder Singh, Chandan Deep Singh and Dharmpal Deepak 5.1 Introduction 104 5.2 Requirements for the Developments of Intelligent Machining 104 5.3 Components of Intelligent Machining 105 5.3.1 Intelligent Sensors 106 5.3.1.1 Features of Intelligent Sensors 106 5.3.1.2 Functions of Intelligent Sensors 107 5.3.1.3 Data Acquisition and Management System to Process and Store Signals 111 5.3.2 Machine Learning and Knowledge Discovery Component 113 5.3.3 Database Knowledge Discovery 114 5.3.4 Programmable Logical Controller (PLC) 115 5.3.5 Role of Intelligent Machining for Implementation of Green Manufacturing 117 5.3.6 Information Integration via Knowledge Graphs 118 5.4 Conclusion 119 References 120 6 Advanced Maintenance and Reliability 121 Davinder Singh and Talwinder Singh 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Condition-Based Maintenance 122 6.3 Computerized Maintenance Management Systems (CMMS) 124 6.4 Preventive Maintenance (PM) 127 6.5 Predictive Maintenance (PdM) 128 6.6 Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) 129 6.6.1 RCM Principles 130 6.7 Condition Monitoring and Residual Life Prediction 131 6.8 Sustainability 133 6.8.1 Role of Sustainability in Manufacturing 134 6.9 Concluding Remarks 135 References 136 7 Digital Manufacturing 143 Jasvinder Singh, Chandan Deep Singh and Dharmpal Deepak 7.1 Introduction 144 7.2 Product Life Cycle and Transition 146 7.3 Digital Thread 148 7.4 Digital Manufacturing Security 150 7.5 Role of Digital Manufacturing in Future Factories 151 7.6 Digital Manufacturing and CNC Machining 152 7.6.1 Introduction to CNC Machining 152 7.6.2 Equipment’s Used in CNC Machining 153 7.6.3 Analyzing Digital Manufacturing Design Considerations 153 7.6.4 Finishing of Part After Machining 153 7.7 Additive Manufacturing 154 7.7.1 Objective of Additive Manufacturing 155 7.7.2 Design Consideration 155 7.8 Role of Digital Manufacturing for Implementation of Green Manufacturing in Future Industries 155 7.9 Conclusion 156 References 157 8 Artificial Intelligence in Machine Learning 161 Sikander Singh Cheema, Er. Lal Chand and Bhagwant Singh 8.1 Introduction 162 8.2 Case Studies 162 8.3 Advantages of A.I. in ml 164 8.4 Artificial Intelligence – Basics 166 8.4.1 History of A.I. 166 8.4.2 Limitations of Human Mind 166 8.4.3 Real Artificial Intelligence 166 8.4.4 Artificial Intelligence Subfields 167 8.4.5 The Positives of A.I. 167 8.4.6 Machine Learning 168 8.4.7 Machine Learning Models 168 8.4.8 Neural Networks 169 8.4.9 Constraints of Machine Learning 170 8.4.10 Different Kinds of Machine Learning 171 8.5 Application of Artificial Intelligence 171 8.5.1 Expert Systems 172 8.5.2 Natural Language Processing 172 8.5.3 Speech Recognition 172 8.5.4 Computer Vision 172 8.5.5 Robotics 172 8.6 Neural Networks (N.N.) Basics 173 8.6.1 Application of Neural Networks 173 8.6.2 Architecture of Neural Networks 173 8.6.3 Working of Artificial Neural Networks 175 8.7 Convolution Neural Networks 176 8.7.1 Working of Convolutional Neural Networks 176 8.7.2 Overview of CNN 181 8.7.3 Working of CNN 181 8.8 Image Classification 182 8.8.1 Concept of Image Classification 182 8.8.2 Type of Learning 182 8.8.3 Features of Image Classification 183 8.8.4 Examples of Image Classification 183 8.9 Text Classification 183 8.9.1 Text Classification Examples 183 8.9.2 Phases of Text Classification 184 8.9.3 Text Classification API 186 8.10 Recurrent Neural Network 186 8.10.1 Type of Recurrent Neural Network 187 8.11 Building Recurrent Neural Network 187 8.12 Long Short Term Memory Networks (LSTMs) 190 References 193 9 Internet of Things 195 Davinder Singh 9.1 Introduction 195 9.2 M2M and Web of Things 198 9.3 Wireless Networks 199 9.4 Service Oriented Architecture 203 9.5 Complexity of Networks 205 9.6 Wireless Sensor Networks 205 9.7 Cloud Computing 207 9.8 Cloud Simulators 211 9.9 Fog Computing 214 9.10 Applications of IoT 217 9.11 Research Gaps and Challenges in IoT 220 9.12 Concluding Remarks 223 References 224 10 Product Life Cycle 229 Harpreet Singh, Neetu Kaplas, Amant Sharma and Sahil Raj 10.1 Introduction 230 10.2 Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) 230 10.2.1 Why Product Lifecycle Management? 231 10.2.2 Biological Product Lifecycle Stages 231 10.2.3 An Example Related to Stages in Product Lifecycle Management 233 10.2.4 Advanced Stages in Product Lifecycle Management 234 10.2.5 Strategies of Product Lifecycle Management 235 10.3 High and Low-Level Skimming Strategies/Rapid or Slow Skimming Strategies 236 10.3.1 Considerations in High and Low-Level Pricing 236 10.3.2 Penetration Pricing Strategy 236 10.3.3 Example for Penetration Pricing Strategy 237 10.3.4 Considerations in Penetration Pricing 237 10.4 How Do Product Lifecycle Management Work? 240 10.5 Application Process of Product Lifecycle Management (plm) 241 10.6 Role of Unified Modelling Language (UML) 242 10.6.1 UML Activity Diagrams 243 10.7 Management of Product Information Throughout the Entire Product Lifecycle 244 10.8 PDM System in an Organization 245 10.8.1 Benefits of PDM 245 10.8.2 How Does the PDM Work? 245 10.8.3 The Services of Product Data Management 246 10.9 System Architecture 247 10.9.1 Process of System Architecture 248 10.10 Concepts of Model-Based System Engineering (MBSE) 250 10.10.1 Benefits of Model-Based System Engineering (mbse) 251 10.11 Challenges of Post-COVID 19 in Manufacturing Sector 251 10.12 Recent Updates in Product Life Cycle 252 10.13 Conclusion 253 References 254 11 Case Studies 257 Chandan Deep Singh and Harleen Kaur 11.1 Case Study in a Two-Wheeler Manufacturing Industry 258 11.1.1 Company Strategy 258 11.1.2 Initiatives Towards Technological Advancement 262 11.1.3 Management Initiatives 263 11.1.4 Sustainable Development Goals 265 11.1.5 Growth Framework with Customer Needs 269 11.1.6 Vision for the Future 270 11.2 Case Study in a Four-Wheeler Manufacturing Unit 271 11.2.1 Company Principles 271 11.2.2 Company Objectives 271 11.2.3 Company Strategy and Business Initiatives 272 11.2.4 Technology Initiatives 272 11.2.5 Management Initiatives 273 11.2.6 Quality 275 11.2.7 Sustainable Development Goals 276 11.2.8 Future Plan of Action 280 11.3 Conclusions 281 11.3.1 Limitations 282 11.3.2 Suggestions for Future Work 282 Index 285

Read more less

Book Synopsis>Application of Nanotechnology in Mining Processes Nanotechnology has revolutionized processes in many industries but its application in the mining industry has not been widely discussed. This unique book provides an overview of the successful implementation of nanotechnology in some of the key environmental and beneficiation mining processes. This book explores extensively the potential of nanotechnology to revolutionize the mining industry which has been relying for a very long on processes with limited efficiencies. The nine specialized chapters focus on applying nanoflotation to improve mineral processing, effective extraction of metals from leachates or pregnant solutions using nanoscale supramolecular hosts, and development of nano-adsorbents or nano-based strategies for the remediation or valorization of AMD. The application of nanotechnology in mining has so far received little attention from the industry and researchers and this groundbreaking book features critical issues so far under-reported in the literature: Application of nanotechnology in mineral processing for the enhancement of froth flotationDevelopment of smart nanomaterials and application for the treatment of acid mine drainageRecovery of values from pregnant solutions using nanoadsorbentsValorization of AMD through formation of multipurpose nanoproducts. Audience Industrial interest will be from mining plant operators, environmental managers, water treatment plants managers, and operators. Researchers in nanotechnology, environmental science, mining, and metallurgy engineering will find the book valuable, as will government entities such as regulatory bodies officers and environmentalists.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Modified Dendrimer Nanoparticles for Effective and Sustainable Recovery of Rare Earth Element from Acid Rock Drainage 1Anyik John Leo, Innocentia Gugulethu Erdogan, Frans B. Waanders, Martin Mkandawire, Thabo T.I Nkambule, Bhekie B. Mamba and Elvis Fosso-Kankeu 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Rare-Earth Element Occurrence in Acid Mine Drainage 10 1.2.1 Acid Mine Drainage Generation and Effects 10 1.2.2 Rare-Earth Elements and Their Importance 15 1.2.3 Classical AMD Remediation and Treatment Methods 16 1.3 Dendrimer as Extraction Agent of Rare Earth Element in AMD 17 1.3.1 Poly(amidoamine) (PAMAM) Dendrimers 19 1.3.2 Principle REE Extraction Using PAMAM 19 1.4 Designed a Recovery System for REE from AMD 21 1.4.1 Process Overview 21 1.4.2 Components and Their Functions 22 1.4.2.1 Reactor 1 – Collection Tank 22 1.4.2.2 Reactor 2 – Mixing Tank 22 1.4.2.3 Reactor 3 – Separation Tank 23 1.4.2.4 Reactor 4 – Recovery of REEs Metals 23 1.5 Challenges and Opportunities for the Future of Metal Mining 24 1.6 Conclusion 25 Acknowledgment 26 References 26 2 Cellulose-Based Nanomaterials for Treatment of Acid Mine Drainage-Contaminated Waters 33 Thato M. Masilompane, Hlanganani Tutu and Anita Etale 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 Cellulose 36 2.2.1 Structure and Properties of Cellulose 36 2.2.2 Nanocellulose 37 2.3 Synthesis of CNFs and CNCs 39 2.3.1 Synthesis of CNFs 39 2.3.2 Synthesis of CNCs Through Acid Hydrolysis 43 2.3.3 Cationization for Anion Uptake 45 2.3.4 Application of CNF and CNC Nanocomposite in Metal and Anion Removal 46 2.4 Cellulose Composites 50 2.4.1 Cellulose/Chitosan Nanocomposites 50 2.4.2 Cellulose/Metal Oxide Nanoparticles: ZnO, Magnetic Iron Oxide Nanoparticles, Nano Zero-Valent Iron 51 2.5 Valorization of AMD-Contaminated Water and the Possible Uses of Recovered Elements 53 2.5.1 Sludge from AMD 53 2.5.1.1 Removal of Heavy Metals Using Sludge 54 2.5.1.2 Sludge as a Fertilizer 55 2.5.1.3 Sludge Used in Construction Material 55 2.5.2 Resource Recovery 56 2.6 Conclusion 56 References 57 3 Application of Nanomaterials for Remediation of Pollutants from Mine Water Effluents 67 Ephraim Vunain 3.1 Introduction 68 3.1.1 Mine Water Chemistry 69 3.2 Existing Treatment Methods of Mine Water and Their Limitations 70 3.3 Nanoremediation of Mine Water 71 3.4 Application of Nanomaterials for Mine Water Remediation 73 3.5 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 81 References 81 4 Application of Nanofiltration in Mine-Influenced Water Treatment: A Review with a Focus on South Africa 91 Frédéric Jules Doucet, Gloria Dube, Sameera Mohamed, Sisanda Gcasamba, Henk Coetzee and Viswanath Ravi Kumar Vadapalli Abbreviations 92 4.1 Introduction 93 4.1.1 Mine-Influenced Water 93 4.1.1.1 Occurrence and Types of Mine-Influenced Water 93 4.1.1.2 Mine-Influenced Water Treatment 94 4.1.2 Reuse of Mine-Influenced Water 96 4.2 Nanofiltration for Mine-Influenced Water Treatment 97 4.2.1 Introduction—Membrane Separation Technologies 97 4.2.2 Nanofiltration 100 4.2.2.1 Background and Benefits 100 4.2.2.2 Types and Performances of Nanofiltration Membranes 101 4.2.2.3 Limitations and Challenges 124 4.2.2.4 Nanocomposite Membranes and Nanofillers 127 4.2.3 Membrane Distillation 128 4.3 Large-Scale Operations Using Nanofiltration or Reverse Osmosis 128 4.3.1 Integration of Membrane and Conventional Treatment Approaches 128 4.3.2 Pilot-Scale Case Studies 129 4.3.3 Challenges of Scale-Up and Commercialization 133 4.3.3.1 Fouling 133 4.3.3.2 Membrane Selection 133 4.3.3.3 Modeling and Simulation of NF Systems 134 4.3.3.4 Cost Estimates 135 4.3.3.5 Environmental Considerations 135 4.4 Some Perspectives and Research Directions 136 References 137 5 Recovery of Gold from Thiosulfate Leaching Solutions with Magnetic Nanoparticles 153 N.D. Ilankoon and C. Aldrich Abbreviations 153 5.1 Introduction 154 5.2 Recovery of Precious Metals with Magnetic Nanohydrometallurgy 156 5.2.1 Superparamagnetism 157 5.2.2 Iron Oxide Nanoparticles 157 5.2.3 Selective Adsorption 159 5.2.4 Adsorption Mechanisms 162 5.2.5 Recovery of Gold 162 5.2.6 Recovery of Silver 164 5.2.7 Recovery of PGMs 165 5.3 Synthesis and Functionalization of Magnetic Nanoparticles 166 5.4 Characterization of Magnetic Nanoparticles 170 5.5 Recovery of Gold from Thiosulfate Leaching Solutions 175 5.5.1 Preparation of PEI-MNPs 176 5.5.2 Application of PEI-MNPs for Gold Adsorption from Synthetic Leaching Solutions 177 5.5.3 Application of PEI-MNPs for Gold Adsorption from Ore Leachates 180 5.6 Gold Elution and Reuse of the Adsorbent 181 5.7 Industrial Scale-Up and Challenges 182 5.7.1 High Gradient Magnetic Separation 182 5.7.2 Nanoparticle Aggregation and Agglomeration 183 5.7.3 Nanoparticle Dissolution 185 5.7.4 Magnetic Separation from a Solution 185 5.8 Environmental Concerns and Toxicity of MNPs 186 References 186 6 Recovery of Na2CO3 and Nano CaCO3 from Na2SO4 and CaSO4 Wastes 197 Conny P. Mokgohloa, Johannes P. Maree, David S. van Vuuren, Kwena D. Modibane, Munyaradzi Mujuru and Malose P. Mokhonoana 6.1 Introduction 198 6.2 Literature Survey 200 6.2.1 Gypsum Reduction 200 6.2.2 Nano CaCO3 202 6.2.2.1 Uses 202 6.2.2.2 Composition and Particle Size 202 6.2.3 Na2CO3 203 6.2.3.1 Introduction 203 6.2.3.2 Uses 203 6.2.3.3 Chemical Properties 204 6.2.3.4 Physical Properties 205 6.2.3.5 Production Methods 206 6.3 Materials and Methods 209 6.3.1 Feedstock, Chemicals and Reagents 209 6.3.2 Equipment 209 6.3.3 Experimental and Procedure 209 6.3.3.1 Thermal Treatment 209 6.3.3.2 OLI Simulations and Beaker Studies 209 6.3.3.3 Na2S Formation 209 6.3.3.4 Ca(HS)2 Formation 209 6.3.3.5 Nano CaCO3 Formation 210 6.3.4 Analysis 210 6.3.5 OLI Software Simulations 210 6.4 Results and Discussion 211 6.4.1 Direct Conversion of Na2SO4 to Na2S 211 6.4.2 CaSO4 Reduction 212 6.4.2.1 CaS Formation 212 6.4.2.2 Ca(HS)2 Formation 213 6.4.3 Na2CO3 Production 213 6.4.3.1 Indirect Conversion of Na2SO4 to Na2S 213 6.4.3.2 NaHCO3 Formation 222 6.4.3.3 NaHCO3 and NaHS Separation 222 6.4.3.4 Na2CO3 Formation 225 6.4.3.5 Up-Concentration of NaHS (Freeze Crystallization) 225 6.4.4 CaCO3 Formation 225 6.4.4.1 Crude and Pure CaCO3 and Ca(HS)2 Formation 225 6.4.4.2 Nano CaCO3 Formation 230 6.5 Conclusions 232 Acknowledgments 232 References 232 7 Recovery of Drinking Water and Nanosized Fe2O3 Pigment from Iron Rich Acid Mine Water 237Tumelo Monty Mogashane, Johannes Philippus Maree, Leny Letjiane, Vhahangwele Masindi, Kwena Desmomd Modibane, Munyaradzi Mujuru and Mabel Mamasegare Mphahlele-Makgwane 7.1 Introduction 238 7.1.1 Formation and Quantities 238 7.1.2 Legal Requirements 238 7.1.3 ROC Process 239 7.1.4 Raw Material Manufacturing 241 7.1.5 Objectives 243 7.2 Literature Review 243 7.2.1 Uses of Nanopigment 243 7.2.2 Production of Nanopigment 244 7.2.3 Market for Nanopigment 246 7.3 Materials and Methods 247 7.3.1 Neutralization 247 7.3.1.1 Feedstock 247 7.3.1.2 Equipment 248 7.3.1.3 Procedure 248 7.3.1.4 Experimental 249 7.3.1.5 Analytical 249 7.3.1.6 Characterization 249 7.3.2 Coagulation 250 7.3.2.1 Feedstock 250 7.3.2.2 Equipment 250 7.3.2.3 Procedure 250 7.3.2.4 Experimental 250 7.3.3 Pigment Formation 250 7.3.3.1 Feedstock 250 7.3.3.2 Equipment 250 7.3.3.3 Procedure 252 7.3.3.4 Experimental 252 7.3.3.5 Characterization of the Sludge 252 7.4 Results and Discussion 253 7.4.1 Neutralization with MgO and Na2CO3 253 7.4.1.1 Solubilities of Alkalis and Products 254 7.4.1.2 Sludge Characteristics 256 7.4.1.3 Flocculant/Coagulant Selection and Dosing 259 7.4.1.4 Centrifugation 260 7.4.2 Concentration of Acid Mine Water 260 7.4.2.1 Freeze Crystallization 261 7.4.2.2 Forward Osmosis 262 7.4.2.3 Feasibility of Forward Osmosis and Freeze Desalination 263 7.4.3 Pigment Formation 263 7.4.3.1 Effect of Temperature 263 7.4.3.2 Elemental Composition of Feed and Product Mineral 264 7.4.3.3 Morphological Characteristics of the Synthesized Pigments 265 7.4.4 Process Configurations 268 7.4.4.1 Iron(III)-Rich Water (Kopseer Dam) (Process Configuration A) 268 7.4.4.2 Iron(II)-Rich Water (Top Dam) (Process Configuration B) 269 7.4.4.3 Tailings and Tailings Leachate 269 7.4.5 Economic Feasibility 272 7.5 Conclusion 283 7.6 Recommendation 284 Acknowledgments 284 References 285 8 Advances of Nanotechnology Applications in Mineral Froth Flotation Technology 289Madzokere Tatenda Crispen, Nheta Willie and Gumbochuma Sheunopa Abbreviations 290 8.1 Introduction to Froth Flotation 290 8.2 Current Developments of Nanotechnology in the Mineral Froth Flotation Process 291 8.2.1 Nanobubbles in Mineral Froth Flotation 291 8.2.1.1 Generation and Conditions of Nanobubble Formation 292 8.2.1.2 Properties and Stability of Nanobubbles 293 8.2.2 General Overview of Applications of Nanobubbles in Mineral Froth Flotation and Recovery of Selected Minerals 294 8.2.2.1 Flotation of Fine and Ultrafine Mineral Particles Using Nanobubbles 295 8.2.2.2 Flotation of Coal Using Nanobubbles 296 8.2.2.3 Flotation of Phosphate Ore Using Nanobubbles 298 8.2.2.4 Interactive Relationship Between Nanobubbles, Collectors and Mineral Particles 299 8.2.3 Nanofrothers in Mineral Froth Flotation 301 8.2.4 Nanocollectors in Mineral Froth Flotation 303 8.2.4.1 Nanopolystyrene Collector 303 8.2.4.2 Cellulose-Based Nanocrystals Collector 307 8.2.4.3 Carbon Black and Talc Nanoparticle Collectors 313 8.2.5 Nanodepressants in Mineral Froth Flotation 315 8.3 Intellectual Property (IP) and Commercialization of Nanotechnology in Mineral Froth Flotation Technology 319 8.4 Current Research Gaps 319 8.5 Conclusion 320 References 320 9 Nanoscale Materials for Mineral Froth Flotation: Synthesis and Implications of Nanoscale Material Design Strategies on Flotation Performance 327n, Gumbochuma Sheunopa, Mudono Stanford and Mamuse Antony 9.1 Introduction 328 9.2 Classification of Minerals 329 9.2.1 Chemical Classification of Minerals 330 9.3 Synthesis and Characterization of Nanoscale Materials 337 9.3.1 Top-Down Synthesis Approach 337 9.3.2 Bottom-Up Synthesis Approach 337 9.3.3 Characterization of Nanomaterials 338 9.3.4 Effect of Nanoparticle Size, Morphology and Structure on Flotation Performance 340 9.4 Nanoflotation Reagents and Mineral Particle Interaction in the Flotation Environment 340 9.4.1 Effect of Mineral Surface Properties on Recovery 343 9.4.1.1 Potential Strategies of Evaluating Surface Properties 344 9.4.1.2 Effect of Mineral Surface Electric Charge and Microstructure on Flotation and Potential Techniques for Tailoring Nanocollector Hydrophobicity 346 9.5 Nanotoxicology 347 9.6 Conclusion 348 References 348 Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisINTEGRATION OF MECHANICAL AND MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING WITH IOT The book provides researchers, professionals, and students with a resource on the basic principles of IoT and its applications, as well as a guide to practicing engineers who want to understand how the Internet of Things can be implemented for different fields of mechanical and manufacturing engineering. This book broadly explores the latest developments of IoT and its integration into mechanical and manufacturing engineering. It details the fundamental concepts and recent developments in IoT & Industry 4.0 with special emphasis on the mechanical engineering platform for such issues as product development and manufacturing, environmental monitoring, automotive applications, energy management, and renewable energy sectors. Topics and related concepts are portrayed comprehensively so that readers can develop expertise and knowledge in the field of IoT. It is packed with reference tables and schematic diaTable of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Evolution of Internet of Things (IoT): Past, Present and Future for Manufacturing Systems 1 Vaishnavi Vadivelu, Moganapriya Chinnasamy, Manivannan Rajendran, Hari Chandrasekaran and Rajasekar Rathanasamy 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 IoT Revolution 2 1.3 IoT 4 1.4 Fundamental Technologies 5 1.4.1 RFID and NFC 5 1.4.2 Wsn 6 1.4.3 Data Storage and Analytics (DSA) 6 1.5 IoT Architecture 6 1.6 Cloud Computing (CC) and IoT 7 1.6.1 Service of cc 8 1.6.2 Integration of IoT With cc 10 1.7 Edge Computing (EC) and IoT 10 1.7.1 EC with IoT Architecture 11 1.8 Applications of IoT 12 1.8.1 Smart Mobility 12 1.8.2 Smart Grid 14 1.8.3 Smart Home System 14 1.8.4 Public Safety and Environment Monitoring 15 1.8.5 Smart Healthcare Systems 15 1.8.6 Smart Agriculture System 16 1.9 Industry 4.0 Integrated With IoT Architecture for Incorporation of Designing and Enhanced Production Systems 17 1.9.1 Five-Stage Process of IoT for Design and Manufacturing System 19 1.9.2 IoT Architecture for Advanced Manufacturing Technologies 21 1.9.3 Architecture Development 22 1.10 Current Issues and Challenges in IoT 24 1.10.1 Scalability 25 1.10.2 Issue of Trust 25 1.10.3 Service Availability 26 1.10.4 Security Challenges 26 1.10.5 Mobility Issues 27 1.10.6 Architecture for IoT 27 1.11 Conclusion 28 References 29 2 Fourth Industrial Revolution: Industry 4.0 41 Maheswari Rajamanickam, Elizabeth Nirmala John Gerard Royan, Gowtham Ramaswamy, Manivannan Rajendran and Vaishnavi Vadivelu 2.1 Introduction 42 2.1.1 Global Level Adaption 42 2.2 Evolution of Industry 44 2.2.1 Industry 1.0 44 2.2.2 Industry 2.0 44 2.2.3 Industry 3.0 44 2.2.4 Industry 4.0 (or) I4. 0 44 2.3 Basic IoT Concepts and the Term Glossary 45 2.4 Industrial Revolution 47 2.4.1 I4.0 Core Idea 47 2.4.2 Origin of I4.0 Concept 48 2.5 Industry 49 2.5.1 Manufacturing Phases 49 2.5.2 Existing Process Planning vs. I4. 0 50 2.5.3 Software for Product Planning—A Link Between Smart Products and the Main System ERP 52 2.6 Industry Production System 4.0 (Smart Factory) 56 2.6.1 IT Support 58 2.7 I4.0 in Functional Field 60 2.7.1 I4.0 Logistics 60 2.7.2 Resource Planning 60 2.7.3 Systems for Warehouse Management 61 2.7.4 Transportation Management Systems 61 2.7.5 Transportation Systems with Intelligence 63 2.7.6 Information Security 64 2.8 Existing Technology in I4. 0 65 2.8.1 Applications of I4.0 in Existing Industries 65 2.8.2 Additive Manufacturing (AM) 66 2.8.3 Intelligent Machines 66 2.8.4 Robots that are Self-Aware 66 2.8.5 Materials that are Smart 67 2.8.6 IoT 67 2.8.7 The Internet of Things in Industry (IIoT) 67 2.8.8 Sensors that are Smart 67 2.8.9 System Using a Smart Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 67 2.8.10 Software 68 2.8.11 Augmented Reality (AR)/Virtual Reality (VR) 68 2.8.12 Gateway for the Internet of Things 68 2.8.13 Cloud 68 2.8.14 Applications of Additive Manufacturing in I4. 0 68 2.8.15 Artificial Intelligence (AI) 69 2.9 Applications in Current Industries 69 2.9.1 I4.0 in Logistics 69 2.9.2 I4.0 in Manufacturing Operation 70 2.10 Future Scope of Research 73 2.10.1 Theoretical Framework of I4. 0 73 2.11 Discussion and Implications 75 2.11.1 Hosting: Microsoft 75 2.11.2 Platform for the Internet of Things (IoT): Microsoft, GE, PTC, and Siemens 76 2.11.3 A Systematic Computational Analysis 76 2.11.4 Festo Proximity Sensor 77 2.11.5 Connectivity Hardware: HMS 77 2.11.6 IT Security: Claroty 77 2.11.7 Accenture Is a Systems Integrator 77 2.11.8 Additive Manufacturing: General Electric 78 2.11.9 Augmented and Virtual Reality: Upskill 78 2.11.10 ABB Collaborative Robots 78 2.11.11 Connected Vision System: Cognex 78 2.11.12 Drones/UAVs: PINC 79 2.11.13 Self-Driving in Vehicles: Clear Path Robotics 79 2.12 Conclusion 79 References 80 3 Interaction of Internet of Things and Sensors for Machining 85 Manivannan Rajendran, Kamesh Nagarajan, Vaishnavi Vadivelu, Harikrishna Kumar Mohankumar and Sathish Kumar Palaniappan 3.1 Introduction 86 3.2 Various Sensors Involved in Machining Process 88 3.2.1 Direct Method Sensors 89 3.2.2 Indirect Method Sensors 89 3.2.3 Dynamometer 90 3.2.4 Accelerometer 91 3.2.5 Acoustic Emission Sensor 93 3.2.6 Current Sensors 94 3.3 Other Sensors 94 3.3.1 Temperature Sensors 94 3.3.2 Optical Sensors 95 3.4 Interaction of Sensors During Machining Operation 96 3.4.1 Milling Machining 96 3.4.2 Turning Machining 97 3.4.3 Drilling Machining Operation 98 3.5 Sensor Fusion Technique 99 3.6 Interaction of Internet of Things 100 3.6.1 Identification 100 3.6.2 Sensing 101 3.6.3 Communication 101 3.6.4 Computation 101 3.6.5 Services 101 3.6.6 Semantics 101 3.7 IoT Technologies in Manufacturing Process 102 3.7.1 IoT Challenges 102 3.7.2 IoT-Based Energy Monitoring System 102 3.8 Industrial Application 104 3.8.1 Integrated Structure 104 3.8.2 Monitoring the System Related to Service Based on Internet of Things 106 3.9 Decision Making Methods 107 3.9.1 Artificial Neural Network 107 3.9.2 Fuzzy Inference System 108 3.9.3 Support Vector Mechanism 108 3.9.4 Decision Trees and Random Forest 109 3.9.5 Convolutional Neural Network 109 3.10 Conclusion 111 References 111 4 Application of Internet of Things (IoT) in the Automotive Industry 115 Solomon Jenoris Muthiya, Shridhar Anaimuthu, Joshuva Arockia Dhanraj, Nandakumar Selvaraju, Gutha Manikanta and C. Dineshkumar 4.1 Introduction 116 4.2 Need For IoT in Automobile Field 118 4.3 Fault Diagnosis in Automobile 119 4.4 Automobile Security and Surveillance System in IoT-Based 123 4.5 A Vehicle Communications 125 4.6 The Smart Vehicle 126 4.7 Connected Vehicles 128 4.7.1 Vehicle-to-Vehicle (V2V) Communications 130 4.7.2 Vehicle-to-Infrastructure (V2I) Communications 131 4.7.3 Vehicle-to-Pedestrian (V2P) Communications 132 4.7.4 Vehicle to Network (V2N) Communication 133 4.7.5 Vehicle to Cloud (V2C) Communication 134 4.7.6 Vehicle to Device (V2D) Communication 134 4.7.7 Vehicle to Grid (V2G) Communications 135 4.8 Conclusion 135 References 136 5 IoT for Food and Beverage Manufacturing 141 Manju Sri Anbupalani, Gobinath Velu Kaliyannan and Santhosh Sivaraj 5.1 Introduction 142 5.2 The Influence of IoT in a Food Industry 143 5.2.1 Management 143 5.2.2 Workers 143 5.2.3 Data 143 5.2.4 It 143 5.3 A Brief Review of IoT’s Involvement in the Food Industry 144 5.4 Challenges to the Food Industry and Role of IoT 144 5.4.1 Handling and Sorting Complex Data 144 5.4.2 A Retiring Skilled Workforce 145 5.4.3 Alternatives for Supply Chain Management 145 5.4.4 Implementation of IoT in Food and Beverage Manufacturing 145 5.4.5 Pilot 145 5.4.6 Plan 146 5.4.7 Proliferate 146 5.5 Applications of IoT in a Food Industry 146 5.5.1 IoT for Handling of Raw Material and Inventory Control 146 5.5.2 Factory Operations and Machine Conditions Using IoT 146 5.5.3 Quality Control With the IoT 147 5.5.4 IoT for Safety 147 5.5.5 The Internet of Things and Sustainability 147 5.5.6 IoT for Product Delivery and Packaging 147 5.5.7 IoT for Vehicle Optimization 147 5.5.8 IoT-Based Water Monitoring Architecture in the Food and Beverage Industry 148 5.6 A FW Tracking System Methodology Based on IoT 150 5.7 Designing an IoT-Based Digital FW Monitoring and Tracking System 150 5.8 The Internet of Things (IoT) Architecture for a Digitized Food Waste System 152 5.9 Hardware Design: Intelligent Scale 152 5.10 Software Design 153 References 157 6 Opportunities: Machine Learning for Industrial IoT Applications 159 Poongodi C., Sayeekumar M., Meenakshi C. and Hari Prasath K. 6.1 Introduction 160 6.2 I-IoT Applications 163 6.3 Machine Learning Algorithms for Industrial IoT 170 6.3.1 Supervised Learning 171 6.3.2 Semisupervised Learning 173 6.3.3 Unsupervised Learning 173 6.3.4 Reinforcement Learning 175 6.3.5 The Most Common and Popular Machine Learning Algorithms 176 6.4 I-IoT Data Analytics 177 6.4.1 Tools for IoT Analytics 177 6.4.2 Choosing the Right IoT Data Analytics Platforms 184 6.5 Conclusion 185 References 186 7 Role of IoT in Industry Predictive Maintenance 191 Gobinath Velu Kaliyannan, Manju Sri Anbupalani, Suganeswaran Kandasamy, Santhosh Sivaraj and Raja Gunasekaran 7.1 Introduction 192 7.2 Predictive Maintenance 194 7.3 IPdM Systems Framework and Few Key Methodologies 196 7.3.1 Detection and Collection of Data 196 7.3.2 Initial Processing of Collected Data 196 7.3.3 Modeling as Per Requirement 197 7.3.4 Influential Parameters 198 7.3.5 Identification of Best Working Path 198 7.3.6 Modifying Output with Respect Sensed Input 198 7.4 Economics of PdM 198 7.5 PdM for Production and Product 200 7.6 Implementation of IPdM 202 7.6.1 Manufacturing with Zero Defects 202 7.6.2 Sense of the Windsene INDSENSE 202 7.7 Case Studies 202 7.7.1 Area 1—Heavy Ash Evacuation 203 7.7.2 Area 2—Seawater Pumps 203 7.7.3 Evaporators 204 7.7.4 System Deployment Considerations in General 205 7.8 Automotive Industry—Integrated IoT 205 7.8.1 Navigation Aspect 205 7.8.2 Continual Working of Toll Booth 206 7.8.3 Theft Security System 206 7.8.4 Black Box–Enabled IoT 206 7.8.5 Regularizing Motion of Emergency Vehicle 207 7.8.6 Pollution Monitoring System 207 7.8.7 Timely Assessment of Driver’s Condition 207 7.8.8 Vehicle Performance Monitoring 207 7.9 Conclusion 208 References 208 8 Role of IoT in Product Development 215 Bhuvanesh Kumar M., Balaji N. S., Senthil S. M. and Sathiya P. 8.1 Introduction 216 8.1.1 Industry 4.0 217 8.2 Need to Understand the Product Architecture 220 8.3 Product Development Process 222 8.3.1 Criteria to Classify the New Products 223 8.3.2 Product Configuration 224 8.3.3 Challenges in Product Development while Developing IoT Products (Data-Driven Product Development) 225 8.3.4 Role of IoT in Product Development for Industrial Applications 226 8.3.5 Impacts and Future Perspectives of IoT in Product Development 229 8.4 Conclusion 231 References 232 9 Benefits of IoT in Automated Systems 235 Adithya K. and Girimurugan R. 9.1 Introduction 235 9.2 Benefits of Automation 236 9.2.1 Improved Productivity 236 9.2.2 Efficient Operation Management 236 9.2.3 Better Use of Resources 237 9.2.4 Cost-Effective Operation 237 9.2.5 Improved Work Safety 237 9.2.6 Software Bots 237 9.2.7 Enhanced Public Sector Operations 237 9.2.8 Healthcare Benefits 238 9.3 Smart City Automation 238 9.3.1 Smart Agriculture 240 9.3.2 Smart City Services 240 9.3.3 Smart Energy 240 9.3.4 Smart Health 241 9.3.5 Smart Home 241 9.3.6 Smart Industry 242 9.3.7 Smart Infrastructure 242 9.3.8 Smart Transport 242 9.4 Smart Home Automation 243 9.5 Automation in Manufacturing 247 9.5.1 IoT Manufacturing Use Cases 249 9.5.2 Foundation for IoT in Manufacturing 251 9.6 Healthcare Automation 253 9.6.1 IoT in Healthcare Applications 254 9.6.2 Architecture for IoT-Healthcare Applications 257 9.6.3 Challenges and Solutions 258 9.7 Industrial Automation 259 9.7.1 IoT in Industrial Automation 260 9.7.2 The Essentials of an Industrial IoT Solution 260 9.7.3 Practical Industrial IoT Examples for Daily Use 261 9.8 Automation in Air Pollution Monitoring 265 9.8.1 Methodology 266 9.8.2 Working Principle 267 9.8.3 Results 267 9.9 Irrigation Automation 268 References 269 10 Integration of IoT in Energy Management 271 Ganesh Angappan, Santhosh Sivaraj, Premkumar Bhuvaneshwaran, Mugilan Thanigachalam, Sarath Sekar and Rajasekar Rathanasamy 10.1 Introduction 272 10.2 Energy Management Integration with IoT in Industry 4.0 274 10.3 IoT in Energy Sector 276 10.3.1 Energy Generation 276 10.3.2 Smart Cities 277 10.3.3 Smart Grid 277 10.3.4 Smart Buildings 278 10.3.5 IoT in the Energy Industry 279 10.3.6 Intelligent Transportation 280 10.4 Provocations in the IoT Applications 281 10.4.1 Energy Consumption 281 10.4.2 Subsystems and IoT Integration 282 10.5 Energy Generation 284 10.5.1 Conversion of Mechanical Energy 285 10.5.2 Aeroelastic Energy Harvesting 290 10.5.3 Solar Energy Harvesting 292 10.5.4 Sound Energy Harvesting 292 10.5.5 Wind Energy Harvesting 292 10.5.6 Radiofrequency Energy Harvesting 293 10.5.7 Thermal Energy 293 10.6 Conclusion 294 References 294 11 Role of IoT in the Renewable Energy Sector 305 Veerakumar Chinnasamy and Honghyun Cho 11.1 Introduction 305 11.2 Internet of Things (IoT) 306 11.3 IoT in the Renewable Energy Sector 307 11.3.1 Automation of Energy Generation 307 11.3.2 Smart Grids 309 11.3.3 IoT Increases the Renewable Energy Use 312 11.3.4 Consumer Contribution 312 11.3.5 Balancing Supply and Demand 313 11.3.6 Smart Buildings 313 11.3.7 Smart Cities 314 11.3.8 Cost-Effectiveness 314 11.4 Data Analytics 314 11.4.1 Data Forecasting 314 11.4.2 Safety and Reliability 315 11.5 Conclusion 315 References 315 Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisMETAL OXIDE NANOCOMPOSITE THIN FILMS FOR OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICE APPLICATIONS The book provides insight into the fundamental aspects, latest research, synthesis route development, preparation, and future applications of metal oxide nanocomposite thin films. The fabrication of thin film-based materials is important to the future production of safe, efficient, and affordable energy as the devices convert sunlight into electricity. Thin film devices allow excellent interface engineering for high-performance printable solar cells as their structures are highly reliable and stand-alone systems can provide the required megawatts. They have been used as power sources in solar home systems, remote buildings, water pumping, megawatt-scale power plants, satellites, communications, and space vehicles. Metal Oxide Nanocomposite Thin Films for Optoelectronic Device Applications covers the basics of advanced nanometal oxide-based materials, their synthesis, characTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part I: Nanotechnology 1 1 Synthesis and Characterization of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles / Nanocrystalline Thin Films for Photovoltaic Application 3Santosh Singh Golia, Chandni Puri, Rayees Ahmad Zargar and Manju Arora 1.1 Present Status of Power Generation Capacity and Target in India 4 1.2 Importance of Solar Energy 4 1.3 Evolution in Photovoltaic Cells and their Generations 6 1.4 Role of Nanostructured Metal Oxides in Production, Conversion, and Storage in Harvesting Renewable Energy 12 1.5 Synthesis of Nanostructured Metal Oxides for Photovoltaic Cell Application 13 1.6 Characterization of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles/Thin Films 31 1.7 Conclusion and Future Aspects 32 2 Experimental Realization of Zinc Oxide: A Comparison Between Nano and Micro-Film 45Rayees Ahmad Zargar, Shabir Ahmad Bhat, Muzaffar Iqbal Khan, Majid Ul Islam, Imran Ahmed and Mohd Shkir 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 Approaches to Nanotechnology 46 2.3 Wide Band Semiconductors 48 2.4 Zinc Oxide (ZnO) 48 2.5 Properties of Zinc Oxide 50 2.6 Thin Film Deposition Techniques 52 2.7 Procedure of Experimental Work 53 2.8 Calculation of Thickness of Thin ZnO Films 54 2.9 Structural Analysis 54 2.10 Optical Characterization 56 2.11 Electrical Characterization 60 2.12 Applications of Zinc Oxide 62 2.13 Conclusions and Future Work 63 3 Luminescent Nanocrystalline Metal Oxides: Synthesis, Applications, and Future Challenges 65Chandni Puri, Balwinder Kaur, Santosh Singh Golia, Rayees Ahmad Zargar and Manju Arora 3.1 Introduction 66 3.2 Different Types of Luminescence 67 3.3 Luminescence Mechanism in Nanomaterials 73 3.4 Luminescent Nanomaterials Characteristic Properties 74 3.5 Synthesis and Shape Control Methods for Luminescent Metal Oxide Nanomaterials 75 3.6 Characterization of Nanocrystalline Luminescent Metal Oxides 86 3.7 Applications of Nanocrystalline Luminescent Metal Oxides 87 3.8 Conclusion and Future Aspects of Nanocrystalline Luminescent Metal Oxides 88 4 Status, Challenges and Bright Future of Nanocomposite Metal Oxide for Optoelectronic Device Applications 101Ajay Singh, Sunil Sambyal, Vishal Singh, Balwinder Kaur and Archana Sharma 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Synthesis of Nanocomposite Metal Oxide by Physical and Chemical Routes 105 4.3 Characterization Techniques Used for Metal Oxide Optoelectronics 109 4.4 Optoelectronic Devices Based on MOs Nanocomposites 111 4.5 Advantages of Pure/Doped Metal Oxides Used in Optoelectronic Device Fabrication 117 4.6 Parameters Required for Optoelectronic Devices Applications 118 4.7 Conclusion and Future Perspective of Metal Oxides-Based Optoelectronic Devices 119 Part II: Thin Film Technology 129 5 Semiconductor Metal Oxide Thin Films: An Overview 131Krishna Kumari Swain, Pravat Manjari Mishra and Bijay Kumar Behera 5.1 Introduction 132 5.1.1 An Introduction to Semiconducting Metal Oxide 133 5.1.2 Properties of Semiconducting Metal Oxide 134 5.1.3 Semiconducting Metal Oxide Thin Films 135 5.1.4 Thin Films Deposition Method 135 5.1.5 Application of Semiconducting Metal Oxide Thin Films 148 5.1.6 Limitations of Semiconductor Thin Films 149 5.2 Conclusion and Outlook 150 6 Thin Film Fabrication Techniques 155Lankipalli Krishna Sai, Krishna Kumari Swain and Sunil Kumar Pradhan 6.1 Introduction 156 6.2 Thin Film - Types and Their Application 157 6.3 Classification of Thin-Film Fabrication Techniques 157 6.4 Methodology 159 6.5 Advantages of CVD Process 173 6.6 Comparison Between PVD and CVD 174 6.7 Conclusion 174 7 Printable Photovoltaic Solar Cells 179Tuiba Mearaj, Faisal Bashir, Rayees Ahmad Zargar, Santosh Chacrabarti and Aurangzeb Khurrem Hafiz 7.1 Introduction 179 7.2 Working Principle of Printable Solar Cells 180 7.3 Wide Band Gap Semiconductors 181 7.4 Metal Oxide-Based Printable Solar Cell 184 7.5 What is Thick Film, Its Technology with Advantages 186 7.6 To Select Suitable Technology for Film Deposition by Considering the Economy, Flexibility, Reliability, and Performance Aspects 188 7.7 Procedures for Firing 191 7.8 Deposition of Thin Film Layers via Solution-Based Process 193 8 Response of Metal Oxide Thin Films Under Laser Irradiation 203Rayees Ahmad Zargar 8.1 Introduction 203 8.2 Interaction of Laser with Material 205 8.3 Radiation Causes Modification 206 8.4 Application Laser Irradiated Films 207 8.5 Wavelength Range of Radiation 208 8.6 Laser Irradiation Mechanism 209 8.7 Experimental Procedure 211 Part III: Photovoltaic and Storage Devices 221 9 Basic Physics and Design of Photovoltaic Devices 223Rayees Ahmad Zargar, Muzaffar Iqbal Khan, Yasar Arfat, Vipin Kumar and Joginder Singh 9.1 Introduction: Solar Cell 224 9.2 Semiconductor Physics 225 9.3 Carrier Concentrations in Equilibrium 227 9.4 p-n Junction Formation 229 9.5 Process of Carrier Production and Recombination 229 9.6 Equations for Poisson’s and Continuity Equation 230 9.7 Photovoltaic (Solar Power) Systems 231 9.8 Types of Photovoltaic Installations and Technology 232 9.9 Electrical Characteristics Parameters 233 9.10 Basic p-n Junction Diode Parameters 236 9.11 Conclusion 237 10 Measurement and Characterization of Photovoltaic Devices 239Saleem Khan, Vaishali Misra, Ayesha Bhandri and Suresh Kumar 10.1 Introduction 240 10.2 Electrical and Optical Measurements 242 10.3 Current-Voltage (I-V) Characterization 242 10.4 Quantum Efficiency 246 10.5 Hall Effect Measurements 248 10.6 Photoluminescence Spectroscopy and Imaging 252 10.7 Electroluminescence Spectroscopy and Imaging 254 10.8 Light Beam Induced Current Technique (LBIC) 255 10.9 Electron Impedance Spectroscopy (EIS) 255 10.10 Characterization by Ellipsometry Spectroscopy 257 10.11 Conclusion 258 11 Theoretical and Experimental Results of Nanomaterial Thin Films for Solar Cell Applications 263Muzaffar Iqbal Khan, Rayees Ahmad Zargar, Showkat Ahmad Dar and Trilok Chandra Upadhyay 11.1 Introduction 263 11.2 Literature Survey 266 11.3 Theoretical and Experimental Results 277 11.4 Experimental Results of Optical Properties 282 11.5 Conclusions 285 12 Metal Oxide-Based Light-Emitting Diodes 295Shabir Ahmad Bhat, Sneha Wankar, Jyoti Rawat and Rayees Ahmad Zargar 12.1 Introduction 296 12.2 Structure of LEDs 297 12.3 Working Principle of LEDs 298 12.4 Selection of Material for Construction of LEDs 299 12.5 Basic Terminology Involved in Fabrication of LEDs 300 12.6 LEDs Based on ZnO (Zinc Oxide) 302 12.7 Transition Metal Oxide-Based LEDs 307 12.8 Lanthanide-Based OLEDs 310 12.9 Conclusion 312 13 Metal Oxide Nanocomposite Thin Films: Optical and Electrical Characterization 317Santosh Chackrabarti, Rayees Ahmad Zargar, Tuiba Mearaj and Aurangzeb Khurram Hafiz 13.1 Introduction 318 13.2 Nanocomposite Thin Films (NCTFs) 320 13.3 Materials Used for Preparation of NCTFs 320 13.4 Methods of Preparation of NCTFs 328 13.5 Applications 331 13.6 Examples 332 13.7 Laser Irradiation Sources 333 13.8 Functional Characterization Techniques 336 13.9 Conclusion 341 14 Manganese Dioxide as a Supercapacitor Material 361Mudasir Hussain Rather, Feroz A. Mir, Peerzada Ajaz Ahmad, Rayaz Ahmad and Kaneez Zainab 14.1 Introduction 362 14.2 Supercapacitor Components 366 14.3 Methods for MnO2 Nanoparticles 369 14.4 Doped-MnO2 Materials 372 14.5 MnO2 with Polymer Composites 378 14.6 Nanocomposites 381 14.7 Conclusion 384 References 386 Index 399

Read more less

Book SynopsisBIOMASS-BASED SUPERCAPACITORS Authoritative resource addressing the fundamentals, design, manufacturing, and industrial applications of supercapacitors based on biomass Biomass-Based Supercapacitors presents a systematic overview and recent developments in the research, design, and fabrication of supercapacitors using biomass, discussing fundamentals, advancements, industrial applications, and the manufacturing process of biomass-derived supercapacitors. The text also considers environmental and economic aspects of the technology, along with biomass-based supercapacitors in the context of circular economy. Written by a team of international experts in the field of supercapacitors, Biomass-Based Supercapacitors covers sample topics such as: Basic foundational knowledge surrounding supercapacitors, electrochemical techniques for supercapacitors, and different types of supercapacitors Biomass derived electrode materials for supercapaciTable of ContentsAbout the Editors ix Preface xi List of Contributors xiii Part 1 Biomass 1 1 Introduction to Biomass 3Md. Almujaddade Alfasane, Ashika Akhtar, Nasrin Siraj Lopa, and Md. Mahbubur Rahman 2 Environmental Aspects of Biomass Utilization in Supercapacitors 23Runa Akter, Jaber Bin Abdul Bari, Saidur R. Chowdhury, Muhammad Muhitur Rahman, and Syed Masiur Rahman 3 Biomass Utilization in Supercapacitors for the Circular Economy 41Runa Akter, Md. Raquibul Hassan Bhuiyan, Saidur R. Chowdhury, Muhammad Muhitur Rahman, and Syed Masiur Rahman Part 2 Fundamentals of Supercapacitors 61 4 Introduction to Supercapacitors 63Syed Shaheen Shah, Mohammad Rezaul Karim, Md. Abdul Wahab, Muhammad Ali Ehsan, and Md. Abdul Aziz 5 Electrochemical Techniques for Supercapacitors 81Syed Shaheen Shah, Md Abdul Aziz, and Munetaka Oyama 6 Types of Supercapacitors 93Syed Shaheen Shah, Md. Abdul Aziz, Wael Mahfoz, and Md. Akhtaruzzaman Part 3 Biomass Derived Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors 105 7 Non-activated Carbon for Supercapacitor Electrodes 107Md. Akib Hasan, Mohammad Anikur Rahman, and Md. Mominul Islam 8 Carbon from Pre-Treated Biomass 121Syeda Ramsha Ali, Mian Muhammad Faisal, and K.C. Sanal 9 Carbonate Salts-activated Carbon 143Syed Shaheen Shah , Md. Abdul Aziz , Laiq Zada, Haroon Ur Rahman, Falak Niaz, and Khizar Hayat 10 KOH/NaOH-activated Carbon 161Nasrin Siraj Lopa, Biswa Nath Bhadra, Nazmul Abedin Khan, Serge Zhuiykov, and Md. Mahbubur Rahman 11 Chloride Salt-activated Carbon for Supercapacitors 179Eman Gul, Syed Adil Shah, and Syed Niaz Ali Shah 12 CO2-activated Carbon 201Salman Farsi, Thuhin Kumar Dey, Mushfiqur Rahman, and Mamun Jamal 13 Steam-activated Carbon for Supercapacitors 213Madhusudan Roy and Hasi Rani Barai 14 Biomass-Derived Hard Carbon for Supercapacitors 237Himadri Tanaya Das, Swapnamoy Dutta, Muhammad Usman, T. Elango Balaji, and Nigamananda Das 15 Carbon Nanofibers 249Nasrin Sultana, Ahtisham Anjum, S. M. Abu Nayem, Syed Shaheen Shah, Md. Hasan Zahir , A. J. Saleh Ahammad, and Md. Abdul Aziz 16 Biomass-Derived Graphene-Based Supercapacitors 269Nafeesa Sarfraz, Ibrahim Khan, and Abdulmajeed H. Hendi 17 Biomass-derived N-doped Carbon for Electrochemical Supercapacitors 289Syed Niaz Ali Shah, Eman Gul, Narayan Chandra Deb Nath, and Guodong Du 18 Biomass Based S-doped Carbon for Supercapacitor Application 315S. M. Abu Nayem, Santa Islam, Syed Shaheen Shah, Nasrin Sultana, Wael Mahfoz, A. J. Saleh Ahammad, and Md. Abdul Aziz 19 Biomass-derived Carbon and Metal Oxides Composites for Supercapacitors 329Muhammad Ammar, Himadri Tanaya Das, Awais Ali, Sami Ullah, Abuzar Khan, Abbas Saeed Hakeem, Naseem Iqbal, Muhammad Humayun, Muhammad Zahir Iqbal, and Muhammad Usman 20 Composites of Biomass-derived Materials and Conducting Polymers 347Wael Mahfoz, Abubakar Dahiru Shuaibu, Syed Shaheen Shah, Md. Abdul Aziz, and Abdul-Rahman Al-Betar 21 Composite of Biomass-derived Material and Conductive Material Excluding Conducting Polymer Material 367Nasrin Sultana, Ahmar Ali, S. M. Abu Nayem, Syed Shaheen Shah, Md. Hasan Zahir, A. J. Saleh Ahammad, and Md. Abdul Aziz Part 4 Binding Materials, Electrolytes, Separators, and Packaging Materials from Biomass for Supercapacitors 383 22 Biomass-based Electrolytes for Supercapacitor Applications 385S. M. Abu Nayem, Santa Islam, Syed Shaheen Shah, Nasrin Sultana, M. Nasiruzzaman Shaikh, Md. Abdul Aziz, and A. J. Saleh Ahammad 23 Biomass-based Separators for Supercapacitor Applications 403S. M. Abu Nayem, Santa Islam, Syed Shaheen Shah, Abdul Awal, Nasrin Sultana, A. J. Saleh Ahammad, and Md. Abdul Aziz 24 Binding Agents and Packaging Materials of Supercapacitors from Biomass 417Md. Mehedi Hasan and Md. Rajibul Akanda Part 5 Biomass-Based Supercapacitors: Future Outlooks and Challenges 435 25 Biomass-based Supercapacitors: Lab to Industry 437Syed Shaheen Shah, Md. Abdul Aziz, Muhammad Usman, Abbas Saeed Hakeem, Shahid Ali, and Atif Saeed Alzahrani 26 Future Directions and Challenges in Biomass-Based Supercapacitors 461Syed Shaheen Shah, Md. Abdul Aziz, Muhammad Ali, Muhammad Usman, Sikandar Khan, Farrukh Shehzad, Syed Niaz Ali Shah, and Sami Ullah Index 485

Read more less

Book SynopsisAUTONOMOUS VEHICLES Addressing the current challenges, approaches and applications relating to autonomous vehicles, this groundbreaking new volume presents the research and techniques in this growing area, using Internet of Things (IoT), Machine Learning (ML), Deep Learning, and Artificial Intelligence (AI). This book provides and addresses the current challenges, approaches, and applications relating to autonomous vehicles, using Internet of Things (IoT), machine learning, deep learning, and Artificial Intelligence (AI) techniques. Several self-driving or autonomous (driverless) cars, trucks, and drones incorporate a variety of IoT devices and sensing technologies such as sensors, gyroscopes, cloud computing, and fog layer, allowing the vehicles to sense, process, and maintain massive amounts of data on traffic, routes, suitable times to travel, potholes, sharp turns, and robots for pipe inspection in the construction and mining industries. Few books are available on the practical applications of unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) and autonomous vehicles from a multidisciplinary approach. Further, the available books only cover a few applications and designs in a very limited scope. This new, groundbreaking volume covers real-life applications, business modeling, issues, and solutions that the engineer or industry professional faces every day that can be transformed using intelligent systems design of autonomous systems. Whether for the student, veteran engineer, or another industry professional, this book, and its companion volume, are must-haves for any library.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Anomalous Activity Detection Using Deep Learning Techniques in Autonomous Vehicles 1 Amit Juyal, Sachin Sharma and Priya Matta 1.1 Introduction 2 1.1.1 Organization of Chapter 2 1.2 Literature Review 3 1.3 Artificial Intelligence in Autonomous Vehicles 7 1.4 Technologies Inside Autonomous Vehicle 9 1.5 Major Tasks in Autonomous Vehicle Using AI 11 1.6 Benefits of Autonomous Vehicle 12 1.7 Applications of Autonomous Vehicle 13 1.8 Anomalous Activities and Their Categorization 13 1.9 Deep Learning Methods in Autonomous Vehicle 14 1.10 Working of Yolo 17 1.11 Proposed Methodology 18 1.12 Proposed Algorithms 20 1.13 Comparative Study and Discussion 21 1.14 Conclusion 23 References 23 2 Algorithms and Difficulties for Autonomous Cars Based on Artificial Intelligence 27 Sumit Dhariwal, Avani Sharma and Avinash Raipuria 2.1 Introduction 27 2.1.1 Algorithms for Machine Learning in Autonomous Driving 30 2.1.2 Regression Algorithms 30 2.1.3 Design Identification Systems (Classification) 31 2.1.4 Grouping Concept 31 2.1.5 Decision Matrix Algorithms 31 2.2 In Autonomous Cars, AI Algorithms are Applied 32 2.2.1 Algorithms for Route Planning and Control 32 2.2.2 Method for Detecting Items 32 2.2.3 Algorithmic Decision-Making 33 2.3 AI’s Challenges with Self-Driving Vehicles 33 2.3.1 Feedback in Real Time 33 2.3.2 Complexity of Computation 34 2.3.3 Black Box Behavior 34 2.3.4 Precision and Dependability 35 2.3.5 The Safeguarding 35 2.3.6 AI and Security 35 2.3.7 AI and Ethics 36 2.4 Conclusion 36 References 36 3 Trusted Multipath Routing for Internet of Vehicles against DDoS Assault Using Brink Controller in Road Awareness (tmrbc-iov) 39 Piyush Chouhan and Swapnil Jain 3.1 Introduction 40 3.2 Related Work 47 3.3 VANET Grouping Algorithm (VGA) 50 3.4 Extension of Trusted Multipath Distance Vector Routing (TMDR-Ext) 51 3.5 Conclusion 57 References 58 4 Technological Transformation of Middleware and Heuristic Approaches for Intelligent Transport System 61 Rajender Kumar, Ravinder Khanna and Surender Kumar 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Evolution of VANET 62 4.3 Middleware Approach 64 4.4 Heuristic Search 65 4.5 Reviews of Middleware Approaches 72 4.6 Reviews of Heuristic Approaches 75 4.7 Conclusion and Future Scope 78 References 79 5 Recent Advancements and Research Challenges in Design and Implementation of Autonomous Vehicles 83 Mohit Kumar and V. M. Manikandan 5.1 Introduction 84 5.1.1 History and Motivation 85 5.1.2 Present Scenario and Need for Autonomous Vehicles 85 5.1.3 Features of Autonomous Vehicles 86 5.1.4 Challenges Faced by Autonomous Vehicles 86 5.2 Modules/Major Components of Autonomous Vehicles 87 5.2.1 Levels of Autonomous Vehicles 87 5.2.2 Functional Components of An Autonomous Vehicle 89 5.2.3 Traffic Control System of Autonomous Vehicles 91 5.2.4 Safety Features Followed by Autonomous Vehicles 91 5.3 Testing and Analysis of An Autonomous Vehicle in a Virtual Prototyping Environment 94 5.4 Application Areas of Autonomous Vehicles 95 5.5 Artificial Intelligence (AI) Approaches for Autonomous Vehicles 97 5.5.1 Pedestrian Detection Algorithm (PDA) 97 5.5.2 Road Signs and Traffic Signal Detection 99 5.5.3 Lane Detection System 102 5.6 Challenges to Design Autonomous Vehicles 104 5.7 Conclusion 110 References 110 6 Review on Security Vulnerabilities and Defense Mechanism in Drone Technology 113 Chaitanya Singh and Deepika Chauhan 6.1 Introduction 113 6.2 Background 114 6.3 Security Threats in Drones 115 6.3.1 Electronics Attacks 115 6.3.1.1 GPS and Communication Jamming Attacks 116 6.3.1.2 GPS and Communication Spoofing Attacks 117 6.3.1.3 Eavesdropping 117 6.3.1.4 Electromagnetic Interference 120 6.3.1.5 Laser Attacks 120 6.3.2 Cyber-Attacks 120 6.3.2.1 Man-in-Middle Attacks 121 6.3.2.2 Black Hole and Grey Hole 121 6.3.2.3 False Node Injection 121 6.3.2.4 False Communication Data Injection 121 6.3.2.5 Firmware’s Manipulations 121 6.3.2.6 Sleep Deprivation 122 6.3.2.7 Malware Infection 122 6.3.2.8 Packet Sniffing 122 6.3.2.9 False Database Injection 122 6.3.2.10 Replay Attack 123 6.3.2.11 Network Isolations 123 6.3.2.12 Code Injection 123 6.3.3 Physical Attacks 123 6.3.3.1 Key Logger Attacks 123 6.3.3.2 Camera Spoofing 124 6.4 Defense Mechanism and Countermeasure Against Attacks 124 6.4.1 Defense Techniques for GPS Spoofing 124 6.4.2 Defense Technique for Man-in-Middle Attacks 124 6.4.3 Defense against Keylogger Attacks 127 6.4.4 Defense against Camera Spoofing Attacks 127 6.4.5 Defense against Buffer Overflow Attacks 128 6.4.6 Defense against Jamming Attack 128 6.5 Conclusion 128 References 128 7 Review of IoT-Based Smart City and Smart Homes Security Standards in Smart Cities and Home Automation 133 Dnyaneshwar Vitthal Kudande, Chaitanya Singh and Deepika Chauhan 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Overview and Motivation 134 7.3 Existing Research Work 136 7.4 Different Security Threats Identified in IoT-Used Smart Cities and Smart Homes 136 7.4.1 Security Threats at Sensor Layer 136 7.4.1.1 Eavesdropping Attacks 137 7.4.1.2 Node Capturing Attacks 138 7.4.1.3 Sleep Deprivation Attacks 138 7.4.1.4 Malicious Code Injection Attacks 138 7.4.2 Security Threats at Network Layer 138 7.4.2.1 Distributed Denial of Service (DDOS) Attack 139 7.4.2.2 Sniffing Attack 139 7.4.2.3 Routing Attack 139 7.4.2.4 Traffic Examination Attacks 140 7.4.3 Security Threats at Platform Layer 140 7.4.3.1 SQL Injection 140 7.4.3.2 Cloud Malware Injection 141 7.4.3.3 Storage Attacks 141 7.4.3.4 Side Channel Attacks 141 7.4.4 Security Threats at Application Layer 141 7.4.4.1 Sniffing Attack 141 7.4.4.2 Reprogram Attack 142 7.4.4.3 Data Theft 142 7.4.4.4 Malicious Script Attack 142 7.5 Security Solutions For IoT-Based Environment in Smart Cities and Smart Homes 142 7.5.1 Blockchain 142 7.5.2 Lightweight Cryptography 143 7.5.3 Biometrics 143 7.5.4 Machine Learning 143 7.6 Conclusion 144 References 144 8 Traffic Management for Smart City Using Deep Learning 149 Puja Gupta and Upendra Singh 8.1 Introduction 150 8.2 Literature Review 151 8.3 Proposed Method 154 8.4 Experimental Evaluation 155 8.4.1 Hardware and Software Configuration 155 8.4.2 About Dataset 156 8.4.3 Implementation 156 8.4.4 Result 157 8.5 Conclusion 158 References 158 9 Cyber Security and Threat Analysis in Autonomous Vehicles 161 Siddhant Dash and Chandrashekhar Azad 9.1 Introduction 162 9.2 Autonomous Vehicles 162 9.2.1 Autonomous vs. Automated 163 9.2.2 Significance of Autonomous Vehicles 163 9.2.3 Challenges in Autonomous Vehicles 164 9.2.4 Future Aspects 165 9.3 Related Works 165 9.4 Security Problems in Autonomous Vehicles 167 9.4.1 Different Attack Surfaces and Resulting Attacks 168 9.5 Possible Attacks in Autonomous Vehicles 170 9.5.1 Internal Network Attacks 170 9.5.2 External Attacks 173 9.6 Defence Strategies against Autonomous Vehicle Attacks 175 9.6.1 Against Internal Network Attacks 175 9.6.2 Against External Attack 176 9.7 Cyber Threat Analysis 177 9.8 Security and Safety Standards in AVs 178 9.9 Conclusion 179 References 179 10 Big Data Technologies in UAV’s Traffic Management System: Importance, Benefits, Challenges and Applications 181 Piyush Agarwal, Sachin Sharma and Priya Matta 10.1 Introduction 182 10.2 Literature Review 183 10.3 Overview of UAV’s Traffic Management System 185 10.4 Importance of Big Data Technologies and Algorithm 186 10.5 Benefits of Big Data Techniques in UTM 189 10.6 Challenges of Big Data Techniques in UTM 190 10.7 Applications of Big Data Techniques in UTM 192 10.8 Case Study and Future Aspects 198 10.9 Conclusion 199 References 199 11 Reliable Machine Learning-Based Detection for Cyber Security Attacks on Connected and Autonomous Vehicles 203 Ambika N. 11.1 Introduction 204 11.2 Literature Survey 207 11.3 Proposed Architecture 210 11.4 Experimental Results 211 11.5 Analysis of the Proposal 211 11.6 Conclusion 213 References 214 12 Multitask Learning for Security and Privacy in IoV (Internet of Vehicles) 217 Malik Mustafa, Ahmed Mateen Buttar, Guna Sekhar Sajja, Sanjeev Gour, Mohd Naved and P. William 12.1 Introduction 218 12.2 IoT Architecture 220 12.3 Taxonomy of Various Security Attacks in Internet of Things 221 12.3.1 Perception Layer Attacks 221 12.3.2 Network Layer Attacks 223 12.3.3 Application Layer Attacks 224 12.4 Machine Learning Algorithms for Security and Privacy in IoV 225 12.5 A Machine Learning-Based Learning Analytics Methodology for Security and Privacy in Internet of Vehicles 227 12.5.1 Methodology 227 12.5.2 Result Analysis 229 12.6 Conclusion 230 References 230 13 ML Techniques for Attack and Anomaly Detection in Internet of Things Networks 235 Vinod Mahor, Sadhna Bijrothiya, Rina Mishra and Romil Rawat 13.1 Introduction 236 13.2 Internet of Things 236 13.3 Cyber-Attack in IoT 239 13.4 IoT Attack Detection in ML Technics 244 13.5 Conclusion 249 References 249 14 Applying Nature-Inspired Algorithms for Threat Modeling in Autonomous Vehicles 253 Manas Kumar Yogi, Siva Satya Prasad Pennada, Sreeja Devisetti and Sri Siva Lakshmana Reddy Dwarampudi 14.1 Introduction 254 14.2 Related Work 263 14.3 Proposed Mechanism 265 14.4 Performance Results 268 14.5 Future Directions 270 14.6 Conclusion 273 References 273 15 The Smart City Based on AI and Infrastructure: A New Mobility Concepts and Realities 277 Vinod Mahor, Sadhna Bijrothiya, Rina Mishra, Romil Rawat and Alpesh Soni 15.1 Introduction 278 15.2 Research Method 280 15.3 Vehicles that are Both Networked and Autonomous 282 15.4 Personal Aerial Automobile Vehicles and Unmanned Aerial Automobile Vehicles 287 15.5 Mobile Connectivity as a Service 288 15.6 Major Role for Smart City Development with IoT and Industry 4.0 289 15.7 Conclusion 291 References 292 Index 297

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisMicroplastics in the Ecosphere Discover the environmental impact of microplastics with this comprehensive resource Microplastics are the minute quantities of plastic that result from industrial processes, household release and the breakdown of larger plastic items. Widespread reliance on plastic goods and, particularly, single-use plastics, which has been increased by the COVID-19 pandemic, has made microplastics ubiquitous; they can be found throughout the ecosphere, including in the bloodstreams of humans and other animals. As these plastics emerge as a potential threat to the environment and to public health, it has never been more critical to understand their distribution and environmental impact. Microplastics in the Ecosphere aims to cultivate that understanding with a comprehensive overview of microplastics in terrestrial ecosystems. It analyzes microplastic distribution in aerosphere, hydrosphere, and soil, tracing these plastics from their productTable of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxii Section I Single Use Plastics 1 1 Scientometric Analysis of Microplastics across the Globe 3 Mansoor Ahmad Bhat, Fatma Nur Eraslan, Eftade O. Gaga, and Kadir Gedik 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Materials and Methods 5 1.3 Results and Discussion 5 1.3.1 Trends in Scientific Production and Citations 5 1.3.2 Top Funding Agencies 6 1.3.3 Top 10 Global Affiliations 7 1.3.4 Top Countries 8 1.3.5 Top 10 Databases and Journals 9 1.3.6 Top 10 Published Articles 9 1.3.7 Top 10 Author Keywords and Research Areas 10 1.4 Conclusion 11 Acknowledgments 12 References 12 2 Microplastic Pollution in the Polar Oceans – A Review 15 Manju P. Nair and Anu Gopinath 2.1 Introduction 15 2.1.1 Plastics 15 2.1.2 Plastic Pollution 15 2.1.3 Microplastics 16 2.1.4 Importance of Microplastic Pollution in the Polar Oceans 17 2.2 Polar Regions 17 2.2.1 General 17 2.2.2 Sea Ice 19 2.2.3 Water 19 2.2.4 Sediments 21 2.2.5 Biota 22 2.3 Future Perspectives 23 2.4 Conclusions 24 References 24 3 Microplastics – Global Scenario 29 Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Environmental Issues of Plastic Waste 54 3.3 Coprocessing of Plastic Waste in Cement Kilns 55 3.4 Disposal of Plastic Waste Through Plasma Pyrolysis Technology (PPT) 56 3.4.1 Merits of PPT 57 References 59 4 The Single- Use Plastic Pandemic in the COVID- 19 Era 65 Fatma Nur Eraslan, Mansoor Ahmad Bhat, Kadir Gedik, and Eftade O. Gaga 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Materials and Methods 66 4.2.3 Estimation of the Daily Amount of Medical Waste in Hospitals 67 4.3.1 Personal Protective Equipment 67 4.3.2 Packaging SUPs 68 4.3.2.1 Trends in Plastic Waste Generation, Management, and Environmental Fate during the COVID- 19 Era 69 4.4.1 Environmental Impacts from SUP Waste 70 4.4.2 Management of SUP Waste 71 4.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 72 References 72 Section II Microplastics in the Aerosphere 77 5 Atmospheric Microplastic Transport 79 Yudith Vega Paramitadevi, Ana Turyanti, Ersa Rishanti, Beata Ratnawati, Bimastyaji Surya Ramadan, and Nurani Ikhlas 5.1 The Phenomenon of Microplastic Transport 79 5.2 Factors Affecting Microplastic Transport 81 5.2.1 Types of MPs 81 5.2.2 Characteristics and Sources of Microplastics Emitters 81 5.2.3 Meteorological Conditions 82 5.2.4 Altitude and Surface Roughness 83 5.2.5 Microplastic Deposition Processes in the Ocean 83 5.2.6 Microplastics Deposition Processes in the Air 84 5.3 Microplastic Transport Modelling 85 5.3.1 Eulerian Method 87 References 92 6 Microplastics in the Atmosphere and Their Human and Eco Risks 97 Dhammika N. Magana- Arachchi and Rasika P. Wanigatunge 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Microplastics in the Atmosphere 97 6.2.2 Chemical Composition 98 6.2.3 Sources of Microplastics 99 6.2.5 Effects of Climatic Conditions on MP Distribution 101 6.3 Impact of Microplastics on Human Health and the Eco Risk 102 6.3.2 Eco Risk 106 6.4 Strategies to Minimise Atmospheric MPs through Future Research 107 6.5 Conclusion 108 Acknowledgements 109 References 109 7 Sampling and Detection of Microplastics in the Atmosphere 113 Sudip Choudhury, Kuheli Deb, Saurav Paul, Bimal Bhusan Chakraborty, and Sunayana Goswami 7.1 Introduction 113 7.2 Classification 114 7.3.4 Biota 115 7.5 Detection and Characterisation of MPs in the Atmosphere 116 7.5.1 Microscopic Techniques for Detecting MPs 117 7.5.1.6 Hot Needle Technique 119 7.5.1.7 Digital Holography 119 7.5.2 Spectroscopic Techniques for Analysing MPs 120 7.6 Conclusion 121 Funding 121 References 121 8 Sources and Circulation of Microplastics in the Aerosphere – Atmospheric Transport of Microplastics 125 Gobishankar Sathyamohan, Madushika Sewwandi, Balram Ambade, and Meththika Vithanage 8.1 Introduction 125 8.1.1 Occurrence and Abundance of Atmospheric MP 126 8.1.2 Plastic Polymers and Their Properties 127 8.1.3 Sources and Pathways of MPs in the Atmosphere 129 8.2 Temporal and Spatial Trends in MP Accumulation 130 8.3 Formation of MPs 131 8.3.1 Physical Weathering 132 8.3.4 Photo- thermal Oxidation 133 8.3.5 Thermal Degradation 134 8.4.1 Wet Deposition 136 8.6 Predicting MP Dispersion and Transport 137 8.7 Eco- Environmental Impacts 138 8.8 Future Perspectives 139 References 140 Section III Microplastics in the Aquatic Environment 147 9 Interaction of Chemical Contaminants with Microplastics 149 Asitha T. Cooray, Janitha Walpita, Pabasari A. Koliyabandara, and Ishara U. Soyza 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Interactions 150 9.3 Mechanisms 152 9.3.3 Kinetics of the Sorption Process 154 9.3.5 Pseudo- Second- Order Model 155 9.3.8 Isotherm Models 156 9.5 Future Approaches 157 References 158 10 Microplastics in Freshwater Environments 163 Florin- Constantin Mihai, Laura A.T. Markley, Farhan R. Khan, Giuseppe Suaria, and Sedat Gundogdu 10.1 Introduction 163 10.2 Microplastics in Rivers and Tributaries 164 10.3 Microplastics in Lakes 166 10.4 Microplastics in Groundwater Sources 167 10.5 Microplastics in Glaciers and Ice Caps 168 10.6 Microplastics in Deltas 169 10.7 Conclusion 171 Acknowledgment 171 References 171 11 Microplastics in Landfill Leachate: Flow and Transport 177 Anna Kwarciak- Kozłowska 11.1 Plastics and Microplastics 177 11.2 Microplastics in Landfill Leachate 180 11.3 Summary 183 Acknowledgments 183 References 183 12 Microplastics in the Aquatic Environment – Effects on Ocean Carbon Sequestration and Sustenance of Marine Life 189 Arunima Bhattacharya and Aryadeep Roychoudhury 12.1 Introduction 189 12.2 Microplastics in the Aquatic Environment 190 12.2.2.1 Chemical Nature 191 12.3.2.1 Effect on Phytoplankton Photosynthesis and Growth 192 12.3.2.2 Effect on Zooplankton Development and Reproduction 193 12.4 Microplastics and Marine Fauna 194 12.4.2.1 Shrimp 195 12.4.4 Effects on Marine Mammals 196 12.6 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 197 Acknowledgments 197 References 197 Section IV Microplastics in Soil Systems 201 13 Entry of Microplastics into Agroecosystems: A Serious Threat to Food Security and Human Health 203 Siril Singh, Sheenu Sharma, Rajni Yadav, and Anand Narain Singh 13.1 Introduction 203 13.2 Sources of Microplastics in Agroecosystems 204 13.2.3 Application of Sewage Sludge/Biosolids 205 13.2.6 Landfill Sites 206 13.3.2 Implications for Crop Plants and Food Security 209 13.4 Human Health Risks 211 13.5 Knowledge Gaps 212 13.6 Conclusion and Future Recommendations 212 Acknowledgments 213 References 213 14 Migration of Microplastic- Bound Contaminants to Soil and Their Effects 219 Marta Jaskulak and Katarzyna Zorena 14.1 Introduction 219 14.2 Microplastics as Sorbing Materials for Hazardous Chemicals 220 14.3 Types of Microplastic- Bound Contaminants in Soils 222 14.4 Effects of Exposure and Co- exposure in Soil – Consequences of Contaminant Sorption for MP Toxicity and Bioaccumulation 223 14.5 Microplastic- Bound Contaminants in Soils as Potential Threats to Human Health 224 14.6 Conclusions 226 References 226 15 Plastic Mulch- Derived Microplastics in Agricultural Soil Systems 233 Sammani Ramanayaka, Hao Zhang, and Kirk T. Semple 15.1 Plastic Mulch Films in Agriculture 233 15.2 Types of Synthetic Polymer Mulch Films 234 15.4 Mulch Microplastic Pollution in Soil 235 15.4.1 Influences of Mulch Microplastics on Soil Physical Properties 236 15.4.2.1 Soil Organic Matter (SOM) 237 15.4.2.2 Soil pH 238 15.4.3 The Impact of Microplastics on Soil Biological Properties 239 15.5 Mulch Microplastics as a Vector 240 15.6 Challenges and Future Perspectives 242 References 243 16 Critical Review of Microplastics in Soil 249 Fábio C. Nunes, Lander de Jesus Alves, Cláudia C.N. de Carvalho, Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad, and José R. de Souza Filho 16.1 Introduction 249 16.2 Sources and Transfer of Microplastics in Soils 251 16.3 Classification, Qualification, and Quantification of Microplastics in Soil 253 16.4 Effects and Risks of Microplastics on Soil Health 255 16.5 Analytical Methodologies for Microplastics in Soil 259 16.6 Epilogue and Future Perspectives 262 Acknowledgment 262 References 262 17 What Do We Know About the Effects of Microplastics on Soil? 271 Ana Paula Pinto, Teresa Ferreira, Ana V. Dordio, Alfredo Jorge Palace Carvalho, and Jorge M.S. Faria 17.1 Introduction 271 17.2 Why and How Do MPs End Up in the Soil? 272 17.2.1 Mulching Films 273 17.2.2 Sewage Sludge/Compost Application 274 17.2.3 Irrigation 275 17.4 Microplastics as Carriers of Soil Contaminants – Contaminant Vectors 277 17.4.1 MPs as Carriers of Metals and/or Metalloids 278 17.4.2 MPs as Carriers of Organic Pollutants 279 17.5 Microplastic Effects 280 17.5.2 MP Effects on Plant Growth Performance 283 17.5.3 MP Effects on Soil Nutrient Cycling 289 17.6 Conclusions and Perspectives for Future Research 291 References 292 18 Microbial Degradation of Plastics 305 Abin Sebastian, Aleena Maria Paul, Donia Dominic, Misriya Shaji, Priya Jose, Sarika Sasi, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 18.1 Introduction 305 18.2 Diversity of Plastic- Degrading Microbes 307 18.3 Mechanism of Microbe- Mediated Decomposition of Plastics 309 18.4 Molecular Factors in the Microbial Breakdown of Plastics 311 18.5 Microbes and Sustainable Degradation of Plastics 313 18.5.1 Outlook 315 References 316 19 Microplastics and Soil Nutrient Cycling 321 Madhuni Wijesooriya, Hasintha Wijesekara, Madushika Sewwandi, Sasimali Soysa, Anushka Upamali Rajapaksha, Meththika Vithanage, and Nanthi Bolan 19.1 Introduction 321 19.2 Microplastics in Soil 322 19.3 Effect of Microplastics on Nutrient Cycling 323 19.3.1 Soil Nitrogen Cycling 324 19.3.3 Soil Phosphorous Content 325 19.4 Effect of Microplastic- Driven Factors on Soil Nutrient Cycling 326 19.4.1 Properties of Microplastics 326 19.4.3 Soil Chemical Characteristics 329 19.4.4 Soil Physical Characteristics 330 19.4.5 Consequences of Microplastics for Nutrient Cycling and Implications 331 19.5 Mechanisms of Microplastic- Driven Plant Toxicity/Nutrient Uptake 332 19.6 Future Perspectives 333 References 333 Section V Microplastics in Food Systems 339 20 Microplastics in the Food Chain 341 Chamila V.L. Jayasinghe, Sharmila Jayatilake, H. Umesh K.D.Z. Rajapakse, N.K. Sandunika Kithmini, and K.M. Prakash M. Kulathunga 20.1 Introduction 341 20.2 Presence of Microplastics in the Food Chain 342 20.2.1 Transmission Through the Food Chain 343 20.2.2 Other Pathways Through Which Microplastics Enter Food 345 20.2.2.1 Transmission from Food Packaging 346 20.3 Possible Health Effects of Microplastics in Food 347 20.4 How to Minimize Microplastic Contamination in Food 348 20.4.1 Need for Research on the Realistic Ecological Impact of Microplastics 349 20.4.2 Effective Methods of Microplastic Detection and Removal 349 20.4.4 Efficient Disposal of Plastic Waste 350 20.5 Summary 350 References 351 21 Microplastics in Salt and Drinking Water 357 Muthumali U. Adikari, Nirmala Prasadi, and Chamila V.L. Jayasinghe 21.1 Microplastics in Salt 357 21.1.1 Introduction 357 21.1.1.1 Microplastics in Salt: Occurrence and Abundance 357 21.1.1.2 Microplastic Contamination in Different Salt Types 358 21.1.1.3 Estimated Consumption of Microplastics through Salt 360 21.2.1 Introduction 361 21.2.4 Microplastics in Drinking Water: Analytical Methods Used 363 21.2.5 Removal Strategies 364 21.3 Summary 365 References 365 22 Microplastics in Commercial Seafood (Invertebrates) and Seaweeds 369 Sanchala Gallage 22.1 Microplastics in Commercial Seafood and Seaweeds 369 22.1.3 Possible MP Accumulation Pathways in Commercial Seafood 371 22.1.4 Microplastics in Commercial Seafood and Seaweeds 372 22.1.4.2 Microplastics in Shrimp 373 22.1.4.3 Microplastics in Crabs 374 22.1.4.4 Microplastics in Lobsters 375 22.1.4.5 Microplastics in Sea Urchins and Sea Cucumbers 376 22.1.4.6 Microplastics in Seaweeds 377 22.1.5 Concluding Notes 377 Acknowledgement 378 References 378 23 Microplastic Toxicity to Humans 381 Magdalena Madeła 23.1 Introduction 381 23.2 Ingestion of Microplastics 382 23.3 Human Exposure to Inhalation of Microplastics 384 23.4 Human Exposure to Dermal Contact with Microplastics 385 23.5 Conclusions 386 References 387 Section VI Treatment Technologies and Management 391 24 Management of Microplastics from Sources to Humans 393 Samanthika Senarath and Dinushi Kaushalya 24.1 Introduction 393 24.1.1 Composition and Characteristics of Microplastics 394 24.2 Classification and Sources of Microplastics 394 24.2.1 Sources of Human Exposure to Microplastics 395 24.3 Impact of Microplastics on Human Health 396 24.4 Social and Ecological Impacts of Microplastics 397 24.4.1 Management Strategies for Microplastics 398 24.4.1.1 Proper Management of Plastics and Plastic Waste 399 24.4.1.2 Use of Bio- based and Biodegradable Plastics 400 24.4.1.3 Improvement of Wastewater and Solid Waste Treatment Processes 400 24.5 Prospects in Microplastic Management 401 24.6 Summary 401 References 401 25 Single- Use Ordinary Plastics vs. Bioplastics 405 Iwona Zawieja 25.1 Ordinary Plastic – General Characteristics 405 25.2 Bioplastics – General Characteristics 406 25.3 Biodegradability of Bioplastics 408 25.5 Environmental Benefits of Using Bioplastic 410 25.6 Summary 412 Acknowledgments 412 References 413 Section VII Case Studies 415 26 Plastic Nurdles in Marine Environments Due to Accidental Spillage 417 Madushika Sewwandi, Santhirasekaram Keerthanan, Kalani Imalka Perera, and Meththika Vithanage 26.1 Introduction 417 26.1.2 Plastic Nurdles 418 26.2.2.1 Nurdle Distribution on Beaches in the Atlantic Ocean in the Twentieth Century 419 26.2.2.2 Nurdle Distribution on Beaches in the Atlantic Ocean in the Twenty- First Century 420 26.2.2.3 Nurdle Pollution in the Mediterranean Sea 421 26.3.2 Fate and Transport of Nurdles in Marine Systems 422 26.3.3 Impacts of Nurdle Spillage on the Marine Environment 423 26.4 X- Press Pearl Shipwreck – Case Study 424 26.4.1 Nurdle Spillage 424 26.4.3 Characteristics and Contamination of Spilled Nurdles 425 26.4.4 Possible Impacts 427 26.4.4.1 Marine Environment 428 26.4.4.5 Impact on the Economy 429 References 429 27 Compost- Hosted Microplastics – Municipal Solid Waste Compost 433 K.S.D. Premarathna, Sammani Ramanayaka, Ayanthie Navaratne, Hasintha Wijesekara, Jasintha Jayasanka, and Meththika Vithanage 27.1 Municipal Solid Waste 433 27.1.2 Composting Process as a Source of Microplastics 435 27.2.2 Sizes of microplastics 436 27.2.3 Characteristics of Compost- Hosted Microplastics 436 27.3 Impact of Microplastic- Contaminated Compost on Soil Properties 437 27.3.2 Impact on Soil Chemical Properties 438 27.4 Compost- Hosted Microplastics as a Vector 440 27.4.1 Effect on Soil Organisms 441 27.5 Future Perspectives 442 References 443 28 Single- Use Ordinary Plastics and Bioplastics – A Case Study in Brazil 449 Luís P. Azevedo, Carlos A.F. Lagarinhos, Denise C.R. Espinosa, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 28.1 Introduction 449 28.1.1 Municipality of São Paulo (the Largest in the Country) – State Law No. 15374/2011 451 28.1.2 State of Rio de Janeiro – State Law No. 8473/2019 451 28.1.3 Santos(SP) – Municipal Law 232/2019 452 28.1.4 Ilhabela(SP) – Municipal Law 598/2008 452 28.1.5 São Sebastião (SP) – Municipal Law 2590/2018 452 28.1.6 Natal (RN) – Municipal Law 295/2009 452 28.1.7 Fernando de Noronha Island (PE) – District Decree 002/2018 452 28.2.2 Polybutylene Adipate Terephthalate (PBAT) Bioplastic 453 28.2.5 Shrimp Shell Bioplastic 454 28.2.9 Organic Waste Bioplastic 455 28.5 Energy Recovery 457 28.6 Public Policies 458 28.7 Impacts of Environmental Legislation 459 28.8 Challenges of Bioplastics Production 460 28.9 Conclusions 461 References 462 29 Microplastics Remediation – Possible Perspectives for Mitigating Saline Environments 465 Amir Parnian, Mehdi Mahbod, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 29.1 Introduction 465 29.2 Assimilation of Microplastics in Saline Water Bodies and Soil Ecosystems 467 29.3 Microplastic Self- Aging and Degradation: Hopes and Risks for the Ecosystem 468 29.4 Microplastics: Technologies for Remediating Saline Environments 468 29.5 Economic and Social Aspects of Microplastic Remediation in Saline Conditions 471 29.6 Conclusion: Hopes, and Resistance to Environmental Remediation to Achieve a Cleaner Environment 472 References 472 30 The Management of Waste Tires: A Case Study in Brazil 477 Carlos Alberto Ferreira Lagarinhos, Denise Crocce Romano Espinosa, Jorge Alberto Soares Tenório, and Luís Peres de Azevedo 30.1 Introduction 477 30.2 Methodology 478 30.3 Results and Discussions 479 30.3.4 Comparison Between Systems for Recycling Tires in the EU Countries, the United States, Japan, and Brazil 481 30.3.5 Technologies for Reuse, Recycling, and Energy Recovery 484 30.3.8 Tire Pyrolysis Process 486 30.3.9 Reclaimed Rubber and Rugs for Automobiles 486 30.3.11 Asphalt Rubber 487 30.4 Reverse Logistics Tires in Brazil 488 30.4.2 Recycling by Tire Manufacturers 490 30.6 Conclusions 495 References 496 Index 499

Read more less

Book SynopsisGRAFTED BIOPOLYMERS AS CORROSION INHIBITORS Comprehensive resource explaining the synthesis, characterization, and anticorrosive applications of green and environmentally benign grafted biopolymers and their derivatives Grafted Biopolymers as Corrosion Inhibitors highlight research and technology on sustainable grafted biopolymers as corrosion inhibitors and detail their rapidly emerging features and future research prospects. The many forms of grafted biopolymers and techniques for preventing corrosion are explored in relation to their macromolecular weights, chemical makeup, and distinctive molecular and electronic structures. The book covers state-of-the-art corrosion science and engineering as well as an in-depth, step-by-step exposition of knowledge on numerous corrosion systems and their role in contemporary industry. Each chapter include an introduction, isolation and purification, synthesis methods, worked examples, current applications, and fuTable of ContentsAbout the Editors vii List of Contributors ix Preface xv Part 1 Economic and Legal Issue of Corrosion 1 1 Corrosion: Basics, Economic Adverse Effects, and its Mitigation 3 Dwarika Prasad 2 Corrosion Inhibition: Past and Present Developments and Future Directions 11 Lakha V. Chopda and Pragnesh N. Dave 3 Biopolymers as Corrosion Inhibitors: Relative Inhibition Potential of Biopolymers and Grafted Biopolymers 21 Rafaela C. Nascimento, Luana Barros Furtado, and Maria Jose O. C. Guimaraes 4 Biopolymers vs. Grafted Biopolymers: Challenges and Opportunities 57 N. Mujafarkani Part 2 Overview of Sustainable Grafted Biopolymers 71 5 Sustainable Grafted Biopolymers: Synthesis and Characterizations 73 Omar Dagdag, Rajesh Haldhar, Sheerin Masroor, Seong-Cheol Kim, Elyor Berdimurodov, Ekemini D. Akpan, and Eno E. Ebenso 6 Sustainable Grafted Biopolymers: Properties and Applications 89 Paresh More, Kundan Jangam, Sailee Gardi, Rajeshwari Athavale, Fatima Choudhary, and Ramesh Yamgar 7 Factors Affecting Biopolymers Grafting 121 Marziya Rizvi, Preeti Gupta, Hariom Kumar, Manoj Dhameja, and Husnu Gerengi Part 3 Sustainable Grafted Biopolymers as Corrosion Inhibitors 145 8 Corrosion Inhibitors: Introduction, Classification and Selection Criteria 147 Humira Assad, Richika Ganjoo, Praveen Kumar Sharma, and Ashish Kumar 9 Methods of Corrosion Measurement: Chemical, Electrochemical, Surface, and Computational 171 Hassane Lgaz, Karthick Subbiah, Tae Joon Park, and Han-Seung Lee 10 Experimental and Computational Methods of Corrosion Assessment: Recent Updates on Concluding Remarks 219 Vandana Saraswat, Tarun K. Sarkar, and Mahendra Yadav 11 Grafted Natural Gums Used as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 253 Brahim El Ibrahimi, Elyor Berdimurodov, Walid Daoudi, and Lei Guo 12 Grafted Pectin as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 269 Dan-Yang Wang, Hui-Jing Li, and Yan-Chao Wu 13 Grafted Chitosan as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 285 Elyor Berdimurodov, Abduvali Kholikov, Khamdam Akbarov, Khasan Berdimuradov, Nilufar Tursunova, Omar Dagdag, Rajesh Haldhar, Mohamed Rbaa, Brahim El Ibrahimi, and Dakeshwar Kumar Verma 14 Grafted Starch Used as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 313 Taiwo W. Quadri, Lukman O. Olasunkanmi, Omolola E. Fayemi, and Eno E. Ebenso 15 Grafted Cellulose as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 337 Ali Asghar Javidparvar, Abdolreza Farhadian, and Ali Reza Shahmoradi 16 Sodium Alginate: Grafted Alginates as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 365 Lakshmanan Muthulakshmi, Shalini Mohan, Nellaiah Hariharan, and Jeenat Aslam 17 Grafted Dextrin as a Corrosion Inhibitor 383 M. Mobin , K. Cial, J. Aslam, M. Parveen, and R. Aslam 18 Grafted Biopolymer Composites and Nanocomposites as Sustainable Corrosion Inhibitors 397 Syed Ali Abdur Rahman, P. Priyadharsini, R. V. Deeksha, and J. Arun 19 Industrially Useful Corrosion Inhibitors: Grafted Biopolymers as Ideal Substitutes 417 Farhat A. Ansari and Hariom K. Sharma Index 465

Read more less

Book SynopsisESSENTIALS OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE PHYSICS An introductory semiconductor device physics textbook that is accessible to readers without a background in statistical physics I wish this book had been available when I needed to make a Semiconductor class myself a few years ago [...] A very nice aspect is that some concepts (e.g. density of states) are explained in a way that I have not seen elsewhere. These types of unconventional approaches are very valuable for a teacher.(Bjorn Maes, University of Mons, Belgium) [...] the author offers an accessible description of statistical analysis and adopts it to explain the core properties of semiconductors. [...] [He] uses interesting metaphors and analogies to exemplify some of the most difficult notions, in an innovative and engaging way. (Andrea di Falco, University of St. Andrews, UK) The subject of this book is the physics of semiconductor devices, which is an important topic in engineering and physics because it forms the background for electronic and optoelectronic devices, including solar cells. The author aims to provide students and teachers with a concise text that focuses on semiconductor devices and covers the necessary background in statistical physics. This text introduces the key prerequisite knowledge in a simple, clear, and friendly manner. It distills the key concepts of semiconductor devices down to their essentials, enabling students to master this key subject in engineering, physics, and materials. The subject matter treated in this book is directly connected to the physics of p-n junctions and solar cells, which has become a topic of intense interest in the last decade. Sample topics covered within the text include: Chemical potential, Fermi level, Fermi-Dirac distribution, drift current and diffusion current. The physics of semiconductors, band theory and intuitive derivations of the concentration of charge carriers. The p-n junction, with qualitative analysis preceding the mathematical descriptions. A derivation of the current vs voltage relation in p-n junctions (Shockley equation). Important applications of p-n junctions, including solar cellsThe two main types of transistors: Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJT) and Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFET) For students and instructors, it may be used as a primary textbook for an introductory semiconductor device physics course and is suitable for a course of approximately 30-50 hours. Scientists studying and researching semiconductor devices in general, and solar cells in particular, will also benefit from the clear and intuitive explanations found in this book.Table of ContentsPreface 1 Concepts of Statistical Physics 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Thermal Equilibrium 1.3 Partition function - Part I 1.4 Diffusive equilibrium and the chemical potential 1.5 The partition function, Part II 1.6 Example of application: energy and number of elements of a system 1.7 The Fermi-Dirac distribution 1.8 Analogy between the systems “box” and “coins” 1.9 Concentration of electrons and Fermi level 1.10 Transport 1.11 Relationship between current and concentration of particles (continuity equation) 1.12 Suggestions for further reading 1.13 Exercises 2 – Semiconductors 2.1 Band Theory 2.2 Electrons and holes 2.3 Concentration of free electrons 2.4 Density of states 2.5 Concentration of holes and Fermi level 2.6 Extrinsic semiconductors (doping) 2. 7 Exercises 3 Introduction to semiconductor devices: the p-n junction 3.1 p-n junction in thermodynamic equilibrium – qualitative description 3.2 p-n junction in thermodynamic equilibrium – quantitative description 3.3 Systems outside thermodynamic equilibrium: the quasi-Fermi levels. 3.4 Qualitative description of the relationship between current and voltage in a p-n junction 3.5 The current vs voltage relationship in a p-n junction (Shockley’s equation) 3.6 Suggestions for further reading 3.7 Exercises 4 Photovoltaic devices (mainly solar cells) 4.1 Solar cells and photodetectors 4.2 Physical principles 4.3 The equivalent circuit 4.4 The I x V curve and the fill-factor 4.5 Efficiency of solar cells and the theoretical limit 4.6 Connections of solar cells 4.7 Suggestions for further reading 4.8 Exercises 5 Transistors 5.1 The Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT) 5.1.1 Physical principles of the BJT 5.1.2 The beta parameter and the relationship between emitter, collector and base currents 5.1.3 Relationship between IC and VCE and the Early effect 5.1.4 The BJT as an amplifier 5.2 The MOSFET 5.2.1 Physical principles 5.2.3 Examples of applications of MOSFETS: logic inverters and logic gates 5.3 Suggestions for further reading 5.4 Exercises Appendix: Geometrical interpretation of the chemical potential and free energy

Read more less

Book SynopsisCOMPUTER MODELS OF PROCESS DYNAMICS Comprehensive overview of techniques for describing physical phenomena by means of computer models that are determined by mathematical analysis Computer Models of Process Dynamics covers everything required to do computer based mathematical modeling of dynamic systems, including an introduction to a scientific language, its use to program essential operations, and methods to approximate the integration of continuous signals. From a practical standpoint, readers will learn how to build computer models that simulate differential equations. They are also shown how to model physical objects of increasing complexity, where the most complex objects are simulated by finite element models, and how to follow a formal procedure in order to build a valid computer model. To aid in reader comprehension, a series of case studies is presented that covers myriad different topics to provide a view of the challenges that fall within thisTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Engineering uses of computer models 1 1.1.1 Mission statement 2 1.2 The subject matter 3 1.3 Mathematical material 4 1.4 Some remarks 5 Bibliography 5 2 From Computer Hardware to Software 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Computing machines 7 2.2.1 The software interface 8 2.3 Computer programming 9 2.3.1 Algebraic expressions 10 2.3.2 Math functions 13 2.3.3 Computation loops 14 2.3.4 Decision making 16 2.3.5 Graphics 17 2.3.6 User defined functions 17 2.4 State transition machines 17 2.4.1 A binary signal generator 18 2.4.2 Operational control of an industrial plant 24 2.5 Difference engines 25 2.5.1 Difference equation to calculate compound interest 26 2.6 Iterative programming 27 2.6.1 Inverse functions 29 2.7 Digital simulation of differential equations 30 2.7.1 Rectangular integration 31 2.7.2 Trapezoidal integration 33 2.7.3 Second-order integration 35 2.7.4 An Example 36 2.8 Discussion 37 Exercises 38 References 41 3 Creative thinking and scientific theories 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 The dawn of astronomy 44 3.3 The renaissance 45 3.3.1 Galileo 45 3.3.2 Newton 46 3.4 Electromagnetism 49 3.4.1 Magnetic fields 50 3.4.2 Electromagnetic induction 50 3.4.3 Electromagnetic radiation 51 3.5 Aerodynamics 52 3.5.1 Vector flow fields 53 3.6 Discussion 54 References 56 4 Calculus and the computer 57 4.1 Introduction 57 4.2 Mathematical solution of differential equations 58 4.3 From physical analogs to analog computers 60 4.4 Picard’s method for solving a nonlinear differential equation 61 4.4.1 Mechanization of Picard’s method 62 4.4.2 Feedback model of the differential equation 62 4.4.3 Approximate solution by Taylor series 64 4.5 Exponential functions and linear differential equations 65 4.5.1 Taylor series to approximate exponential functions 66 4.6 Sinusoidal functions and phasors 67 4.6.1 Taylor series to approximate sinusoids 69 4.7 Bessel’s equation 70 4.8 Discussion 72 Exercises 73 Bibliography 74 5 Science and computer models 75 5.1 Introduction 75 5.2 A planetary orbit around a stationary Sun 76 5.2.1 An analytic solution for planetary orbits 79 5.2.2 A difference equation to model planetary orbits 80 5.3 Simulation of a swinging pendulum 81 5.3.1 A graphical construction to show the motion of a pendulum 83 5.3.2 Truncation and roundoff errors 84 5.4 Lagrange’s equations of motion 85 5.4.1 A double pendulum 87 5.4.2 A few comments 90 5.4.3 Modes of motion of a double pendulum 90 5.4.4 Structural vibrations in an aircraft 91 5.5 Discussion 94 Exercises 94 Bibliography 95 6 Flight simulators 97 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 The motion of an aircraft 98 6.2.1 The equations of motion 99 6.3 Short period pitching motion 101 6.3.1 Case study of short period pitching motion 104 6.3.2 State equations of short period pitching 105 6.3.3 Transfer functions of short period pitching 107 6.3.4 Frequency response of short period pitching 108 6.4 Phugoid motion 110 6.5 User interfaces 111 6.6 Discussion 112 Exercises 113 Bibliography 114 7 Finite element models and the diffusion of heat 115 7.1 Introduction 115 7.2 A thermal model 117 7.2.1 A finite element model based on an electrical ladder network 118 7.2.2 Free settling from an initial temperature profile 119 7.2.3 Step response test 121 7.2.4 State space model of diffusion 126 7.3 A practical application 129 7.4 Two-dimensional steady-state model 131 7.5 Discussion 132 Exercises 134 Bibliography 135 8 Wave equations 137 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Energy storage mechanisms 138 8.2.1 Partial differential equation describing propagation in a transmission line 140 8.3 A finite element model of a transmission line 141 8.4 State space model of a standing wave in a vibrating system 145 8.4.1 State space model of a multiple compound pendulum 147 8.5 A two-dimensional electromagnetic field 148 8.6 A two-dimensional potential flow model 151 8.7 Discussion 155 Exercises 156 Bibliography 159 9 Uncertainty and softer science 161 9.1 Introduction 161 9.2 Empirical and “black box” models 162 9.2.1 An imperfect model of a simple physical object 163 9.2.2 Finite impulse response models 164 9.3 Randomness within computer models 166 9.3.1 Random number generators and data analysis 167 9.3.2 Statistical estimation and the method of least squares 168 9.3.3 A state estimator 171 9.3.4 A velocity estimator 175 9.3.5 An FIR filter 176 9.4 Economic, Geo-, Bio-, and other sciences 179 9.4.1 A pricing strategy 181 9.4.2 The productivity of money 184 9.4.3 Comments on business models 187 9.5 Digital images 189 9.5.1 An image processor 190 9.6 Discussion 193 Exercises 194 Bibliography 196 10 Computer models in a development project 197 10.1 Introduction 197 10.1.1 The scope of this chapter 198 10.2 A motor drive model 198 10.2.1 A conceptual model 200 10.2.2 The motor drive parameters 202 10.2.3 Creating the simulation model 203 10.2.4 The electrical and mechanical subsystems 204 10.2.5 System integration 206 10.2.6 Configuration management 208 10.3 The definition phase 208 10.3.1 Selection of the motor 209 10.3.2 Simulation of load disturbances 210 10.4 The design phase 213 10.4.1 Calculation of frequency response 213 10.4.2 The current control loop 214 10.4.3 Design review and further actions 217 10.4.4 Rate feedback 219 10.5 A setback to the project 222 10.5.1 Elastic coupling between motor and load 222 10.6 Discussion 227 Exercises 229 Bibliography 230 11 Postscript 231 11.1 Looking back 231 11.2 The operation of a simulation facility 233 11.3 Looking forward 234 Bibliography 235 Appendix A Frequency response methods 237 Appendix B Vector analysis 261 Appendix C Scalar and vector fields 269 Appendix D Probability and statistical models 287 Index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisFURAN POLYMERS AND THEIR REACTIONS Understand furan polymers and their roles in industrial production Furans are platform chemicals from biomass which have a range of functions in the production of solvents, biofuels, and monomers for industrial polymer synthesis. As the search for sustainable industrial processes makes biomass resources ever more vital, a more detailed understanding of these compounds and their industrial uses has never been more critical. Furan Polymers and their Reactions surveys these crucial compounds and their contributions to polymer synthesis. It discusses the biorefinery of furans, identifies furfural and 5-hydroxymethyl furfural as the key furan monomer precursors for different polymer synthetic processes, and analyzes all the major reactions furans undergo during these processes and the structures, properties and applications of the ensuing materials. The results are a vital contribution to the growing field of renewable industry. Furan Polymers and their RTable of ContentsForeword vii Preface viii 1 A Brief History 1 2 The Peculiar Chemical Features of the Furan Heterocycle and the Synthesis of Furfural and Hydroxymethylfurfural 3 2.1 Free Radical Reactions 3 2.2 Electrophilic Reactions 5 2.3 Photochemistry 5 2.4 Hydrolysis Reactions 9 2.5 The Diels–Alder Reaction 10 2.6 Furfural and Hydroxymethylfurfural as Industrial Commodities and as Building Blocks for Furan Monomers 11 3 Polymers from Furfural and Furfuryl Alcohol 18 3.1 Furfural Resins 18 3.2 Furfuryl Alcohol Resins 21 4 Polymers from Chain Polyaddition Reactions 37 4.1 Free Radical Systems 37 4.2 Cationic Systems 42 4.3 Anionic Systems 51 4.4 Stereospecific Systems 57 5 Polymers from Polycondensation (Step) Reactions 61 5.1 Polyesters 61 5.2 Polyamides 90 5.3 Polyurethanes 103 5.4 Polyureas, Polyparabanic Acids, Polybenzoxazines, polySchiff Bases, and Polyhydrazides 114 5.5 Conjugated Furan Oligomers and Polymers 124 5.6 Epoxy Resins 134 6 The Furan/Maleimide Diels–Alder Reaction Applied to Polymer Synthesis and Modification 147 6.1 Polycondensations (Step-growth Polymerizations) 148 6.2 Polymer Modification and Cross-linking 156 6.3 Miscellaneous Systems 180 6.4 A New Paradigm: Aromatics from Furans 186 7 Chemical and Biological Degradation 192 8 General Conclusions 200 Index 202

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsNanocolloids for Petroleum Engineering: Theoretical and Practical Approach Baghir Suleimanov, Elchin Veliyev, Vladimir Vishnyakov INTRODUCTION PART A. Nanocolloids – an overview Chapter 1. Nanocolloids classification 1.1. What is colloid? 1.2. Colloids classification 1.3. Colloids evaluation 1.4. What is nanocolloid? Chapter 2. Nanocolloids properties 2.1. Different kind of interactions in nanocolloids  Van der Waals interactions  Electrostatic interaction  Elastic-steric interaction  Hydrophobic interaction  Solvation interaction  Depletion interaction  Magnetic dipole-dipole interaction  Osmotic repulsion 2.2. The stability of nanocolloids 2.3. Rheology of nanocolloids  Effect of nanoparticles interaction on the colloids rheology  Effect of nanoparticles migration on the colloids rheology 2.4. Surface Tension.Wettability  Wettability alteration  Surface tension References PART B. Reservoir Development Chapter 3. Reservoir conditions for nanocolloids formation 3.1. In-situ formation of nano-gas emulsions  Stability of the subcritical gas nuclei 3.2. In-situ formation of nanoaerosoles  Stability of the subcritical liquid nuclei Chapter 4. Nano-gas emulsions in oil field development 4.1. Hydrodynamics of nano-gas emulsions  Flow mechanism of gasified Newtonian liquids  Annular capillary flow scheme  Slip effect  Concluding remarks  Flow of gasified Newtonian liquids in porous media at reservoir conditions  Fundamental equations  Apparent permeability  Steady-state flow 4.2. Hydrodynamics of nano-gas emulsions in heavy oil reservoirs  Flow mechanism of gasified non-Newtonian liquids  Annular capillary flow scheme  Slip effect  Flow of gasified non-Newtonian liquids in porous media at reservoir conditions  Capillary flow  Flow in a homogeneous porous medium  Flow in a heterogeneous porous medium  Concluding remarks 4.3. Filed validation of slippage phenomena 4.3.1. Steady state radial flow  Gasified Newtonian fluid flow  Gasified non-Newtonian fluid flow 4.3.2. Unsteady state flow 4.3.3. Viscosity anomaly near to phase transition point  Experimental procedures  Measurement of live oil viscosity  Phase behavior of live oil and viscosity anomaly  Surfactant impact on phase behavior of live oil and viscosity anomaly  Mechanism of viscosity anomaly  Mechanism of surfactant influence on phase behavior of live oil and viscosity anomaly  Concluding remarks Chapter 5. Nanoaerosoles in gas condensate field development 5.1. Study of the gas condensate flow in porous medium 5.2. Mechanism of the gas condensate mixture flow  Rheology mechanism of the gas condensate mixture during steady-state flow a) Annular flow scheme in a porous medium capillary b) Slippage effect  Mechanism of porous medium wettability influence on the steady-state flow of the gas condensate  Mechanism of pressure build-up at the unsteady-state flow of the gas condensate  Concluding remarks References PART C. Production Operations Chapter 6. An overview of nanocolloids application in production operations Chapter 7. Nanosol for well completion  The influence of the specific surface area and distribution of particles on the cement stone strength  The influence of nano-SiO2 and nano-TIO2 on the cement stone strength  Regression equation  Concluding remarks Chapter 8. Nano-gas emulsion for sand control  Fluidization by gasified fluids  Carbon dioxide gasified water as fluidizing agent  Natural gas or air gasified water as fluidizing agent  Chemical additives impact on fluidization process  Water-air mixtures with surfactant additives as fluidizing agent  Fluidization by polymer compositions  Mechanism of observed phenomena Chapter 9. Vibrowave stimulation impact on nano-gas emulsion flow  Exact solution  Approximate solution  Concluding remarks References   PART D. Enhanced Oil Recovery Chapter 10. An overview of nanocolloids applications for EOR  Core flooding experiments focused on dispersion phase properties  Core flooding experiments focused on dispersion medium properties Chapter 11. Surfactant based nanofluid  Nanoparticle influence on surface tension in surfactant solution  Nanoparticles influence on surfactant adsorption process  Nanoparticles influence on oil wettability  Nanoparticles influence on optical spectroscopy results  Nanoparticles influence on rheological properties of the nano-suspension  Nanoparticles influence on the processes of Newtonian oil displacement in homogeneous and heterogeneous porous medium were tested  Concluding remarks Chapter 12. Nanofluids for Deep Fluid Diversion 12.1. Preformed particle nanogels  Nanogel strength evaluation  Determination of inflection points  Kinetic mechanism of gelation  Core flooding experiments  Concluding remarks 12.2. Colloidal dispersion nanogels  Rheology  Aging effect  Interfacial tension  Zeta potential  Particle size distribution  Resistance factor / Residual resistance factor  Concluding remarks   Chapter 13. Nano-gas emulsions as displacement agent  Oil displacement by Newtonian gasified fluid  Oil displacement by non-Newtonian gasified fluid  Mechanism of observed phenomena  Field application References PART E. Novel Perspective Nanocolloids Chapter 14. Metal string complex micro&nano fluids 14.1. What is metal string complexes? 14.2. Thermophysical properties of microfluids with Ni3(μ3-ppza)4Cl2 metal string complex  Microparticles of the MSC Ni3(µ3-ppza)4Cl2  Ni3-microfluid  Fluids stability  Thermal conductivity  Rheology  Surface tension  Freezing points  Concluding remarks 14.3. Thermophysical properties of microfluids with Ni5(μ5-pppmda)4Cl2 metal string complex  Microparticles of the metal string complex [Ni5(µ5-pppmda)4Cl2]  Micro and nanofluids preperation  Fluids stability  Thermal conductivity  Rheology  Surface tension  Freezing points  Concluding remarks References APPENDICES

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsIntroduction ix Section One: Getting Started with New Product Development and Innovation 1 1 New Products: What Separates the Winners from the Losers and What Drives Success 3Robert G. Cooper 2 An Innovation Management Framework: A Model for Managers Who Want to Grow Their Businesses 45Paul Mugge and Stephen K. Markham 3 Sustainable Innovations and Sustainable Product Innovations: Definitions, Potential Avenues, and Outlook 59Rajan Varadarajan 4 Organizational Design for Innovation: Leveraging the Creative Problemsolving Process to Build Internal Innovation Effectiveness 81Wayne Fisher 5 Repurposing: A Collaborative Innovation Strategy for the Digital Age 103Bastian Rake and Marvin Hanisch 6 Innovation Governance 121Rod B. McNaughton Section Two: New Product Development Process 137 7 Toward Effective Portfolio Management 139Hans van der Bij and Eelko K.R.E. Huizingh 8 The Politics of Process: The Portfolio Management Framework 155Stephen K Markham 9 Integrating IP Actions into NPD Processes: Best Practices for Protecting (and Promoting) New Product Innovation 181Joshua L. Cohen, Esq. 10 Managing the Front End of Innovation (FEI): Going Beyond Process 203Jelena Spanjol and Lisa Welzenbach 11 Opportunistic New Product Development 227Floor Blindenbach-Driessen and Jan van den Ende 12 Really New Product Launch Strategies: Prescriptive Advice to Managers from Consumer Research Insights 247Sven Feurer, Steve Hoeffler, Min Zhao, and Michal Herzenstein 13 Managing the Supply Chain Implications of Launch 267C. Anthony Di Benedetto and Roger J. Calantone 14 New Product Development in East Asia: Best Practices and Lessons to Be Learned 279Martin Hemmert Section Three: User Participation and Value Creation in New Product Development 297 15 Navigating Open Innovation 299Rebecca J. Slotegraaf and Girish Mallapragada 16 How to Leverage the Right Users at the Right Time Within User-Centric Innovation Processes 315Andrea Wöhrl, Sophia Korte, Michael Bartl, Volker Bilgram, and Alexander Brem 17 Harnessing Ordinary Users’ Ideas for Innovation 337Peter R. Magnusson 18 New Product Co-Creation: Key Insights and Success Factors 351Gregory J. Fisher and Aric Rindfleisch 19 Crowdsourcing and Crowdfunding: Emerging Approaches for New Product Concept Generation and Market Testing 367Mohammad Hossein Tajvarpour and Devashish Pujari Section Four: Transformative Forces of New Product Development and Innovation 385 20 Digital Transformation in the Making: Lessons from a Large Energy Company 387Luigi M. De Luca, Andrea Rossi, Zahir Sumar, and Gabriele Troilo 21 Hybrid Intelligence for Innovation: Augmenting NPD Teams with Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 407Frank T. Piller, Sebastian G. Bouschery, and Vera Blazevic 22 AI for User-Centered New Product Development—From Large-Scale Need Elicitation to Generative Design 425Tucker J. Marion, Mohsen Moghaddam, Paolo Ciuccarelli, and Lu Wang 23 Re-thinking Design Thinking: The Transformative Role of Design Thinking in New Product Development 445Marina Candi, Claudio Dell’Era, Stefano Magistretti, K. Scott Swan, and Roberto Verganti Section Five: Service Innovation 459 24 Innovation When All Products Are Services 461Anders Gustafsson, Per Kristensson, Gary R. Schirr, and Lars Witell 25 New Product Development by Extending the Business Model 477Christer Karlsson and Thomas Frandsen 26 How to Build Subscription Business Models 497Charley Qianlei Chen, William C. Zhou, and Sunny Li Sun Section Six: Applications in New Product Development 511 27 Obtaining Customer Needs for Product Development 513Abbie Griffin 28 The Evolving Influence of Customer Needs on Product Development 529Kristyn Corrigan 29 Choice-based Conjoint Analysis: Reveal Customer Preferences to Increase Product-market Fit 543Garth V. Brown 30 Creativity Tools for New Product Development 565Teresa Jurgens-Kowal 31 Forecasting New Products 587Kenneth B. Kahn 32 A Practical Guide to Facilitating a Design Thinking Workshop 601Wayne Fisher Appendix: About the Product Development and Management Association (PDMA) 619 PDMA Glossary of New Product Development Terms 627 Index 661

Read more less

Book SynopsisImpact of Engineered Nanomaterials in Genomics and Epigenomics Overview of current research and technologies in nanomaterial science as applied to omics science at the single cell level Impact of Engineered Nanomaterials in Genomics and Epigenomics is a comprehensive and authoritative compilation of the genetic processes and instructions that specifically direct individual genes to turn on or off, focusing on the developing technologies of engineering nanomaterials and their role in cell engineering which have become important research tools for pharmaceutical, biological, medical, and toxicological studies. Combining state-of-the art information on the impact of engineered nanomaterials in genomics and epigenomics, from a range of internationally recognized investigators from around the world, this edited volume offers unique insights into the current trends and future directions of research in this scientific field. Impact of Engineered NanomateriTable of ContentsContents List of Contributors xv Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi 1 Impact of Engineered Nanomaterials in Genomics and Epigenomics 1 Saura C. Sahu Contents Nanotechnology: A Technological Advancement of the Twenty-First Century 1 Genomics and Epigenomics 1 Beneficial Impacts of Engineered Nanomaterials on Human Life 2 Potential Adverse Health Effects of Engineered Nanomaterials 2 Conclusions 3 References 3 2 Molecular Impacts of Advanced Nanomaterials at Genomic and Epigenomic Levels 5 Kamran Shekh, Rais A Ansari, Yadollah Omidi, and Saghir A. Shakil Introduction 5 Classification of NMs 6 Absorption and Distribution of NMs 6 Major Adverse Effects of NMs 8 Known Cellular and Nuclear Uptake Mechanisms for Nanoparticles 10 Epigenetic Mechanisms and the Effect of NMs 11 DNA Methylation 12 Genetic and Genomic Effects of NMs 20 Conclusion 25 References 26 3 Endocrine Disruptors: Genetic, Epigenetic, and Related Pathways 41 Rais A. Ansari, Saleh Alfuraih, Kamran Shekh, Yadollah Omidi, Saleem Javed, and Saghir A. Shakil Introduction 41 Toxic Effects of EDCs on Wildlife and Humans 47 Effects During Development 48 Delayed Effects 48 Transgenerational Effects 49 Identification of EDC: Methods 49 Genetic Pathways 50 Phosphorylation-Mediated Signaling Pathways of Nuclear Receptors and Other Transcription Factors: Link to EDC 53 ER-Signaling Pathways 53 Xenoandrogens and Metabolic Syndrome 54 AR Signaling Pathways 54 Mechanism of ED 55 Methylation and Gene Regulation 55 Role of Noncoding RNAs 59 Transgenerational Inheritance of Epigenetics Induced by EDCs 59 Anti-Thyroids 60 Organotin 62 Epigenetic Effects of Organotin 63 TCDD and Related Compounds 63 TCDD and Genetic Response 64 TCDD-Mediated Epigenetic Response 65 Conclusions 65 References 66 4 Nanoplastics in Agroecosystem and Phytotoxicity: An Evaluation of Cytogenotoxicity and Epigenetic Regulation 83 Piyoosh Kumar Babele and Ravi Kant Bhatia Introduction 83 Fate and Behavior of NPs in Agroecosystem and Soil Environment 85 Uptake and Accumulation of NPs in Plants 87 NPs and Phytotoxicity 88 Can NPs Cause Cytogenotoxicity and Dysregulate Epigenetic Markers in Plants? 89 NPs and Epigenetic Regulation 91 Conclusion and Perspectives 92 References 93 5 Metal Oxide Nanoparticles and Graphene-Based Nanomaterials: Genotoxic, Oxidative, and Epigenetic Effects 99 Delia Cavallo, Pieranna Chiarella, Anna Maria Fresegna, Aureliano Ciervo, Valentina Del Frate, and Cinzia Lucia Ursini Introduction 99 Physicochemical Properties of NMs and Toxicity 100 Mechanism of NM Genotoxicity 101 Epigenetic Effects of Nanomaterials 102 Studies on Genotoxic and Oxidative Effects of Metal Oxides and Graphene-Based Nanomaterials 104 Graphene-Based NMs 120 Studies on Epigenetic Effects of Metal Oxides and Graphene-Based Nanomaterials 123 Studies on Workers – Genotoxic and Oxidative Effects of Occupational Exposure to Metal Oxides Nanoparticles, SiO2 NPs, and Graphene-Based Nanomaterials 127 Conclusions 132 References 132 6 Epigenotoxicity of Titanium Dioxide Nanoparticles 145 Carlos Wells, Marta Pogribna, Beverly Lyn-Cook, and George Hammons Introduction 145 Cellular Uptake and Biodistribution 147 DNA Methylation and TiO2 Nanoparticles 151 Histone Modifications and TiO2 Nanoparticles 157 MicroRNAs and TiO2 Nanoparticles 161 Risk Assessment 167 Conclusion 173 Disclaimer 174 References 174 7 Toxicogenomics of Multi-Walled Carbon Nanotubes 187 Pius Joseph Introduction 187 MWCNTs 188 Lung Injury 190 Inflammation 190 Oxidative Stress 192 Fibrosis 193 Mesothelioma 195 Lung Cancer 196 Genotoxicity 197 Toxicogenomics of ENMs 198 Transcriptomics – Technical Aspects 199 Toxicogenomics of MWCNTs – Animal Studies 201 Toxicogenomics of MWCNT – Human Studies 206 Disclaimer 207 References 207 8 Nano-Engineering in Traumatic Brain Injury 217 Najlaa Al-Thani, Mohammad Z. Haider , Maryam Al-Mansoob, Stuti Patel, Salma M.S. Ahmad, Firas Kobeissy, and Abdullah Shaito Introduction 217 Nanoparticles in the Treatment of TBI 218 Conclusion 222 References 223 9 Application of Nanoemulsions in Food Industries: Recent Progress, Challenges, and Opportunities 229 Ramesh Chaudhari, Vishva Patel, and Ashutosh Kumar Introduction 229 Components of Nanoemulsions 231 Approaches for Nanoemulsion Production 232 Applications of Food-Grade Nanoemulsions 235 Comparison of Nanoemulsion from Conventional Methods 241 Problems and Probable Solutions of Nanoemulsions 242 Future Trends and Challenges 243 Regulations and Safety Aspects 243 Conclusion 244 Conflict of Interest 245 Acknowledgments 245 References 245 10 Adverse Epigenetic Effects of Environmental Engineered Nanoparticles as Drug Carriers 251 Yingxue Zhang, Eid Alshammari, Nouran Yonis, and Zhe Yang Introduction 251 ENP-Based Drug-Delivery Systems 252 Adverse Epigenetic Effects of ENPs 257 ENP-Induced Epigenetic Toxicity Likely Mediated by ROS 269 Conclusion 271 References 271 11 Engineered Nanoparticles Adversely Impact Glucose Energy Metabolism 283 Yingxue Zhang, Alexander Yang, and Zhe Yang Introduction 283 Biological Toxicity of Engineered Nanoparticles 284 Engineered Nanoparticles Alter Glucose Metabolism 285 Engineered Nanoparticles Alter TCA Cycle 288 Engineered Nanoparticles Alter Oxidative Phosphorylation 289 Conclusion 291 References 291 12 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning of Single-Cell Transcriptomics of Engineered Nanoparticles 295 Alexander Yang, Yingxue Zhang, and Zhe Yang Introduction 295 Impact of Nanoparticles on Single-Cell Transcriptomics and Response Heterogeneity 297 AI and ML in scRNA-Seq Data Analysis 301 Determining Cell Differentiation and Lineage Based on Single-Cell Entropy 303 Conclusion 304 References 305 13 Toxicogenomics and Toxicological Mechanisms of Engineered Nanomaterials 309 Eid Alshammari, Yingxue Zhang, Alexander Yang, and Zhe Yang Introduction 309 Genomic Responses to ENMs 310 Transcriptomic Responses to ENMs 313 Conclusion 314 References 315 14 Carbon Nanotubes Alter Metabolomics Pathways Leading to Broad Ecological Toxicity 319 Nouran Yonis, Eid Alshammari, and Zhe Yang Introduction 319 Biomedical Application and Toxicity of Carbon Nanotubes 321 Metabolomics Toxicity of Carbon Nanotubes 323 Conclusion 326 References 326 15 Assessment of the Biological Impact of Engineered Nanomaterials Using Mass Spectrometry-Based MultiOmics Approaches 331 Nicholas Day, Tong Zhang, Matthew J. Gaffrey, Brian D. Thrall, and Wei-Jun Qian Introduction 331 Applications of MS for the Measurements of Proteins, PTMs, Lipids, and Metabolites 332 Multiomics Investigation of ENM Exposure to Microorganisms 335 Multiomics Investigation of ENM Exposure Using In Vitro Cell Culture Models 337 Multiomics Studies Reveal Organ-Specific Toxicity at the Organismal Level 340 Conclusions and Perspectives 344 Acknowledgments 347 Compliance with Ethical Standards 347 References 347 16 Current Scenario and Future Trends of Plant Nano-Interaction to Mitigate Abiotic Stresses: A Review 355 Farhat Yasmeen, Ghazala Mustafa, Hafiz Muhammad Jhanzab, and Setsuko Komatsu Abbreviations 355 Introduction 355 Synthesis of Nanoparticles 356 Morphophysiological Effects of Nanoparticles on Plant 364 Molecular Mechanism Altered by Nanoparticles 370 Nanoparticles Interaction with Plants 374 Conclusion and Future Prospects 375 References 376 17 Latest Insights on Genomic and Epigenomic Mechanisms of Nanotoxicity 397 Vratko Himič, Nikolaos Syrmos, Gianfranco K.I. Ligarotti, and Mario Ganau Introduction 397 Mechanisms of Genotoxicity 397 Genomic Consequences of ENM Exposure 400 A Primer on Epigenetic Processes 403 Epigenomic Consequences of ENM Exposure 404 Importance of Properties of ENMs 409 Future Perspectives 411 References 411 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Two-Dimensional MXenes: Fundamentals, Characteristics, Synthesis Methods, Processing, Compositions, Structure, and Applications 1Sudipta Goswami and Chandan Kumar Ghosh 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Fundamentals 2 1.3 General Characteristics of the MXenes 6 1.4 Synthesis Methods 8 1.5 Applications 19 1.6 Conclusion and Future Scope 32 2 Chemical Exfoliation and Delamination Methods of MXenes 39Kaili Gong, Lian Yin and Keqing Zhou 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 HF Etching Method 40 2.3 In Situ HF-Forming Etching Method 43 2.4 Molten Salt Etching Method 49 2.5 Electrochemical Etching Method 52 2.6 Hydrothermal Etching Method 55 2.7 Alkali Etching Method 58 2.8 Other Etching Methods 59 2.9 Exfoliation Strategies of Multilayered MXene 62 2.10 Conclusion 65 3 Surface Terminations and Surface Functionalization Strategies of MXenes 71Lekshmi A. G., Rejithamol. R., Santhy A., Akhila Raman, Asok Aparna and Appukuttan Saritha 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Surface Termination Strategies in MXenes 72 3.3 Methods of Surface Functionalization in MXenes 77 3.4 Application of Surface Modified MXenes 83 3.5 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 96 4 Electronic, Electrical and Optical Properties of MXenes 107Deepthi Jayan K. and Ragin Ramdas M. 4.1 Introduction 108 4.2 Structure of MXenes 109 4.3 An Overview of Various Methods of Synthesis of MXenes 110 4.4 Electronic Properties 112 4.5 Electrical Properties 122 4.6 Optical Properties 130 4.7 Conclusion 138 5 Magnetic, Mechanical and Thermal Properties of MXenes 147R. Ghamsarizade, B. Ramezanzadeh, H. Eivaz Mohammadloo and N. Mehranshad 5.1 Introduction 147 5.2 Magnetic Characteristics of MXenes 150 5.3 Mechanical Characteristics of MXenes 162 5.4 Thermal Characteristics of MXenes 171 5.5 Conclusion 178 6 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composites: Fabrication Methods, Processing, Properties and Applications 185Zhenting Yin, Pengfei Jia and Bibo Wang 6.1 Introduction 185 6.2 Fabrication Methods and Processing 187 6.3 Properties 193 6.4 Applications 203 6.5 Conclusion and Outlook 209 7 Structural, Morphological and Tribological Properties of Polymer/MXene Composites 221Humira Assad, Ishrat Fatma, Praveen Kumar Sharma and Ashish Kumar 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Overview of MXene 225 7.3 MXene/Polymer Nanocomposites 225 7.4 MXene/Polymer Nanocomposite Fabrication Methods 227 7.5 Characteristics of Polymer/MXene Composites 230 7.6 Novel Applications of Polymer/MXene Composites 244 7.7 Conclusion and Outlook 247 8 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composites for Dielectric Applications 257Karuppasamy P., Sennappan M., Hemavathi B., Manjunath H. R. and Anjanpura V. Raghu 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 Synthesis of MXene 258 8.3 Modification Strategies of MXene 263 8.4 Synthesis Methods and Fabrication of MXene-Based Polymer Composites 264 8.5 Properties of MXene/Polymer Composite 266 8.6 Dielectric Applications of MXene/Polymer Composite Materials 274 8.7 Conclusion 280 9 MXenes-Reinforced Polymer Composites for Microwave Absorption and Electromagnetic Interference Shielding Applications 287B. D. S. Deeraj, Jitha S. Jayan, Asok Aparna, Appukuttan Saritha and Kuruvilla Joseph 9.1 Introduction to MXenes 287 9.2 Materials for EMI Shielding and Microwave Absorption 292 9.3 MXenes-Based Materials for EMI Shielding and Microwave Absorption 294 9.4 EMI Shielding Mechanisms for MXene-Based Materials 296 9.5 MXenes/Polymer Composites for EMI Shielding and Microwave Absorption 297 9.6 Electrospun Fibers with MXenes as Additives 304 9.7 Conclusions and Future Outlook 311 10 Polymer/MXene Composites for Supercapacitor and Electrochemical Double Layer Capacitor Applications 321Anju C. 10.1 Introduction 321 10.2 MXene-Polymer Composites 323 10.3 Applications of MXene Polymer Composites for Supercapacitor Applications 327 10.4 Challenges and Future Perspectives 350 10.5 Conclusion 350 11 MXene-Based Polymer Composites for Hazardous Gas and Volatile Organic Compound Detection 359Sachin Karki, Rajashree Bhuyan, Sachin R. Geed and Pravin G. Ingole 11.1 Introduction 359 11.2 Synthesis of MXenes and MXene–Polymer Composites 361 11.3 Properties of MXenes and MXene–Polymer Composites 367 11.4 Mxene–Polymer Composites Applications 369 11.5 Future Directions 379 11.6 Conclusion 380 12 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composites as Flexible Wearable Sensors 389J. Aarthi, K. Selvaraju, S. Gowri, K. Kirubavathi and Ananthakumar Ramadoss 12.1 Introduction 389 12.2 Performance Parameter for Flexible Pressure and Strain Sensor 391 12.3 Design of MXenes/Polymer Composites as Flexible Pressure Sensors 393 12.4 Design of MXenes/Polymer Composites as Flexible Strain Sensors 401 12.5 Design of MXenes/Biopolymer Composites as a Flexible Pressure Sensor 411 12.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 416 13 MXene-Based Polymer Composites for Various Biomedical Applications 423Jamuna Bai Aswathanarayan, Subba Rao V. Madhunapantula and Ravishankar Rai Vittal 13.1 Introduction to MXenes 423 13.2 Synthesis of MXenes and Their Physicochemical Properties 424 13.3 Biomedical Applications of MXenes 426 13.4 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 450 14 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composite Membranes for Water Desalination and Wastewater Treatment 459Anjana Sreekumar, Ajil R. Nair, Akhila Raman, Akhil Sivan, Mayank Pandey, Kalim Deshmukh and Saritha Appukuttan 14.1 Introduction 459 14.2 Preparation 461 14.3 Properties of MXene/Polymer Composites 467 14.4 MXene Composite Membranes: Potentiality in Wastewater Treatment and Water Desalination 472 14.5 Conclusion and Future Outlook 491 15 MXene-Based Polymer Composite Membranes for Pervaporation and Gas Separation 501S. Manobalan and T. P. Sumangala 15.1 Introduction 501 15.2 Development of MXene-Based Polymer Composite Membrane 503 15.3 Pervaporation 512 15.4 Gas Separation 529 15.5 Conclusion and Future Work 539 Acknowledgement 540 References 540 Index 547

Read more less

Book SynopsisFUNCTIONALIZED CARBON NANOTUBES FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS The book highlights established research and technology on current and emerging trends and biomedical applications of functionalized carbon nanotubes by providing academic researchers and scientists in industry, as well as high-tech start-ups, with knowledge of the modern practices that will revolutionize using functionalized carbon nanotubes. Nanotechnology suggests fascinating opportunities for a variety of applications in biomedical fields, including bioimaging and targeted delivery of biomacromolecules into cells. Numerous strategies have been recommended to functionalize carbon nanotubes with raised solubility for efficient use in biomedical applications. Functionalized carbon nanotubes have unique arrangements and extravagant mechanical, thermal, magnetic, optical, electrical, surface, and chemical properties, and the combination of these features gives them widespread biomedical applications. Functionalized carbon nanotTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Overview of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes 1 1 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes: An Introduction 3 Sheerin Masroor 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Carbon Nanotube’s Classification 6 1.3 Structural and Morphological Analysis of Carbon Nanotubes 7 1.4 Synthetic Techniques of Carbon Nanotubes 8 1.5 Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes 9 1.6 Commercial Scale Use of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes 12 1.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects 14 References 15 2 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes: Synthesis and Characterization 21 Neelam Sharma, Shubhra Pareek, Rahul Shrivastava and Debasis Behera 2.1 Introduction 22 2.2 Synthesis Methods 24 2.2.1 Arc Discharge 24 2.2.2 Laser Ablation 25 2.2.3 Chemical Vapor Deposition 26 2.3 Characterization 27 2.3.1 Raman Spectroscopy 27 2.3.2 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FT-IR) 28 2.3.3 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 29 2.3.4 Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) 29 2.3.5 Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) 30 2.3.6 X-Ray Diffraction (XRD) 31 2.3.7 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 32 2.4 Functionalized Routes of CNTs 33 2.4.1 Surface Oxidation 33 2.4.2 Doping Heteroatoms 33 2.4.3 Alkali Activation 33 2.4.4 Sulfonation 34 2.4.5 Halogenation 34 2.4.6 Grafting 34 2.4.6.1 Grafting via Oxygen-Containing Groups 35 2.4.6.2 Grafting via Diazonium Compounds 36 2.4.6.3 Other Grafting Methods 37 2.4.7 Non-Covalent Functionalization of CNTs 37 2.4.8 Deposition on Functionalized CNTs 37 2.4.9 Physiochemical Approaches 38 2.4.10 Electrochemical Deposition 38 2.4.11 Electroless Deposition 39 2.5 Conclusion 39 References 40 3 Carbon Nanotubes: Types of Functionalization 49 Manilal Murmu, Debanjan Dey, Naresh Chandra Murmu and Priyabrata Banerjee 3.1 Introduction 50 3.2 Carbon Nanotubes 50 3.3 Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes 52 3.3.1 Covalent Functionalization 52 3.3.2 Non-Covalent Functionalization of Carbon Nanotubes 58 3.3.2.1 Reversibility in Non-Covalent Functionalization 63 3.3.2.2 Solvent Variation in Non-Covalent Functionalization 64 3.3.3.3 pH of the System in Non-Covalent Functionalization 64 3.3.3.4 Temperature Responsive System in Non-Covalent Functionalization 65 3.4 Conclusion and Future Outlook 65 Acknowledgements 65 Web Links 66 References 66 4 Functionalization Carbon Nanotubes Innovate on Medical Technology 75 Afroz Aslam, Jeenat Aslam, Hilal Ahmad Parray and Chaudhery Mustansar Hussain 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Functionalization CNTs for Biomedical Applications 78 4.3 Potential Applications of CNTs in Cancer Therapy 79 4.3.1 Anti-Tumor Immunotherapy 80 4.3.2 Anti-Tumor Hyperthermia Therapy 80 4.3.3 Anti-Tumor Chemotherapy 81 4.3.4 Other Cancer Treatment Strategies 82 4.4 Treatment of Central Nervous System Disorders 82 4.5 Treatment of Infectious Diseases 84 4.6 CNTs-Based Transdermal Drug Delivery 85 4.7 f-CNTs for Vaccination 86 4.8 Application of f-CNTs in Tissue Engineering 86 4.9 Conclusion 88 Important Websites 89 References 89 Part 2: Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes: Current and Emerging Biomedical Applications 95 5 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes: Applications in Biosensing 97 N. Palaniappan, Nidhi Vashistha and Ruby Aslam 5.1 Introduction 97 5.2 CNTs-Based Biosensors 99 5.2.1 Electrochemical Biosensors 100 5.2.1.1 Electrochemical Enzyme Sensors 100 5.2.1.2 Electrochemical Immunosensors 101 5.2.1.3 Electrochemical DNA Sensors 102 5.2.1.4 Non-Biomolecule Based Electrochemical Sensors 104 5.2.2 Optical CNT Sensors 105 5.2.3 Field-Effect CNTs Sensors 106 5.2.4 CNT Human Strain Sensor 107 5.3 Conclusion 108 References 108 6 Applications of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes in Drug Delivery Systems 117 N. Palaniappan, Małgorzata Kujawska and Kader Poturcu 6.1 Introduction 118 6.2 Nanoparticles-Doped Carbon Nanotubes 121 6.3 Brain-Targeted Delivery 123 6.4 The Organic Molecules Functionalized CNTs as Drug Delivery Vehicles 125 6.5 Functionalized CNTs with Nanoparticles for Drug Active Molecular Mechanism 126 6.5.1 Future of Scope of Functionalized Carbon Nanotube Drug Delivery Application 126 6.6 Conclusion 127 References 127 7 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes for Gene Therapy 139 Tejas Agnihotri, Tanuja Shinde, Manoj Gitte, Pankaj Kumar Paradia, Rakesh Kumar Tekade and Aakanchha Jain 7.1 Introduction 140 7.2 Functionalized CNTs and Gene Therapy 141 7.3 Cellular Uptake of CNT 146 7.4 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes and Cancer 147 7.5 Miscellaneous Diseases and Gene Delivery Through Functionalized CNT 150 7.6 Toxicology and Environmental Aspects of Functionalized CNT 158 7.6.1 Cellular Toxicity 159 7.6.2 Liver Toxicity 159 7.6.3 Central Nervous System Toxicity 160 7.6.4 Cardiovascular Toxicity 161 7.7 Regulatory Concerns Over Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes 162 7.8 Conclusion and Future Prospects 164 Important Website 165 References 165 8 Applications of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes in Cancer Therapy and Diagnosis 171 Irshad Ahmad, Talat Parween, Lina Khandare, Aafaq Tantray and Weqar Ahmad Siddiqi 8.1 Introduction 172 8.2 Characteristic Properties of CNTs and Their Performance 175 8.2.1 Physicochemical Properties of CNTs 176 8.3 The Techniques of CNTs Functionalization 177 8.4 Application of Carbon Nanotubes in Cancer Therapy and Diagnostic 180 8.4.1 The Use of Carbon Nanotubes in Cancer Treatment 180 8.4.2 Intracellular Targeting Using Carbon Nanotubes 180 8.4.2.1 Nucleus Targeting 181 8.4.2.2 Cytoplasm Targeting 181 8.4.2.3 Mitochondria Targeting 181 8.4.3 CNTs for Immunotherapy 182 8.4.4 Cancer Stem Cell Inhibition 183 8.5 Carbon Nanotubes in Cancer Diagnosis 183 8.5.1 CNTs in Cancer Imaging 184 8.5.1.1 Raman Imaging 184 8.5.1.2 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Imaging 184 8.5.1.3 Ultrasonography 184 8.5.1.4 Photoacoustic Imaging 185 8.5.1.5 Near‐Infrared Fluorescence Imaging 185 8.6 Future Prospects 186 8.7 Conclusion 186 Important Websites 187 References 188 9 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes for Biomedical Imaging: The Recent Advances 197 Alina Abbas, Saman Zehra, Ruby Aslam, Mohammad Mobin and Shahidul Islam bhat 9.1 Introduction 198 9.2 CNT-Based Imaging Methods 199 9.2.1 Fluorescence Imaging 200 9.2.2 Raman Imaging 204 9.2.3 Photoacoustic Imaging 207 9.2.4 Magnetic Resonance Imaging 209 9.2.5 Nuclear Imaging 212 9.3 Prospects and Challenges 212 9.4 Conclusion 214 References 214 10 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes for Artificial Bone Tissue Engineering 225 Sougata Ghosh and Ebrahim Mostafavi 10.1 Introduction 226 10.2 CNT-Based Scaffolds and Implants 230 10.2.1 Hydroxyapatite 231 10.2.2 Polymers 234 10.2.2.1 Poly(ε-Caprolactone) 235 10.2.2.2 Polymethyl-Methacrylate 237 10.2.2.3 Poly(Lactide-Co-Glycolide) 238 10.2.2.4 Poly-L-Lactic Acid 240 10.2.2.5 Polyvinyl Alcohol 241 10.2.2.6 Others 242 10.2.3 Biopolymers 242 10.2.3.1 Chitosan 244 10.2.3.2 Collagen 244 10.2.3.3 Others 247 10.3 Intellectual Property Rights and Commercialization Aspects 248 10.4 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 251 References 252 11 Application of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes in Biomimetic/Bioinspired Systems 257 Mohammad Mobin, Ruby Aslam, Saman Zehra, Jeenat Aslam and Shahidul Islam bhat 11.1 Introduction 258 11.2 Naturally Occurring Materials 259 11.2.1 Nacre and Bone 259 11.2.2 Petal Effect and Gecko Feet 259 11.2.3 Lotus Effect 260 11.2.4 Structural Colors, Antireflection, and Light Collection 261 11.3 Bioinspired Functionalized CNTs Material 261 11.4 Challenges and Solutions in Using CNTs 272 11.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 272 References 274 12 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes: Applications in Tissue Engineering 281 Ajahar Khan, Khalid A. Alamry and Raed H. Althomali 12.1 Introduction 282 12.2 Structural, Physical, and Chemical Properties 284 12.3 Interactions and Biodegradation of CNTs with Biomolecule 287 12.4 Bio-Security of CNT-Based Scaffolds Toward In Vivo Analyses 288 12.5 CNTs Towards the Bone Compatibility 293 12.6 Applications of Functionalized CNTs in Tissue Engineering 294 12.6.1 Functionalized CNTs for Cardiac Tissue Engineering 294 12.6.2 Functionalized CNTs for Neuronal Tissue Regeneration 297 12.6.3 Functionalized CNT for Cartilage Tissue Engineering 298 12.6.4 CNT for Bone Tissue Regeneration 300 12.7 Future Perspectives and Challenges 303 12.8 Conclusion 304 Important Websites 305 References 305 13 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes for Cell Tracking 319 Sagar Salave, Dhwani Rana, Jyotsna Vitore and Aakanchha Jain Abbreviations 319 13.1 Introduction 320 13.2 Carbon Nanotubes 321 13.2.1 Cellular Interaction of CNTs 325 13.3 Cellular Tracking via CNT 325 13.3.1 Effect of the Surface Coating of CNTs in Single-Particle Tracking 328 13.4 3D Tracking Using CNTs 328 13.4.1 Detection of Single Protein Molecules Through CNTs 329 13.4.2 Stem Cell Labeling and Tracking Through CNTs 330 13.4.3 Labelling and Tracking of Human Pancreatic Cells Through CNTs 330 13.4.4 CNT as Macrophage Carrying Microdevices 331 13.4.4.1 Intracellular Fluctuations and CNT 331 13.4.5 Limitations of CNTs 332 13.5 Concluding Remarks and Future Perspective 332 Important Links 333 Acknowledgment 333 References 333 14 Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes for Treatment of Various Diseases 339 Ajahar Khan, Khalid A. Alamry and Raed H. Althomali 14.1 Introduction 340 14.2 CNTs: Basic Structure, and Synthesis Methods 342 14.2.1 Structure and Synthesis of CNTs 342 14.2.2 Arc Discharge Technique 342 14.2.3 Laser Ablation Technique 342 14.2.4 Catalytic Chemical Vapor Deposition Technique 343 14.3 Functionalization of CNTs 343 14.3.1 Covalent Functionalization 344 14.3.2 Non-Covalent Functionalization 344 14.4 Toxicity/Bio-Safety Profile of Carbon Nanotubes 346 14.5 Investigating the Promising Biomedical Effects of Functionalized CNTs 349 14.5.1 Functionalized CNTs-Based Remediation of Infectious Diseases 350 14.5.2 Functionalized CNTs for the Treatment of Central Nervous System Disorders (CNS) 350 14.5.3 Functionalized CNTs for Gene Delivery 351 14.5.4 Implication of Functionalized CNTs in Cancer Diagnosis and Treatment 354 14.5.5 Functionalized CNTs for Drug Targeting and Release 357 14.6 Future Prospective 362 14.7 Conclusion 363 Important Websites 364 References 365 15 Role of Functionalized Carbon Nanotubes in Antimicrobial Activity: A Review 377 Monika Aggarwal, Samina Husain and Basant Kumar 15.1 Introduction 378 15.2 Introduction to CNTs 378 15.2.1 Classification of CNTs 379 15.2.2 Structure of CNTs 381 15.3 Overview on CNTs Functionalization 382 15.3.1 Types of Functionalization 384 15.4 Anti-Microbial Activity of f-CNTs: Interaction and Action 387 15.5 Antifungal Activity of f-CNTs 388 15.6 Antibacterial Activity of f-CNTs 390 15.6.1 For SWNTs 390 15.6.2 For MWCNTs 392 15.7 Commercial Application of Antimicrobial Activity of f-CNTs 400 15.8 Overview on Antimicrobial Activity of f-CNTs 401 15.9 Future Scope 405 15.10 Conclusion 405 Acknowledgement 406 References 406 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisBIODEGRADABLE MATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS Biodegradable materials have ascended in importance in recent years and this book comprehensively discusses all facets and applications in 29 chapters making it a one-stop shop. Biodegradable materials have today become more compulsory because of increased environmental concerns and the growing demand for polymeric and plastic materials. Despite our sincere efforts to recycle used plastic materials, they ultimately tend to enter the oceans, which has led to grave pollution. It is necessary, therefore, to ensure that these wastes do not produce any hazards in the future. This has made an urgency to replace the synthetic material with green material in almost all possible areas of application. Biodegradable Materials and Their Applications covers a wide range of subjects and approaches, starting with an introduction to biodegradable material applications. Chapters focus on the development of various types of biodegradable materials with theiTable of ContentsPreface xxv 1 Biodegradable Materials in Electronics 1S. Vishali, M. Susila and S. Kiruthika 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Biodegradable Materials in Electronics 3 1.2.1 Advantages of Biodegradable Materials 4 1.3 Silk 5 1.4 Polymers 7 1.4.1 Natural Polymers 7 1.4.2 Synthetic Polymers 8 1.5 Cellulose 10 1.6 Paper 11 1.7 Others 13 1.8 Biodegradable Electronic Components 16 1.9 Semiconductors 17 1.10 Substrate 18 1.11 Biodegradable Dielectrics 18 1.12 Insulators and Conductors 19 1.13 Conclusion 19 Declaration About Copyright 20 References 20 2 Biodegradable Thermoelectric Materials 29Niladri Sarkar, Gyanaranjan Sahoo, Anupam Sahoo and Bigyan Ranjan Jali 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Biopolymer-Based Renewable Composites: An Alternative to Synthetic Materials 32 2.3 Working Principle of Thermoelectric Materials 35 2.4 Biopolymer Composite for Thermoelectric Application 36 2.4.1 Polylactic Acid–Based Thermoelectric Materials 36 2.4.2 Cellulose-Based Biocomposites as Thermoelectric Materials 37 2.4.3 Chitosan-Based Biocomposites as Thermoelectric Materials 39 2.4.4 Agarose-Based Biocomposites as Thermoelectric Materials 41 2.4.5 Starch-Based Biocomposites as Thermoelectric Materials 43 2.4.6 Carrageenan-Based Biocomposites as Thermoelectric Materials 45 2.4.7 Pullulan-Based Composites as Thermoelectric Materials 46 2.4.8 Lignin-Based Biocomposites as Thermoelectric Materials 46 2.5 Heparin-Based Biocomposites as Future Thermoelectric Materials 48 2.6 Conclusions 48 References 49 3 Biodegradable Electronics: A Newly Emerging Environmental Technology 55Malini S., Kalyan Raj and K.S. Anantharaju 3.1 Introduction 56 3.2 Properties of Biodegradable Materials in Electronics 57 3.3 Transformational Applications of Biodegradable Materials in Electronics 58 3.3.1 Cellulose 59 3.3.2 Silk 60 3.3.3 Stretchable Hydrogel 62 3.3.4 Conjugated Polymers and Metals 64 3.3.5 Graphene 65 3.3.6 Composites 67 3.4 Biodegradation Mechanisms 68 3.5 Conclusions 70 Acknowledgements 70 References 71 4 Biodegradable and Bioactive Films or Coatings From Fish Waste Materials 75Juliana Santos Delava, Keiti Lopes Maestre, Carina Contini Triques, Fabiano Bisinella Scheufele, Veronice Slusarski-Santana and Mônica Lady Fiorese 4.1 Introduction 76 4.2 Fishery Chain Industry 78 4.2.1 Evolution of the Fishery Chain Industry 78 4.2.2 Applications of Fish Waste Materials 80 4.3 Films or Coatings Based on Proteins From Fish Waste Materials 85 4.3.1 Films or Coatings for Food Packaging 85 4.3.2 Development of Protein-Based Films or Coatings 89 4.3.2.1 Fish Proteins and Processes for Obtaining Collagen/Gelatin and Myofibrillar Proteins 89 4.3.2.2 Development of Biodegradable and Bioactive Films or Coating 94 4.3.3 Development of Protein-Based Films or Coatings Incorporated With Additives and/or Plasticizers 97 4.3.3.1 Films or Coatings Incorporated With Organic Additives and/or Plasticizers and Their Applications 101 4.3.3.2 Films or Coatings Incorporated With Inorganic Additives and/or Plasticizers 119 4.4 Conclusion 126 References 127 5 Biodegradable Superabsorbent Materials 141Marcia Parente Melo da Costa and Ivana Lourenço de Mello Ferreira 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Biohydrogels: Superabsorbent Materials 142 5.3 Polysaccharides: Biopolymers from Renewable Sources 143 5.3.1 Carboxymethylcellulose (CMC) 145 5.3.2 Chitosan (CH) 148 5.3.3 Alginate 149 5.3.4 Carrageenans 150 5.4 Applications of Superabsorbent Biohydrogels (SBHs) Based on Polysaccharides 152 5.5 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 159 Acknowledgments 160 References 160 6 Bioplastics in Personal Protective Equipment 173Tapia-Fuentes Jocelyn, Cruz-Salas Arely Areanely, Alvarez-Zeferino Juan Carlos, Martínez-Salvador Carolina, Pérez-Aragón Beatriz and Vázquez-Morillas Alethia 6.1 Introduction 174 6.2 Conventional Personal Protective Equipment 175 6.2.1 Face Masks 176 6.2.1.1 Surgical Mask 176 6.2.1.2 N95 Face Masks 177 6.2.1.3 KN95 Face Masks 178 6.2.1.4 Cloth Face Masks 179 6.2.1.5 Two-Layered Face Mask (or Hygienic) 180 6.2.2 Gloves 181 6.2.2.1 Latex 181 6.2.2.2 Nitrile 182 6.2.2.3 Vinyl 183 6.2.2.4 Foil (Polyethylene) 184 6.3 Biodegradable and Biobased PPE 185 6.3.1 Face Masks 185 6.3.1.1 Polylactic Acid 185 6.3.1.2 Polybutylene Succinate 187 6.3.1.3 Polyvinyl Alcohol 188 6.3.2 Gloves 190 6.3.2.1 Butadiene Rubber (BR) 190 6.3.2.2 Polyisoprene Rubber 191 6.4 Environmental Impacts Caused by Personal Protective Equipment Made of Bioplastics 192 6.4.1 Source and Raw Materials 192 6.4.2 End of Life Scenarios 193 6.4.3 Remarks on Biodegradability 194 6.5 International Standards Applied to Biodegradable Plastics and Bioplastics 194 6.6 Conclusions 199 References 200 7 Biodegradable Protective Films 211Asra Tariq and Naveed Ahmad 7.1 Introduction 212 7.1.1 Types of Protective Films 213 7.2 Biodegradable Protective Films 214 7.2.1 Processing of Biodegradable Protective Films 221 7.2.2 Limitations Faced by Biodegradable Protective Films 222 References 223 8 No Plastic, No Pollution: Replacement of Plastics in the Equipments of Personal Protection 229Beenish Saba 8.1 Introduction 229 8.2 Bioplastics 230 8.3 Biodegradation of Bioplastics 232 8.4 Production of Bioplastics from Plant Sources 234 8.5 Production of Bioplastics from Microbial Resources 234 8.6 What Are PPEs Made Off? 236 8.6.1 Face Masks 236 8.6.2 Face and Eye Shields 236 8.6.3 Gloves 237 8.7 Biodegradable Materials for PPE 237 8.8 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 238 References 238 9 Biodegradable Materials in Dentistry 243Sharmila Jasmine and Rajapandiyan Krishnamoorthy 9.1 Introduction 243 9.2 Biodegradable Materials 246 9.2.1 Synthetic Polymers 246 9.2.2 Natural Polymers 246 9.2.3 Biodegradable Ceramics 247 9.2.4 Bioactive Glass 247 9.2.5 Biodegradable Metals 247 9.3 Biodegradable Materials in Suturing 248 9.4 Biodegradable Materials in Imaging and Diagnostics 248 9.5 Biodegradable Materials in Oral Maxillofacial and Craniofacial Surgery 249 9.6 Biodegradable Materials in Resorbable Plate and Screw System 250 9.7 Biodegradable Materials in Alveolar Ridge Preservation 250 9.8 Biodegradable Materials of Nanotopography in Cancer Therapy 251 9.9 Biodegradable Materials in Endodontics 252 9.10 Biodegradable Materials in Orthodontics 253 9.11 Biodegradable Materials in Periodontics 253 9.12 Conclusion 254 References 254 10 Biodegradable and Biocompatible Polymeric Materials for Dentistry Applications 261Pallavi K.C., Arun M. Isloor and Lakshmi Nidhi Rao 10.1 Introduction 262 10.2 Polysaccharides 264 10.2.1 Chitosan 264 10.2.2 Cellulose 275 10.2.3 Starch 277 10.2.4 Alginate 279 10.2.5 Hyaluronic Acid (HA) 281 10.3 Proteins 283 10.3.1 Collagen 283 10.3.2 Fibrin 285 10.3.3 Elastin 286 10.3.4 Gelatins 287 10.3.5 Silk 288 10.4 Biopolyesters 288 10.4.1 Poly (Glycolic Acid) (PGA) 288 10.4.2 Poly (Lactic Acid) PLA 288 10.4.3 Poly (Lactide-co-Glycolide) (PLGA) 289 10.4.4 Polycaprolactone 290 10.4.5 Poly (Propylene Fumarate) 291 10.5 Conclusion 291 References 292 11 Biodegradable Biomaterials in Bone Tissue Engineering 299Mehdi Ebrahimi 11.1 Introduction 299 11.2 Essential Characteristics and Considerations in Bone Scaffold Design 302 11.3 Fabrication Technologies 303 11.4 Incorporation of Bioactive Molecules During Scaffold Fabrication 309 11.5 Biocompatibility and Interface Between Biodegradation and New Tissue Formation 319 11.6 Biodegradation of Calcium Phosphate Biomaterials 320 11.7 Biodegradation of Polymeric Biomaterials 324 11.8 Importance of Bone Remodeling 325 11.9 Conclusion 326 References 327 12 Biodegradable Elastomer 335Preety Ahuja and Sanjeev Kumar Ujjain 12.1 Introduction 335 12.2 Biodegradation Testing 337 12.3 Biodegradable Elastomers: An Overview 338 12.3.1 Preparation Strategies 340 12.3.2 Biodegradation and Erosion 342 12.4 Application of Biodegradable Elastomers 342 12.4.1 Drug Delivery 343 12.4.2 Tissue Engineering 345 12.4.2.1 Neural and Retinal Applications 346 12.4.2.2 Cardiovascular Applications 346 12.4.2.3 Orthopedic Applications 347 12.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 347 References 348 13 Biodegradable Implant Materials 357Levent Oncel and Mehmet Bugdayci 13.1 Introduction 357 13.2 Medical Implants 358 13.3 Biomaterials 358 13.3.1 Biomaterial Types 359 13.3.1.1 Polymer Biomaterials 359 13.3.1.2 Metallic Biomaterials 360 13.3.1.3 Ceramic Biomaterials 363 13.4 Biodegradable Implant Materials 364 13.4.1 Biodegradable Metals 364 13.4.1.1 Magnesium-Based Biodegradable Materials 365 13.4.1.2 Iron-Based Biodegradable Materials 367 13.4.2 Biodegradable Polymers 368 13.4.2.1 Polyesters 369 13.4.2.2 Polycarbonates 370 13.4.2.3 Polyanhydrides 370 13.4.2.4 Poly(ortho esters) 370 13.4.2.5 Poly(propylene fumarate) 371 13.4.2.6 Poly(phosphazenes) 371 13.4.2.7 Polyphosphoesters 372 13.4.2.8 Polyurethanes 372 13.5 Conclusion 372 References 373 14 Current Strategies in Pulp and Periodontal Regeneration Using Biodegradable Biomaterials 377Mehdi Ebrahimi and Waruna L. Dissanayaka 14.1 Introduction 378 14.2 Biodegradable Materials in Dental Pulp Regeneration 379 14.2.1 Collagen-Based Gels 380 14.2.2 Platelet-Rich Plasma 382 14.2.3 Plasma-Rich Fibrin 382 14.2.4 Gelatin 383 14.2.5 Fibrin 384 14.2.6 Alginate 386 14.2.7 Chitosan 386 14.2.8 Amino Acid Polymers 388 14.2.9 Polymers of Lactic Acid 389 14.2.10 Composite Polymer Scaffolds 390 14.3 Biodegradable Biomaterials and Strategies for Tissue Engineering of Periodontium 392 14.4 Coapplication of Auxiliary Agents With Biodegradable Biomaterials for Periodontal Tissue Engineering 396 14.4.1 Stem Cells Applications in Periodontal Regeneration 396 14.4.2 Bioactive Molecules for Periodontal Regeneration 398 14.4.3 Antimicrobial and Anti-Inflammatory Agents for Periodontal Regeneration 400 14.5 Regeneration of Periodontal Tissues Complex Using Biodegradable Biomaterials 401 14.5.1 PDL Regeneration 401 14.5.2 Cementum and Alveolar Bone Regeneration 402 14.5.3 Integrated Regeneration of Periodontal Complex Structures 402 14.6 Recent Advances in Periodontal Regeneration Using Supportive Techniques During Application of Biodegradable Biomaterials 404 14.6.1 Laser Application in Periodontium Regeneration 404 14.6.2 Gene Therapy in Periodontal Regeneration 405 14.7 Conclusion and Future Remarks 408 References 409 15 A Review on Health Care Applications of Biopolymers 429Vijesh A. M. and Arun M. Isloor 15.1 Introduction 430 15.2 Biodegradable Polymers 431 15.3 Metals and Alloys for Biomedical Applications 437 15.4 Ceramics 441 15.5 Biomaterials Used in Medical 3D Printing 445 15.6 Conclusion 446 References 446 16 Biodegradable Materials for Bone Defect Repair 457Sharmila Jasmine and Rajapandiyan Krishnamoorthy 16.1 Introduction 457 16.2 Natural Materials in Bone Tissue Engineering 460 16.2.1 Collagen 460 16.2.2 Chitoson 460 16.2.3 Fibrin 460 16.2.4 Silk 461 16.3 Other Materials 461 16.4 Biodegradable Synthetic Polymers on Bone Tissue Engineering 461 16.4.1 Poly (ε-caprolactone) 462 16.4.2 Polyglycolic Acid 462 16.4.3 Polylactic Acid 462 16.4.4 Poly d,l-Lactic-Co-Glycolic Acid 462 16.4.5 Poly (3-Hydroxybutyrate) 463 16.4.6 Poly (para-dioxanone) 463 16.4.7 Hyaluronan-Based Biodegradable Polymer 463 16.5 Biodegradable Ceramics 463 16.6 Conclusion 465 References 465 17 Biosurfactant: A Biodegradable Antimicrobial Substance 471Maria da Gloria C. Silva, Anderson O. de Medeiros and Leonie A. Sarubbo 17.1 Introduction 472 17.2 Biosurfactants 474 17.2.1 Biodegrability of Biosurfactants 476 17.3 Biodegradation Method Tests for Surfactants Molecules 478 17.3.1 OECD Biodegradability Tests 478 17.3.2 ASTM Surfactants’ Biodegradability Test 479 17.4 Antimicrobial Activity of Biosurfactants 479 17.5 Progress in Industrial Production of Sustainable Surfactants 480 17.6 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 480 References 481 18 Disposable Bioplastics 487Tuba Saleem, Ayesha Mahmood, Muhammad Zubair, Ijaz Rasul, Aansa Naseem and Habibullah Nadeem 18.1 Introduction 488 18.2 Classes of Disposable Bioplastics 489 18.2.1 Structure and Characteristics of Most Common Degradable PHAs 489 18.2.2 Properties of PHAs 489 18.2.2.1 Thermal Properties 489 18.2.2.2 Mechanical Properties 490 18.3 Pros and Cons 491 18.4 Substrates for the Production of Bioplastics 491 18.4.1 Agro-Waste as Substrate for PHA Synthesis 491 18.4.2 Cassava Peels as Substrate for PHAs Synthesis 492 18.4.3 Dairy Processing Waste as Substrate for PHA Synthesis 492 18.4.4 Sugar Industry Waste (molasses) as Substrate for PHA Synthesis 493 18.4.5 Waste Plant Oil as Substrate for PHA Synthesis 494 18.4.6 Coffee Industry Waste Carbon Substrate for PHAs Synthesis 494 18.4.7 Paper Mill Waste as Substrate for PHAs Synthesis 496 18.4.8 Kitchen Waste as Substrate for PHAs Synthesis 496 18.5 Microbial Sources of Bioplastic Production 497 18.6 Upstream Processing 498 18.6.1 Fermentation Strategies for PHA Production 498 18.7 Metabolic Pathways 499 18.7.1 Enzymes Involved in the Synthesis of PHAs 499 18.8 Microbial Cell Factories for PHAs Production 501 18.8.1 Pure Culture for PHA Synthesis 501 18.8.2 Mixed Cultures for PHA Synthesis 502 18.9 Synthesis 502 18.9.1 Blending Methods of PHB and PHBV Lignocellulosic Biocomposites 503 18.9.1.1 Solvent Casting 503 18.9.1.2 Extrusion Method 503 18.10 Factors Affecting PHA Production 504 18.10.1 Effect of pH 504 18.10.2 Composition of Feedstock 505 18.10.3 Inoculum Size and Fermentation Mode 505 18.11 Downstream Processing of Disposable Biopolymers 505 18.12 PHA Extraction and Purification Methods 506 18.13 Applications of Bioplastics/Disposable Bioplastics 506 18.13.1 Denitrification Applications in Wastewater Treatment 508 18.13.2 PHAs in Bone Scaffolds 509 18.14 Characterization of PHA 510 18.15 Biodegradation 510 18.15.1 Biodegradation of PHAs 510 18.16 Plastics Versus Bioplastics 511 18.17 Challenges and Prospects for Production of Bioplastics 512 References 512 19 Plastic Biodegrading Microbes in the Environment and Their Applications 519Pooja Singh and Adeline Su Yien Ting Abbreviations 520 19.1 Introduction 520 19.2 Occurrence and Diversity of Plastic-Degrading Microbes in Natural Environments 522 19.3 Application of Plastic-Degrading Microbes 533 19.3.1 Role of Bacteria in Plastic Degradation 534 19.3.1.1 Actinobacteria 534 19.3.1.2 Bacteroidetes 535 19.3.1.3 Firmicutes 535 19.3.1.4 Proteobacteria 537 19.3.1.5 Cyanobacteria 538 19.3.2 Role of Fungi in Plastic Degradation 539 19.3.2.1 Ascomycota 539 19.3.2.2 Basidiomycota 541 19.3.2.3 Mucoromycota 541 19.4 Factors Influencing Plastic Degradation by Microbes 542 19.4.1 Microbial Factor 542 19.4.2 Polymer Characteristics 543 19.4.3 Environmental Condition 544 19.5 Biotechnological Advances in Microbial-Mediated Plastic Degradation 545 19.5.1 Biosourcing for Plastic Degraders from Various Environments 546 19.5.2 Multiomics Approach 547 19.5.3 Analytical Tools to Optimize Plastic Degradation 548 19.6 Conclusion 550 Acknowledgment 551 References 551 20 Paradigm Shift in Environmental Remediation Toward Sustainable Development: Biodegradable Materials and ICT Applications 565Biswajit Debnath, Saswati Gharami, Suparna Bhattacharyya, Adrija Das and Ankita Das 20.1 Introduction 566 20.2 Methodology 568 20.3 Application of Biodegradable Materials in Environmental Remediation and Sustainable Development 568 20.3.1 Biodegradable Sensors 568 20.3.2 Biosorbents and Biochars 573 20.3.3 Bioplastics 575 20.4 Discussion and Analysis 577 20.4.1 Application of ICT as Future Vision 577 20.4.2 Sustainability Aspects 579 20.5 Conclusion 581 Acknowledgment 581 References 581 21 Biodegradable Composite for Smart Packaging Applications 593S. Bharadwaj, Vivek Dhand and Y. Kalyana Lakshmi 21.1 Introduction to Packing Applications 594 21.1.1 Current Materials 595 21.1.2 Issues and Concerns 597 21.2 Biodegradable Materials 597 21.2.1 What are Biopolymers? 598 21.2.1.1 Starch 599 21.2.1.2 Cellulose 599 21.2.2 Advantages of Biopolymer Composites 599 21.2.3 List of Biopolymer Materials 600 21.3 Preparation of Composite 600 21.3.1 Identify the Materials 600 21.3.2 Fabrication of Biopolymer Composites 605 21.4 Indicators of Performance 607 21.5 Mechanical Properties 610 21.6 Biodegradable Test 612 21.7 Smart Packing Applications 612 21.7.1 Active Biopackaging 613 21.7.2 Informative and Responsive Packaging 614 21.7.3 Ergonomic Packaging 614 21.7.4 Scavenging Films 614 21.7.5 NanoSensors 615 21.7.6 Product Identification and Tempering Proof Product 615 21.7.7 Indicators 616 21.7.8 Nanosensors and Absorbers 616 21.8 Testing of Packaging Using Different Standard 616 21.9 Conclusions 617 References 617 22 Impact of Biodegradable Packaging Materials on Food Quality: A Sustainable Approach 627Mohammad Amir, Naushin Bano, Mohd. Rehan Zaheer, Tahayya Haq and Roohi 22.1 Introduction 628 22.2 Food Packaging 628 22.3 Food Packaging Material 629 22.3.1 Types of Food Packaging Materials 630 22.3.1.1 Paper-Based Packaging 631 22.3.1.2 Glass-Based Packaging 632 22.3.1.3 Metal-Based Packaging 633 22.3.1.4 Plastic-Based Packaging 634 22.4 Biodegradable Food Packaging Materials 635 22.5 Different Biodegradable Materials for Food Packaging 636 22.5.1 Polyhydroxyalkanoates 637 22.5.2 Polyhydroxybutyrates 638 22.5.3 Poly (4-Hydroxybutyrate) (P4HB) 639 22.5.4 Poly-(3-Hydroxybutyrate-Co-3-Hydroxy Valerate) 640 22.5.5 Poly-Hydroxy-Octanoate 640 22.5.6 Starch-Based Material 640 22.5.7 Thermoplastic Starch 641 22.5.8 Starch-Based Nanocomposite Films 642 22.5.9 Cellulose-Based 643 22.5.10 Polylactic Acid (PLA) 644 22.6 Applications of Biodegradable Material in Edible Film Coating 646 22.7 Conclusion 647 Acknowledgment 648 References 648 23 Biodegradable Pots—For Sustainable Environment 653Elsa Cherian, Jobil J. Arackal, Jayasree Joshi T. and Anitha Krishnan V. C. 23.1 Introduction 653 23.2 Biodegradable Pots 655 23.3 Materials for the Fabrication of Biodegradables Pots 656 23.3.1 Biodegradable Planting Pots Based on Bioplastics 656 23.3.2 Biopots Based on Industrial and Agricultural Waste 658 23.4 Synthesis of Biodegradable Pots 661 23.5 Effect of Biopots on Plant Growth and Quality 663 23.6 Quality Testing of Biodegradable Pots 664 23.7 Consumer Preferences of Biodegradable Pots 665 23.8 Future Perspectives 666 23.9 Conclusion 667 References 667 24 Applications of Biodegradable Polymers and Plastics 673Parveen Saini, Gurpreet Kaur, Jandeep Singh and Harminder Singh 24.1 Introduction 674 24.2 Biopolymers/Bioplastics 675 24.3 Applications of Biodegradable Polymers/Plastics 677 24.3.1 Biomedical Applications 677 24.3.1.1 Biodegradable Polymers in the Development of Therapeutic Devices in Tissue Engineering 677 24.3.1.2 Biodegradable Polymers as Implants 678 24.3.1.3 Biobased Polymers as Drug Delivery Systems 679 24.3.2 Other Commercial Applications 679 24.3.2.1 Biodegradable Polymers as Packaging Materials 680 24.3.2.2 Biodegradable Plastics in Electronics, Automotives, and Agriculture 681 24.3.2.3 Biobased Polymer in 3D Printing 681 24.4 Conclusion 682 References 682 25 Biopolymeric Nanofibrous Materials for Environmental Remediation 687Pallavi K.C. and Arun M. Isloor 25.1 Introduction 688 25.2 Fabrication of Nanofibers 689 25.3 Nanofibrous Materials in Environmental Remediation 691 25.3.1 Water Purification 691 25.3.2 Air Filtration 702 25.3.3 Soil-Related Problems 705 25.4 Conclusions 708 References 709 26 Bioplastic Materials from Oils 715Aansa Naseem, Farrukh Azeem, Muhammad Hussnain Siddique, Sabir Hussain, Ijaz Rasul, Tuba Saleem, Arfaa Sajid and Habibullah Nadeem 26.1 Introduction 716 26.2 Natural Oils 720 26.2.1 Bioplastic Production from Natural Oils 720 26.3 Waste Oils 720 26.4 Types of Oily Wastes 721 26.4.1 Cooking Oil Waste 721 26.4.2 Fats from Animals 721 26.4.3 Effluents from Plant Oil Mills 722 26.5 Bioplastic Production from Oily Waste 722 26.6 Improvement in Bioplastic Production from Waste Oil by Genetic Approaches 723 26.7 Impact of Bioplastic Produced from Waste Cooking Oil 726 26.7.1 Health and Medicine 726 26.7.2 Environment 727 26.7.3 Population 727 26.8 Assessment Techniques for Bioplastic Synthesis Using Waste Oil 727 26.8.1 Economic Assessment 727 26.8.2 Environment Assessment 728 26.8.3 Sensitivity Analysis 728 26.8.4 Multiobjective Optimization 728 26.9 Conclusion 728 References 729 27 Protein Recovery Using Biodegradable Polymer 735Panchami H. R., Arun M. Isloor, Ahmad Fauzi Ismail and Rini Susanti 27.1 Introduction 736 27.2 Biodegradability and Biodegradable Polymer 737 27.2.1 Natural Biodegradable Polymers 739 27.2.1.1 Extracted from the Biomass 739 27.2.1.2 Extracted Directly by Natural or Genetically Modified Organism 740 27.2.2 Synthetic Biodegradable Polymers 740 27.3 Recovery of Protein by Coagulation/Flocculation Processes 740 27.3.1 Categories of Composite Coagulants 741 27.3.1.1 Inorganic Polymer Flocculants 741 27.3.1.2 Organic Polymer Flocculants 741 27.3.2 Mechanism of Bioflocculation 742 27.3.3 Some of the Examples for Protein Recovery Using Biodegradable Polymer 743 27.3.3.1 Chitosan as Flocculant 743 27.3.3.2 Lignosulfonate as Flocculant 745 27.3.3.3 Cellulose as Flocculant 747 27.4 Recovery of Proteins by Aqueous Two-Phase System 747 27.5 Types of the Aqueous Two-Phase System and Phase Components 748 27.6 Recovery Process and Factors Influencing the Aqueous Two-Phase System 749 27.7 Partition Coefficient and the Protein Recovery 751 27.8 Some of the Examples of Recovery of Protein by Biodegradable Polymers 751 27.9 Advantages of ATPS 752 27.10 Limitations 752 27.11 Challenges and Future Perspective 752 27.12 Recovery of Proteins by Membrane Technology 753 27.12.1 Classification of Membranes 753 27.12.2 Membrane Fouling by Protein Deposition 754 27.12.3 Recovery of a Protein by a Biodegradable Polymer 755 27.13 Limitations to Biodegradable Polymers 762 27.14 Conclusions and Future Remarks 762 References 763 28 Biodegradable Polymers in Electronic Devices 773Niharika Kulshrestha 28.1 Introduction 774 28.2 Role of Biodegradable Polymers 776 28.3 Various Biodegradable Polymers for Electronic Devices 777 28.3.1 Biodegradable Insulators 777 28.3.2 Biodegradable Semiconductors 779 28.3.3 Biodegradable Conductors 781 28.4 Conclusion 783 References 784 29 Importance and Applications of Biodegradable Materials and Bioplastics From the Renewable Resources 789Syed Riaz Ahmed, Fiaz Rasul, Aqsa Ijaz, Zunaira Anwar, Zarsha Naureen, Anam Riaz and Ijaz Rasul 29.1 Biodegradable Materials 790 29.2 Bioplastics 791 29.3 Biodegradable Polymers 794 29.3.1 Classification of Biodegradable Polymers 794 29.3.1.1 Gelatin 795 29.3.1.2 Chitosan 796 29.3.1.3 Starch 797 29.3.2 Properties of Bioplastics and Biodegradable Materials 797 29.4 Applications of Bioplastics and Biodegradable Materials in Agriculture 799 29.4.1 State-of-the-Art Different Applications of Bioplastics in Agriculture 800 29.4.1.1 Agricultural Nets 803 29.4.1.2 Grow Bags 803 29.4.1.3 Mulch Films 804 29.5 Applications of Microbial-Based Bioplastics in Medicine 805 29.5.1 Polylactones 805 29.5.2 Polyphosphoesters 805 29.5.3 Polycarbonates 806 29.5.4 Polylactic Acid 806 29.5.5 Polyhydroxyalkanoates 806 29.5.6 Biodegradable Stents 806 29.5.7 Memory Enhancer 807 29.6 Applications of Microbial-Based Bioplastics in Industries 808 29.6.1 Aliphatic Polyester and Starch 808 29.6.2 Cellulose Acetate and Starch 808 29.6.3 Cellulose and Its Derivative 808 29.6.4 Arboform 809 29.6.5 Mater-Bi 809 29.6.6 Bioceta 809 29.6.7 Polyhydroxyalkanoate 809 29.6.8 Loctron 810 29.6.9 Cereplast 810 29.7 Application of Bioplastics and Biodegradable Materials in Food Industry 811 29.7.1 Bioplastic and Its Resources 812 29.7.2 Food Packaging 812 29.7.3 Natural Polymers Used in Food Packaging 816 29.7.3.1 Starch-Based Natural Polymers 816 29.7.3.2 Cellulose-Based Natural Polymers 817 29.7.3.3 Chitosan or Chitin-Based Natural Polymers 817 29.7.4 Protein-Based Natural Polymers 818 29.7.4.1 Whey Protein 818 29.7.4.2 Zein 818 29.7.4.3 Soy Protein 818 29.7.5 Bioplastics Derived Chemically From Renewable Resources 819 29.7.5.1 Polylactic Acid (PLA) 819 29.7.5.2 Polyhydroxyalkanoate Composite 819 29.7.5.3 Polybutylene Succinate Composite 820 29.7.5.4 Furandicarboxylic Acid Composite 821 29.8 Application of Bioplastic Biomass for the Environmental Protection 821 29.8.1 Biodegradation of Bioplastics 822 29.8.2 Biodegradability and Environmental Effect of Renewable Materials 823 29.9 Conclusions and Future Prospects 825 References 825 Index 837

Read more less